JP2019126350A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine having novel game property, capable of executing a continuous hit performance by, not only an operation of a physical button, but also an operation in other forms, and generating an advantageous state for a player.SOLUTION: When a battle performance is being executed, a medal sensor (not shown) of a pachinko slot machine detects a credit operation of a medal, and when a sub CPU receives a medal supply command, the sub CPU control a performance of notification related to application of the ART in a liquid crystal display unit or the like according to the medal supply command. Especially, according to a number at which the sub CPU received the medal supply command, the performance of notification related to application of the ART in the liquid crystal display unit or the like, is controlled, preferably.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 127

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in Patent Document 1, in recent years, when the transition to the ART gaming state is determined, in the liquid crystal display device, a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the bet button for a predetermined time is performed. When the number of repeated bet button hits by the player is 20 times or more, a special identification signal indicating that the player has shifted to the ART state is output to the outside via the external terminal board, while the bet button is repeatedly hit by the player. It is proposed that the special identification signal is not output when the number is less than 20.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to grasp that the player has shifted to the ART state by repeatedly hitting the player's own bet button, so that the interest of the game is improved.

JP 2014-028193 A

  However, no gaming machine has been proposed in which not only a physical button operation but also an operation in another form enables a so-called continuous hit effect to be executed, which leads to an advantageous state for the player.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and enables so-called continuous hit effects to be executed not only by physical button operations but also by operations in other forms, which is advantageous for the player. It is an object to provide a gaming machine having a new playability of connecting.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of executing a game when a predetermined number of game values are bet,
Privilege grant determining means for determining whether to grant a privilege (for example, main control circuit 91 capable of granting ART),
Production means capable of performing production (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11);
Production control means for controlling the production of the production means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101),
Storage means capable of storing the game value in response to detection of the storage signal of the game value (for example, a credit number counter);
With
If the storage control means detects the storage signal while executing a predetermined performance, the performance control means controls the rendering of notification regarding the provision of the benefit in the performance means according to the storage signal detected.
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the storage means detects a game value storage signal during execution of the predetermined effect, the effect control means notifies the user about the provision of the privilege in the effect means according to the detected storage signal. Control the production. Therefore, not only physical button operation, but also the operation in other forms, such as storage in the storage means of game value, it is possible to perform so-called repeated hitting effects, leading to a state advantageous to the player, It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new game characteristics which have never been seen before.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The effect control means controls an effect of notification regarding provision of the benefit in the effect means according to the number of times the storage signal is detected during execution of the predetermined effect.
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, not only physical button operations, but also continuous storage in other forms, such as continuous storage in gaming value storage means, so-called continuous hitting effects can be performed, A gaming machine with newer gaming characteristics can be provided in that it leads to an advantageous state for the player.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The predetermined effect is a repetitive striking effect that prompts a user to continuously perform a predetermined operation (for example, physical button operation) within a predetermined time.
The production control unit controls the production of the notification related to the provision of the privilege in the production unit according to the number of times the storage signal is detected during execution of the continuous hit production.
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player himself or herself can perform continuous operation in another form such as continuous storage of gaming value in storage means as well as physical button operation. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with newer gaming characteristics in that it leads to an advantageous state.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming characteristics that can be connected to an advantageous state for a player through not only physical button operations but also operations in other forms.

It is a figure showing a functional flow of a pachislot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure which shows the external appearance structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the information display of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit with which the said pachislot machine is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub control circuit of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ratio indicator of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | positioning table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state regarding the presence or absence of alerting | reporting of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag determination table for lottery memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the table | surface mode in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the table mode transfer lottery number determination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the table mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the normal game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the number determination table for CZ lottery memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal CZ lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery number determination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the precursor game number lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ precursor CZ promotion lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART precursor sign additional zone lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CZ in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the number determination table for ART lottery number in CZ memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the battle game number random determination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the special CZ addition zone lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in normal ART in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the number determination table for additional lottery stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the usual ART middle class addition zone lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the number determination table for extra game number lottery in ART memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition game number lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the cancellation | release mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the cancellation | release lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the addition zones 1 and 2 in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the addition zones 1 and 2 in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition zone level lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the event mass lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the number determination table for extra game number lottery in the extra zones 1 and 2 memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure showing a bonus winning combination additional zone promoted lottery table, additional zone 2 end lottery table, and additional zone 1 return stock lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the addition zone 3 in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the continuation rate lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine, a guarantee stock lottery table, and one set game number lottery table. It is a figure which shows the addition game number lottery table in the addition zone 3 memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the back mode in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the back mode addition value lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the time of the bonus winning which is memorized by the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the bonus state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in BB memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the special BB addition game number lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the notification content of the main side in the said pachislot machine, and the correspondence of the notification of the main side, and the notification of a sub side. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the menu screen in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the character customization screen in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the touch operation mode in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the button operation mode in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the combination which can be customized in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history screen in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the back mode absorption effect lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the back mode absorption effect lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the back mode suggestion effect lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the management method of the back mode by the sub side in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the additional zones 1 and 2 by the sub side in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in normal BB in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in special BB in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of the normal BB start in the said pachislot machine. It is a flow chart which shows the main control processing of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control process according to the state at the time of the start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows front mode transfer processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process during normal time at the time of the start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ precursor sign process at the time of the start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ at the time of the start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the normal CZ process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the special CZ process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the ART warning sign process at the time of the said pachislot machine start. It is a flowchart which shows the process in ART at the time of the start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the normal ART process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the addition zone 1 and 2 process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the event mass control process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the event mass control process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the addition zone 3 process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the inside bonus process at the time of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initial setting process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus end check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus action check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flow chart which shows RT operation check processing of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing according to the state at the time of completion | finish of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the addition zones 1 and 2 at the time of completion | finish of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the addition zones 1 and 2 at the time of completion | finish of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the addition zone 3 at the time of completion | finish of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process by control of main CPU of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the insurance process at the time of the navigation error of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the insurance process at the time of the navigation error of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the transfer lottery to CZ and ART game state in the pachislot machine of a 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the game lock lottery table memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of a 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows the production lottery table at the time of the lock | rock memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a flow chart which shows the main control processing of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. FIG. 106 is a flowchart following to FIG. 106; It is a flowchart which shows the game lock lottery process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the game start lock process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel production | presentation process of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation in the game lock in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows another example of the production | presentation in the game lock in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows schematic structure of the sound data transmission channel provided in sub RAM103 of sub RAM103 in the pachislot machine of a 3rd modification. It is a schematic diagram of the game information provision system in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart which shows the uni-memo management task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the unimemo menu display request of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the periodic interruption process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sound data set process of the said pachislot machine. FIG. 119 is a flowchart following FIG. 119. It is a figure which shows the presentation group lottery table memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of a 4th modification. It is a figure which shows the battle production lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance / start check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start command reception of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the reel stop command reception of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of medal insertion command reception of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the normal state in the pachislot machine of the 5th modification. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the ART game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery number determination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the stop information alerting | reporting flag lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process during normal time at the time of the start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in ART at the time of the start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st normal ART update process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd normal ART update process of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the holding medal production lottery table memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of a 6th modification. It is a figure which shows the medal retention effect information storage area provided in the sub control circuit of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the character lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of medal insertion command reception of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start command reception of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the medal holding | maintenance effect in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the game lock time random-selection table for normal game state / chance zone memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of a 7th modification. It is a flow chart which shows the main control processing of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. FIG. 106 is a flowchart following to FIG. 106; It is a flowchart which shows the weight process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the locking process at the time of the game start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the information display process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the following game game lock time lottery process of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the number determination table for additional lottery stored in the pachislot machine of a 8th modification. It is a figure which shows the number determination table for extra game number lottery in ART memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition game number alerting | reporting determination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the initial display in the said pachislot machine, and the expectation of the number of additional games. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start command reception of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in the addition zone in the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process at the time of power activation of the pachislot machine of the 9th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance / start check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the specific operation detection process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the specific operation command reception of the said pachislot machine. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flow of gaming in the additional zone 3 in the pachi-slot machine of the tenth modified example. It is a flowchart which shows the addition zone 3 process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flow chart which shows RT operation check processing of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start command reception of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process (sub) in ART of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the addition zone 1, 2 process (sub) of the said pachislot machine. It is a flow chart which shows the above-mentioned additional zone 3 processing (sub) of a pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of unit game end command reception of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the number table for No. table transition for lottery operation at the time of limiter operation stored in the pachislot machine of the 11th modification. It is a flowchart which shows front mode transfer processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize distinction medal payment processing of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control process according to the state at the time of an end in the said pachislot machine.

  Hereinafter, a pachislot machine will be described as an example of a game machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, and the configuration and operation thereof will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Function flow]
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of this embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing a game. In addition to the medals, for example, coins, gaming balls, point data or tokens for gaming may be applied as gaming media. Further, the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out gaming media, but is applied to an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media such as gaming balls and provides benefits as electronic data, such as points obtained when predetermined grant conditions are satisfied. It is also possible to do.

  When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot machine and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal winning combination determining means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines the internal winning combination. This internal winning combination determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along an effective line, which will be described later, is determined. Note that the types of symbol combinations are given to the player such as a small role in which medals are paid out, a replay in which a replay (replay) is performed, a bonus role in which a bonus is performed, and the like. Those related to “winning” and other things related to “losing” are provided.

  Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachi-slot machine, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) after the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”. Then, in the present embodiment, when the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols (maximum sliding symbol number) is determined to be four symbols, and when the prescribed period is 75 msec, the maximum sliding symbol The number is set to one pattern.

  When an internal winning combination that permits combination display of symbols relating to winning is determined, the reel stop control means normally sets the combination of symbols to the effective line within a prescribed time of 190 msec (for four symbols of symbols). Stop rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means is, for example, 1 at the time of operation of “MB” (middle bonus) that continuously operates a challenge bonus (hereinafter referred to as “CB”) and “CB”, which are second-type special objects. For one or more reels, the rotation of the reels is stopped so that the combination of symbols is displayed as much as possible along the effective line within a specified time of 75 msec (for one symbol). Furthermore, the reel stop control means stops the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the effective line by using various prescribed times corresponding to the gaming state. Let

  In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R) that is performed first when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first stop operation, the first The stop operation performed subsequent to the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed subsequent to the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Thus, when the rotation of the plurality of reels is all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the active line relates to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the displayed symbol combination is related to winning a prize, a reward such as a medal payout is given to the player. In the pachislot machine, the above series of flows are performed as one game (unit game).

  Also, in the pachislot machine, in the above-described series of gaming operations, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof Various productions are performed using.

  Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random number for presentation (hereinafter, referred to as a random number for presentation) is extracted separately from the random number used to determine the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random number is extracted, the effect content determination means determines the effect to be executed this time from lots of effects related to the internal winning combination. The effect content determination means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub control circuit described later.

  Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect executing means responds to each trigger at the start of rotation of the reel, at the time of rotation stop of each reel, at the time of determination of presence or absence of winning, etc. Execute. In this way, in the pachislot machine, for example, by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination, there is an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at). It is provided to the player and the player's interest can be improved.

[Pachislot machine structure]
Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the structure of the pachi-slot machine in the present embodiment will be described.

<Appearance structure>
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet that accommodates a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door that is attached to the cabinet so as to be able to open and close.

  Three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided side by side inside the cabinet. Hereinafter, the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R are also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R has a cylindrical reel body and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  An upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 are provided above the center of the front door. The upper panel unit 10 is provided in the upper end region of the front door, and the liquid crystal display device 11 is disposed below the upper panel unit 10. The upper panel unit 10 has a light source and performs effects by light emitted from the light source. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 11 performs an effect by displaying an image. A spherical accessory 12 is provided at a substantially central portion of the upper panel unit 10. The sphere accessory 12 has a light source, and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source.

  In addition, a touch sensor 111 is provided on the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the display can be switched according to the operation of the player accepted through the touch sensor 111. The touch sensor 111 operates according to a predetermined operation principle such as a capacitance method, and when a player's touch operation is received, outputs a signal according to the operation as touch input information. The liquid crystal display device 11 is controlled by the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 4) based on touch input information output from the touch sensor 111. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the touch sensor 111 is provided to cover the entire surface of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 11, the entire surface of the liquid crystal display device 11 functions as a touch panel.

  A pedestal portion 13 is provided in the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal portion 13 is provided with the frame member 5 and various devices to be operated by the player.

  The frame member 5 has a symbol display area 4 and a stop button attachment portion 15. As shown in FIG. 2, the symbol display area 4 is provided at the opening of the frame member 5, and the stop button attachment portion 15 is provided below the opening of the frame member 5.

  The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and is arranged on the front side (player side) from the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which three reels 3L, 3C, 3R arranged behind (cabinet side) can be seen through. Therefore, in the following, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

  The reel display window 4 is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind it is stopped, 3 of the plurality of symbols provided on the circumferential surface of each reel, continuously arranged 3 Two symbols are displayed in the frame. The reel display window 4 displays an upper right diagonal cross-up line, an upper top line, a middle center line, a lower bottom line, and a lower right diagonal cross-down line.

  In the reel display window 4, one symbol (three in total) is displayed in each of the upper, middle and lower areas for each reel within the frame of the reel display window 4. Therefore, 3 × 3 symbols are displayed on the reel display window 4. The five lines of the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed on the reel display window 4 are lines connecting the 3 × 3 symbols displayed on the reel display window 4 linearly.

  In the present embodiment, the cross-up line among these five lines is an effective line, and the winning determination is performed based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the cross-up line. On the other hand, the four lines other than the cross-up line are pseudo lines that are not used for winning determination.

  The effective line (cross-up line) is activated by operating a MAX bet button 21 described later or inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 20. Here, operating the MAX bet button 21 is synonymous with inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, the “number of inserted medals” includes both the BET number by the operation of the MAX bet button 21 and the inserted number actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 20.

  The reel display window 4 is covered by a transparent window cover 16. The window cover 16 is disposed on the inner surface side of the frame member 5 and can not be removed from the front surface side of the front door.

  Further, the frame member 5 has a sheet placing portion 17. Then, between the sheet placement unit 17 and the window cover 16, a sheet member (information sheet) in which information regarding the game is described is disposed. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with the window cover 16 having a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps, and the window cover 16 serves as an attachment portion of the information sheet.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the window cover 16 cannot be removed from the front side of the front door and has a smooth surface free from irregularities and gaps. It is possible to prevent an illegal act of accessing the inside of the pachislot machine 1 through the.

  The stop button attaching portion 15 is formed of a flat plate member having a substantially trapezoidal surface shape. The stop button attaching portion 15 is provided below the reel display window 4 and is provided so that the substantially trapezoidal surface faces the front (the player side). The substantially trapezoidal surface of the stop button mounting portion 15 is provided with three through holes through which the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R pass side by side.

  Three stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are provided corresponding to each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. These stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are one of various devices that are operated by the player. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R will also be referred to as a left stop button 19L, a middle stop button 19C, and a right stop button 19R, respectively.

  In addition to the stop button, the pedestal portion 13 is provided with a medal insertion slot 20, a MAX bet button 21 and a start lever 23 as various devices to be operated by the player.

  The medal slot 20 is provided for receiving a medal dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals accepted from the medal slot 20 are used for one game with the preset number (for example, three) as the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the preset number is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. be able to. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a so-called credit function.

  The MAX bet button 21 is provided to determine the number of medals to be used for one game from the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. The start lever 23 is provided to start the rotation of all the reels (3L, 3C, 3R).

  Further, when viewed from the front, on the left side of the reel display window 4 of the front door, an information display 14 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) and an operation button 22 are provided. The information display 14 is connected to a main control board 71 described later, and the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 ( Hereinafter, information such as the number of credits is digitally displayed. The operation button 22 is a button pressed by the player, and is connected to a sub-control board 72 described later. Detection of pressing of the operation button 22 and control of the selection operation based on the detection are performed by the sub-control board 72. The operation button 22 includes a cross key and a determination button. When the player operates the cross key, the selection cursor, which will be described later, moves in the operated direction. When the player operates the determination button, the selection cursor points. An item is selected (decided).

  Side panel units 26L and 26R are provided on both sides of the pedestal 13 of the front door, respectively. Each side panel unit has a light source, and performs an effect by the light emitted from the light source. Further, a settlement button 27 is provided below the left side panel unit 26L. The checkout button 27 is provided to draw out (discharge) medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

  A waist panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal 13 of the front door. The waist panel unit 31 includes a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

  Below the waist panel unit 31, a medal payout port 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout port 32 guides medals discharged by driving a hopper device 51 (medal payout device) described later to the outside. The medal tray unit 34 stores the medals discharged from the medal payout opening 32. Speakers 65L and 65R are disposed inside the front door at positions facing the speaker holes 33L and 33R. Sounds such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the effects output from the speakers 65L and 65R are output to the player through the speaker holes 33L and 33R.

<Information display>
Next, the configuration of the information display 14 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the information display 14 includes an insert lamp 141, a start lamp 142, a replay lamp 143, a bet number lamp 144, a credit lamp 145, a payout number lamp 146, an instruction monitor 147, And a limit lamp 148.

  When the insert lamp 141 is lit (or flashes (hereinafter omitted)), the player can be informed that a medal can be inserted, and when the start lamp 142 is lit, the game is accompanied by the operation of the start lever 6. The player is notified that it is possible to start the game, and the replay lamp 143, when turned on, informs the player that the medals have been automatically inserted by activation of replay. The bet number lamp 144 is lit to inform the player of the number of medals bet, and the credit lamp 145 is lit to indicate the number of medals (credits) stored in the pachislot machine 1. To the player, and the payout number lamp 146 lights up to inform the player of the number of medals paid out as a result of the game (the number of payouts).

  The instruction monitor 147 includes a notification lamp 147a and a status indicator 147b (AT lamp). The notification lamp 147a is formed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and lights up in a mode uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to notify, thereby notifying the player of the information of the necessary stop operation. Further, when the status indicator 147b is lit, the player is informed that the current gaming state is a gaming state (for example, an ART gaming state (see FIG. 18)) that informs the player of an advantageous stopping operation. Reward against.

  Here, as described later, in the present embodiment, there is provided a “push order” in which combinations of symbols displayed in accordance with the order of the stop operation (order of push) are different. The mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation notified by the notification lamp 147a is, for example, that “1” is displayed when the pressing order “left, middle, right” is notified, and the pressing order “left, right, When notifying "inside", "2" is displayed. Details of the notification of the stop operation information in the notification lamp 147a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 4 described later, the information display 14 is controlled by the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in addition to the notification lamp 147a controlled by the main control board 71, the stop operation information may be notified using other means controlled by the sub control board 72. The information on the stop operation may be reported in the liquid crystal display device 11 described above.

  In this case, the notification mode in the notification lamp 147a may be different from the notification mode in other means. That is, the notification lamp 147a may be notified in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, and does not necessarily need to notify the information on the stop operation directly (for example, “1” in the notification lamp 147a). Even if it is displayed, the player may not be able to specify the notification content depending on the player, and can not be said to be a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification by other means, the information on the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when notifying the push order “left, middle, right”, the notification lamp 147a displays “1” uniquely corresponding to the push order to be notified, while other means (liquid crystal display device 11): The first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, the second stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and it is directly notified that the third stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R. It is also good.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, not only the control of the sub-control board 72 but also the control of the main control board 71 can notify information on necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination. Of course, the notification of the stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. More specifically, the notification of the stop operation may be made in the ART gaming state (see FIG. 18) described later without notifying the information of the stop operation in the normal gaming state (non-ART) described later.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the notification lamp 147a is provided separately from the credit lamp 145 and the payout number lamp 146, but either the credit lamp 145 or the payout number lamp 146 is provided without providing the notification lamp 147a. The information on the stop operation may be notified using

  The insert lamp 141 to the status indicator 147b are turned on, blinked, and turned off by an LED (not shown) provided on the back surface. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 controls the lighting, blinking and extinguishing of the LED to notify the player of various information regarding the game.

<Control system of pachislot machine>
Next, a control system provided in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot machine 1.

  The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 and a sub control board 72. The pachi slot machine 1 further includes a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key switch 56, a ratio indicator 58, a cabinet side relay board 44, and a power supply 53 connected to the main control board 71. Furthermore, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external concentrated terminal plate 47 connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44, a hopper device 51 and a medal auxiliary storage switch 75.

  The reel relay terminal board 74 is disposed inside the reel body of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 74 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays signals outputted from the main control board 71 to the stepping motors.

  The setting key type switch 56 is set to the pachi-slot machine 1 when setting any setting value out of a plurality of setting values provided to set the size of the profit given to the player It is used when checking the set value.

  The ratio display 58 is connected to the main control board 71, and displays various ratios such as a specific section ratio and an item ratio based on a signal output from the main control board 71. The configuration of the ratio display 58 and details of various ratios displayed on the ratio display 58 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The cabinet-side relay board 44 is a relay board for electrically connecting the main control board 71, the external concentrated terminal plate 47, the hopper device 51, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75. The external concentration terminal plate 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  The hopper device 51 can accommodate a large amount of medals and has a structure capable of discharging them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, for example, or when the settlement button 27 is pressed and the medals are settled. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout opening 32 (see FIG. 2).

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 441 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage (not shown) is full of medals. The medal auxiliary storage stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power supply substrate 53 b connected to the main control substrate 71 and a power switch 53 a connected to the power supply substrate 53 b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachislot machine 1, and when the power switch 53a is pressed, the power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V into the power of the DC voltage required for each part. Supply the converted power to each part.

  The pachislot machine 1 also includes a door relay terminal plate 68 and a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, and a checkout switch 78 connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68. , A start switch 79, a stop switch substrate 80, a game operation display substrate 81, and a sub-relay substrate 61.

  The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the medal material and shape are appropriate, and guides an appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 20 to the hopper device 51. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detecting means) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

  The door opening and closing monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening and closing of the front door to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. The BET switch 77 detects that the MAX bet button 21 has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button 27 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detection means) detects that the player has operated the start lever 23 (start operation).

  The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 19L, 19C, 19R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 81 is connected to the information display 14, and when the insertion of medals is accepted, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable and when replaying, the inserted medals Is a substrate for causing the information display 14 to display the number of sheets. In addition, various LEDs are connected to the game operation display substrate 81. These LEDs, for example, light a mark for displaying the start of the game provided on the information display 14 and a mark for performing a re-play on the basis of a signal inputted from the game operation display board 81.

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub relay board 61. The pachi-slot machine 1 also has a sound I / O substrate 83, an LED substrate 84, a touch sensor 111, and an operation button 203 connected to the sub control substrate 72 via the sub relay substrate 61. Note that the touch sensor 111 and the operation buttons 203 have been described above, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  The sound I / O board 83 outputs sound to a speaker group including speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown). The LED board 84 causes the various LED groups 85 controlled by the sub control board 72 to emit light, and causes the various LED groups 85 to light, blink, and extinguish in a pattern according to the effect.

  The pachi-slot machine 1 includes a ROM cartridge substrate 86 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 87 connected to the sub-control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 87 are accommodated in the sub control substrate case 57 together with the sub control substrate 72.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a substrate for managing production images (videos), sound, light, and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 87 is a substrate that relays connection wiring between the sub control substrate 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 91 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

  The main control circuit 91 mainly includes a microcomputer 92 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control instructions (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main ROM 94 stores a plurality of minimum game times related to the unit game.

  The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by the execution of the control program.

  A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a predetermined range of random numbers (e.g., 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  The main CPU 93 counts the number of times the pulse is output to the stepping motor of each reel after detecting the reel index. Thus, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. The reel index includes, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position of each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by the rotation of each reel. It is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. A symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown).

  That is, in this embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbol rotations have been performed since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub control circuit 101 mounted on the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachislot machine 1.

  The sub control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effects based on commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub-control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

  The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and an effect registration task for extracting and registering effect contents (effect data) by extracting effect random numbers. Contains various programs to run the In addition, the control program includes a drawing control task for controlling the display of video by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined content of the effect, a lamp control task for controlling the output of light from the light source such as the LED group 85, and the speakers 65L and 65R. Various programs for executing a voice control task or the like for controlling the output of sound according to the above are also included.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to creation of video. The data storage area also includes a storage area for storing sound data relating to BGM and sound effects, and a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern.

  The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and cause the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the created image.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speaker group such as the speakers 65L and 65R to output a sound such as BGM according to the sound data designated by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 in accordance with the lamp data specified by the effect contents.

<Ratio display>
Next, the configuration of the ratio display 58 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above with reference to FIG. 7, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the ratio indicator 58 for displaying various ratios. FIG. 7A shows an example of attachment of the ratio indicator 58, and FIG. 7B shows the contents displayed on the ratio indicator 58. As shown in FIG.

(Configuration of percentage display)
As shown in FIG. 7, the ratio indicator 58 is composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 7B, the upper two digits indicate the type of ratio to be displayed, and the lower two digits. Indicates the value of the ratio. The ratio indicator 58 is provided inside the pachislot machine 1 because it is used when an administrator (a shop clerk or the like) checks whether the pachislot machine 1 has been tampered with. At this time, it is preferable that the ratio display 58 be provided inside the main control board case covering the main control board 71 in order to prevent the ratio display 58 itself from being tampered with.

  As a specific attachment example, as shown in FIG. 7 (A-1), the ratio indicator 58 may be mounted on the main control board 71, and shown in FIG. 7 (A-2). Thus, it may be mounted on another board (ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. Also, as shown in FIG. The LED unit may be attached by connecting it to the main control board. In any case, as shown in FIG. 7A, it is preferable to provide the main control board 71 and the inside of the main control board case. Here, recording paper or a seal sticker is usually affixed to the main control board case. However, when a ratio indicator 58 is provided in the main control board case, the visibility of the ratio indicator 58 is determined by a seal sticker or the like. It is preferable to stick a seal seal or the like so that the film is not damaged. Note that the seal seal is for leaving a trace when the main control board case is opened, and is a seal that has been specially processed so that a trace remains when peeled off. Further, the recording paper is a paper for recording the fact that the main control board case has been attached / detached or unsealed in a normal procedure, the identification number of the main control board 71 is printed, and further the attachment / detachment or There is an entry field for filling in the date and time of opening and the person in charge at that time. Here, the formal procedure includes manufacturing of a gaming machine (during attachment and fixing) and inspection after installation in a game arcade.

(Displayed content of percentage indicator)
Subsequently, a display example of the ratio display 58 will be described. As shown in FIG. 7 (B), the ratio indicator 58 includes a cumulative interval ratio, a continuous symbol ratio and a symbol ratio between the latest 6000 games, and a cumulative continuous symbol ratio and a symbol ratio. , Will be displayed. When displaying the cumulative specific section ratio on the ratio display 58, “AU” is displayed in the upper two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED, and the continuous feature ratio between the latest 6000 games is displayed. In the upper 2 digits, “= r” is displayed, and when the proportion of the last 6000 games is displayed, “= b” is displayed in the upper 2 digits, and the cumulative consecutive proportion is displayed. In the case of performing, the upper two digits are displayed as “Ar”, and when displaying the cumulative character ratio, the upper two digits are displayed as “Ab”. In the lower two digits of the four-digit seven-segment LED, the corresponding percentage is displayed in percentage.

  Here, the “specific section ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of games in a gaming state advantageous to the player to the number of games in all gaming states (that is, the total number of games). In this case, the gaming state advantageous for the player is a notification state (information during AT (in the ART game state of the present embodiment)) for notifying information advantageous for the player, and an expected degree of transition to this notification state CZ having a high value may be included. Further, a bonus state starting during the notification state may be included in an advantageous gaming state in this case.

The main control board 71 counts the total number of games indicating the number of games in all game states and the specific number of games indicating the number of games in a game state advantageous to the player in a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33. The specific section ratio is calculated according to the equation shown below.
Specific section ratio = specific game frequency / total game frequency × 100

  In addition, “Consecutive character ratio” refers to the first type special character or the first type special character with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states (that is, the total payout number). This is the ratio of the total number of medals paid out during the operation of the accessory continuous operating device.

The main control board 71 uses a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33 to display a total payout number indicating the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states, and a first-class special bonus or a first-class special bonus. The first specific game in-use payout number indicating the total number of medals paid out during operation of the bonus character continuous actuation device according to is counted, and the continuous bonus ratio is calculated by the following equation.
Continuous role ratio = number of first specified game payouts / total payouts × 100

  In addition, the “role ratio” refers to the total number of medals paid out during operation of any of the bonuses relative to the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states (that is, the total payout number). It means the ratio occupied. In addition, with any kind of goods, it is a kind of special kind of thing, a kind of thing continuous operating device pertaining to the first kind of special kind of thing, a second kind of special kind of thing, a kind of second kind of special kind of work A device or a regular object. In addition, since the player is in a state advantageous to the player during the ART gaming state or CZ, it may be included in the state in which any one of the features is in operation.

The main control board 71 uses a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33 to display the total payout number indicating the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states, and the medals paid out during the operation of any combination. The second specified game payout number indicating the total number of is counted, and the bonus ratio is calculated by the following equation.
Continuous role ratio = 2nd specified game in-progress number / total payout number × 100

  Further, “cumulative” refers to the entire period from the installation of the pachislot machine 1 to the present, and “between the latest 6000 games” refers to the period from the game before 6000 games to the present. When calculating the percentage of “total”, the main control board 71 may calculate the percentage using the counting result counted in the whole period, and when calculating the percentage of “the most recent 6000 games”, The main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result counted in the period from the game before 6000 games to the present.

The predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33 is provided in an area which is not cleared (initialized) even when the power is turned on / off or the setting is changed. That is, the data on the ratio indicator 58 stored in the main RAM 33 is configured not to disappear even when the power is turned on / off or the setting is changed.
In addition, a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33 counts data on the ratio display 58 with 400 games played as one set. For example, in the case of calculating the ratio between 6000 games, the ratio is calculated using the total counting result of 15 sets.

(Display contents of ratio display (switching display))
In the ratio display 58, various ratios calculated by the main control board 71 are switched and displayed. The method of switching the content displayed on the ratio display 58 is arbitrary. For example, various ratios may be switched automatically at predetermined intervals, or various operations may be performed manually according to the operation of a dedicated switch. It is also possible to switch the various ratios by combining automatic switching and manual switching.

(Modification of percentage indicator)
By the way, since the existing pachislot machine does not have the ratio indicator 58, in the attachment example of the ratio indicator 58 shown in FIG. 7A, it is necessary to make a large modification to the existing pachislot machine. Therefore, a display provided in an existing pachislot machine may be used as a ratio display 58 for displaying various ratios. Specifically, in an existing pachislot machine, a display (information display 14) that displays the number of stored medals (number of credits) and the number of medals paid out in this game (the number of payouts). Is provided. Therefore, when a special operation is performed on the pachislot machine, the type of ratio displayed on the display unit (credit lamp 145) for displaying the number of credits is displayed, and the display unit (payout number lamp) for displaying the number of payouts. The display of the display device may be switchable so that the ratio of the type is displayed in 146).

  The special operation is arbitrary, but is preferably an operation using a switch provided inside the pachislot machine. Thereby, it can prevent that a player will perform special operation accidentally.

[Transition flow of the gaming state of the pachislot machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the gaming state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment and the transition flow thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of bonus winning / acting, the type of internal winning combination related to replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 71 distinguishes a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state based on whether or not a bonus (F_BB1-3) is won / operated. Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a bonus non-winning state and the bonus is not activated, the inter-flag state is a bonus winning and a bonus not activated, and the bonus state Is in the state where the bonus is activated.

  The presence or absence of a bonus winning is managed based on data stored in an internal winning combination storing area (not shown) provided in main RAM 33, and the presence or absence of a bonus operation is a gaming state flag provided in main RAM 33. It is managed based on data stored in a storage area (not shown). Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the part associated with the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the part associated with the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which a combination related to the bonus is carried over as an internal winning combination.

  Further, the main control board 71 provides four types of states of RT0 to RT3 gaming states in which the types of internal winning combinations related to replay and the winning probability thereof are different from each other. Note that the RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which the user stays in an initial state such as after the bonus state ends. Also, the RT1 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is low, and in the RT2 gaming state, the probability that a role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is high probability It is a gaming state that becomes. Further, the RT3 gaming state is a gaming state in which the player is staying when the role associated with the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination (that is, between the flags).

  These RT0 to RT3 gaming states are managed based on data stored in a gaming state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33. Specifically, the pachislot machine 1 has three flags of RT1 gaming state flag to RT3 gaming state flag, and manages the RT gaming state by managing on / off of these flags by the main RAM 33. More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies the RT gaming state corresponding to the RT gaming state flag which is on as the current RT gaming state. When all RT gaming state flags are off, the main control board 71 specifies that the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 71 (1) transitions the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state when a bell spill is displayed in the RT0 gaming state. Further, the main control board 71 (1) shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when the RT2 transition ripple is displayed in the RT1 gaming state, and (3) the bell spilled eye or the RT1 in the RT2 gaming state When the transition lip is displayed, the gaming state is shifted from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

  Here, when the bell order is set as the internal winning combination (F_push order bell 1_1st to F_push order bell 2_3rd) to be described later, the bell spilled eyes are not in the push order determined for each type of push order bell. It is a combination of symbols displayed when correct. In addition, when the RT2 transition ripple is determined as an internal winning combination in RT1 that is to be described later (R_IP in F_RT1 and Rip_321 in F_RT1), the correct order of pressing defined for each type of R1 in RT1 This is a combination of symbols to be displayed. In addition, the RT1 transition ripple is an incorrect answer in the order of pressing determined for each type of the ripple in RT2 when the ripple in RT2 to be described later (Rip in F_RT2 _lst to F_RT2 rip3_3rd) is determined as the internal winning combination. This is a combination of symbols displayed on the screen.

  The main control board 71 causes the gaming state to shift from the RT0 to RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state (between flags) when the role relating to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in (4) RT0 to RT2 gaming state . In addition, the main control board 71, (5) the role which relates to the bonus which is decided as an internal winning combination in RT3 gaming state wins, when bonus state starts, gaming state from RT3 gaming state (between flags) to bonus state Migrate Further, when the bonus state end condition is satisfied during the bonus state (6), the main control board 71 ends the bonus state and shifts the gaming state to the RT0 gaming state.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the end condition of the bonus state is that the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds 232 (233 or more). Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the bonus state, the combination (F_RB combination, F_7 combination combination, F_7 combination combination 1, F_7 combination combination 2) by which eight medals are paid out is always determined as the internal combination combination. , These roles will always win. As a result, in the bonus state, eight medals are always paid out every game, and the bonus state always ends in 30 games, so the number of medals paid out during the bonus state In other words, the end condition that the number of games exceeds 232 can be paraphrased as the number of games in the bonus state reaches 30 times.

[Various data tables 1 on the main control side]
Subsequently, the configuration of various data tables necessary to explain the transition of the gaming state described in FIG. 8 will be described with reference to FIGS. These various data tables are stored in the main ROM 94.

<Symbol arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 9 represents by data the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between twenty symbol positions “0” to “19” and symbols corresponding to each of the symbol positions.

  The symbol positions “0” to “19” indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotational direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “19” can be identified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The types of symbols are “Red 7”, “Blue 7”, “BAR”, “Replay”, “Bell”, “Watermelon”, “Cherry”, “Blank 1”, “Blank 2” and “Blank 3”. Contains.

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 9 assigns the symbol located at the middle stage of the reel display window 4 when the reel index is detected (the symbol passing through the middle stage of the reel display window 4) to the symbol position “0”. A correspondence relationship in which symbol positions “0” to “19” are assigned to each of 20 symbols in order of movement in the rotational direction of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is defined. As described above, by using the middle level of the reel display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle level of the reel display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 9, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by data of 1 byte (8 bits). The symbol code table shown in FIG. 9 represents a code for identifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are “red 7”, “blue 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, “bell”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “blank 1”, “blank”. 10 types of "2" and "blank 3". In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to "red 7" symbol (symbol code 1), and "00000010" is assigned as data to "blue 7" symbol (symbol code 2). It is done. Similarly, "00000011" to "00001010" are assigned as data to each of the symbols "BAR" to "Blank 3" (symbol codes 3 to 10).

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, data stored in the main RAM 95 when the symbol combination is displayed, and when the symbol combination is displayed. Stipulates the correspondence with the benefits (number of medals paid out).

  In this embodiment, a winning combination is determined when the symbol combination displayed along the active line matches the symbol combination (combination) defined in the symbol combination table. When it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given privileges such as paying out medals, replaying (replaying), and bonus game (acting equipment continuous operation device). When the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it becomes a so-called "off". That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination of “off” is defined by not defining the combination of symbols corresponding to “off” in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and an item of "displacement" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define "displacement".

  The data field in the symbol combination table defines information for identifying a combination of symbols displayed along the valid line. Specifically, in the data column, a “storage area” in which data of a corresponding symbol combination is stored and a “data (bit corresponding to a symbol combination in 1-byte data) stored in the storage region” Data for specifying a) is defined.

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the effective line when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped. In each combination, a combination name according to the role of the combination and the type of symbols constituting the combination is defined.

  Further, the payout number specified in the symbol combination table specifies the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 12, when a combination of symbols of combination names “C_MDF1” to “C_MDSP_02” is displayed in a 3-BET game, eight medals are paid out.

  In addition, the content column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the feature of each symbol combination. Referring to FIG. 10, for example, combination names “C_transition 1_01” to “C_transition 2_04” are combinations of symbols of bell spilled eyes, and when displayed along the effective line, the gaming state is RT1. The game state is entered (see FIG. 8).

  In addition, combination names “C_BB_A” to “C_BB_C3” are combinations of symbols related to the first class special role continuous acting device (BB), and when displayed along the effective line, the gaming state becomes a bonus state Transition (see FIG. 8).

  Further, the combination name “C_reach eye lip” is a combination of symbols related to reach eye lip, and when displayed along the effective line, the replay operation is performed. It should be noted that the combination of the symbols pertaining to the reach eye lip is displayed along the active line only during the flag, without being displayed along the active line during the normal gaming state even if winning.

  In addition, combination names “C_RT2_T_rip_01” to “C_RT2_C_rip” are combinations of symbols related to the RT2 transition lip. When the RT2 transition message is displayed along the activated line, the replaying operation is performed, and the gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 8).

  Further, combination names “C_B Lip” to “C_CD Lip_04” are combinations of symbols relating to replay, and when displayed along the activated line, the replaying operation is performed. Further, combination names “C_RT1_CU ripple” to “C_RT ripple_04” are combinations of symbols related to RT1 transition ripple. When the RT1 transition message is displayed along the activated line, the replaying operation is performed, and the gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state (see FIG. 8).

  In addition, combination names “C_WMLN1 — 01” to “C_WMLN3” are combinations of symbols related to watermelon spills, and when displayed along the effective line, one medal is paid out. The combination names “C_CHA_A” to “C_CHA_B4” are combinations of symbols related to chances, and when displayed along the active line, one medal is paid out.

  The combination names "C_control B01_01" to "C_control B10_04" are combinations of symbols related to the first appearance, and one medal is paid out when displayed along the effective line. The combination name "C_CHE" is a combination of symbols related to weak cherry, and one medal is paid out when displayed along the effective line.

  The combination names "C_control B01_01" to "C_control B10_04" are combinations of symbols related to the first appearance, and one medal is paid out when displayed along the effective line. The combination names “C_SCHE01” to “C_SCHE03” are combinations of symbols related to the strong cherry, and when displayed along the active line, one medal is paid out.

  Further, combination names “C_CDWMLN1_01” to “C_CUWMLN” are combinations of symbols relating to watermelon, and five medals are paid out when displayed along the effective line. The combination names “C_PCHA1” to “C_PCHA6_04” are combinations of symbols related to the confirmed cherry, and when displayed along the active line, eight medals are paid out. The combination names “C_CENB_01” to “C_CUB” are combinations of symbols relating to bells, and eight medals are paid out when displayed along the effective line.

  The combination name “C_MCF1” is a combination of symbols related to 7 beats in the BB. When displayed along the active line, 8 medals are paid out. In addition, combination names “C_MD1” to “C_MDSP 02” are combinations of symbols relating to 7 sets in BB, and eight medals are paid out when displayed along the effective line.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, an internal lottery table referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state and defines lottery value information corresponding to each combination. In the example shown in FIG. 13, the lottery value itself for each combination is omitted, and only whether or not each combination can be won is shown for each gaming state.
In the RT0 to RT2 gaming state, only the information on the lottery value corresponding to the combination related to replay is different, and the information on the lottery value corresponding to the combination related to the small combination or the bonus is the same. In addition, the RT3 gaming state is a state in which the part associated with the bonus is carried over, and the part associated with the bonus is not won (the lottery value is 0), but the other is similar to the RT0 to RT2 gaming state In addition, only the information on the lottery value corresponding to the combination concerning the replay is different, the information on the lottery value corresponding to the small combination is the same. At this time, during the RT3 game state, it seems that the lottery value corresponding to the bonus combination such as No. 3 to No. 7 and the small combination wins simultaneously, so that the lottery value corresponding to the small combination decreases. Since the lottery value of the corresponding small combination in No. 35 to No. 39 etc. increases, the lottery value corresponding to the small combination becomes the same regardless of the RT gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, a random number value for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value (not shown) according to each combination, and the result of subtraction is negative. An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not (so-called "whole") has occurred.

  Therefore, the higher the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the role to which this is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be represented by “lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”.

  Referring to FIG. 13, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is understood that “off” is not determined as a result of the lottery during the bonus state. That is, in the Pachi-Slot machine 1 of this embodiment, during the bonus state, any one of the roles "F_RB role", "F_7 winning role", "F_7 matching role 1" and "F_7 matching role 2" is always determined as the internal winning combination, The result of the lottery will not be "off".

<Correspondence table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
FIG. 14 to FIG. 16 are comparison tables showing a correspondence relationship with combinations (combinations) of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in each internal winning combination when each winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. A circle in each correspondence table indicates a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line, in the role determined as the internal winning combination.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 makes the stop control different according to the internal winning combination and the game state, and when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence shown in FIGS. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that a combination of symbols can be displayed. Here, in the correspondence tables shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 16, all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when a combination is determined as an internal winning combination are listed. Even combinations of symbols with marks may not be displayed.

  That is, in the pachislot machine 1, stop control (for example, a drawing to be preferentially drawn) is made different depending on a combination of symbols that can be stopped and the current gaming state. Even if it is a combination of marked symbols, it may not be displayed. Accordingly, FIG. 17 shows a correspondence relationship between the type of combination and the combination of symbols actually stopped and displayed.

<Correspondence between a winning combination and a combination of symbols in a state other than the bonus state>
The correspondence relationship 1 in FIG. 17 indicates the correspondence relationship between a winning combination and a combination of symbols in a state other than the bonus state (a part of the roles are omitted). In the pachi-slot machine 1, as a plurality of roles, a “push order role” is provided in which combinations of symbols displayed in accordance with the order of the stop operation (pushing order) are different. The symbol combination associated with “correct answer in pushing order” in FIG. 17 is a symbol combination advantageous for the player among the symbol combinations displayed in accordance with the pushing order, and corresponds to “incorrect answer in pushing order”. The attached symbol combination is a symbol combination that is disadvantageous to the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the pressing order. When notifying a stop operation that is advantageous for the player, the pressing order that is the correct answer is notified, and as a result, a combination of symbols associated with the “pushing order correct” is displayed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the name of the push order represents the push order that is the correct answer. Specifically, the end “1st” of the name of the combination means that the correct pressing order is that the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L, and the end “2nd” of the name of the combination is The correct pressing order means that the first stop operation is for the middle reel 3C, and the end "3rd" of the name of the winning combination is the correct correct pressing order and the first stop operation is the right reel It means that it is for 3R. In addition, the end “123” of the name of the role means that the correct order of pushing is “left, middle, right”, and the end of the name of the role “132” is that where the correct order is “left”. The right end of the name of the part, "213" means that the pressing order to be the correct answer is "middle, left, right", the end of the name of the part "231" Means that the correct order of pushing is “left, right, middle”.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the combination “F_RT1 middle rip _123” to “F_RT1 middle rip _321” is a combination where the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different and the pressing order is correct, RT2 When any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 among the symbol combinations related to the transition lip (see FIG. 10) is displayed along the effective line, and the push order is not correct, Among the combinations of symbols related to replay (see FIG. 10), any one of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 is displayed along the effective line.

  In addition, the combination “F_RT2 middle rip_1st” to “F_RT2 middle rip_3rd” is a combination where the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different, and when the pressing order is correct, the combination of symbols relating to the replay If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 (see FIG. 10) is displayed along the active line and the pressing order is not correct, the symbol of the RT1 transition lip is displayed. Among the combinations (see FIG. 10), any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 are displayed along the effective line.

  In addition, combinations “F_pushing order bell 1_1st” to “F_pushing order bell 2_3rd” are combinations that the combinations of symbols displayed in accordance with the pushing order are different. In the general gaming state, the combinations “F_pushing order bell 1_1st” to “F_pushing order bell 2_3rd” are shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 14 in the combination of symbols related to the bell (see FIG. 12) when the pushing order is correct. If any one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIG. 16 is displayed along the effective line and the pressing order is not correct, the symbol combination relating to the bell spill or the first sheet (FIG. 10 or FIG. Among the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 16 among 11) are displayed along the effective line.

  In addition, the combination "pushing order bell 1 (" F_ pushing order bell 1_1st "" F_ pushing order bell 1_2nd "" F _ push order bell 1_3rd "of the" F_ push order bell 1_1st "~" F_ push order bell 2_3rd " "" Is a role that does not change the stop control in the normal gaming state and between the flag, the role "push order bell 2 (" F_ push order bell 2_1st "" F_ push order bell 2_2nd "" F_ push order "Bell 2_3rd") "is a role that changes the stop control in the normal game state and in the middle of the flag. That is, the combination “push order bell 2” is one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 in the combination of bell symbols (see FIG. 12) regardless of the order of pressing during the flag interval. Is displayed along the active line.

<Correspondence between winning combination and symbol combination in bonus state>
The correspondence 2 in FIG. 17 shows the correspondence between the winning combination and the combination of symbols in the bonus state. For the combination “F_RB combination”, any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 among the combinations of bell symbols (see FIG. 12) is displayed along the active line regardless of the pressing order. .

  Also, in the combination “F_7 winding combination”, any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 16 among the combinations of 7 circles or bell symbols in BB (see FIG. 12) are along the effective line Is displayed. In addition, the combinations “F_7 uniform combination 1” and “F_7 uniform combination 2” are combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 in the combination of seven symbols in the BB or the bell symbol (see FIG. 12). Either is displayed along the active line. In addition, the combinations “F_7 roll combination” to “F_7 uniform combination 2” may be combinations in which the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different, and a common combination of symbols is displayed regardless of the pressing order. It may be a role.

  As shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 13, during the bonus state, the result of the internal lottery does not become “off”, and any one of the roles “F_RB role” to “F_7 justification role 2” must be an internal winning combination It is determined as Then, as shown in the correspondence relationship 2 of FIG. 17, a combination of symbols in which eight medals are paid out by being displayed in any of the combinations "F_RB combination" to "F_7 combination combination 2" (Bell, BB 7) 7 rounds or rounds out of BB are displayed. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, eight medals for each game are paid out during the bonus state.

<Transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of notification>
Whether or not the pachislot machine 1 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of bonus winning / operation, the type of internal winning combination involved in replay, and the winning probability, and whether to notify a stop operation which is advantageous for the player Manage the gaming state based on etc. Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 18, the transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of notification will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 distinguishes between the normal gaming state and the CZ (chance zone) and the ART gaming state based on the presence or absence of notification. The normal gaming state and the CZ are basically a gaming state (non-ART) in which the contents of the stop operation advantageous to the player are not notified, and the ART gaming state is a game state in which the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. It is. In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the player will play a game from the normal gaming state (while holding the bonus state depending on the situation) to transition to the ART gaming state advantageous to the player .

  The normal gaming state is the most disadvantageous gaming state in the pachislot machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 18, there is a possibility that the normal gaming state shifts to the CZ and ART gaming states. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, transition lottery to CZ is performed, and when (A) this transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 causes the gaming state to transition from the normal gaming state to CZ. In addition, in the normal gaming state, transition lottery to ART is performed, and when (B) this transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the ART gaming state.

  The CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) in which the degree of expectation for transitioning to the ART gaming state is high, and as shown in FIG. 18, there is a possibility that the CZ may shift to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, in CZ, a lottery for transition to ART is performed. (C) When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from CZ to the ART gaming state, and (D) this transition. When the CZ ends without winning the lottery, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the normal gaming state.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state in which the RT2 gaming state is winning in the ART, and starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state after winning the ART. As shown in FIG. 8, since the RT2 gaming state shifts from the RT0 and RT1 gaming states, the ART gaming state is not immediately started even after the ART is won. Therefore, in Pachislot machine 1, it is necessary to prepare for ART during the transition to the RT2 gaming state after winning the ART (more specifically, after ART precursor), and to shift to the RT2 gaming state during this ART preparation. Announcing a stop operation.

  Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state in which the RT2 gaming state is winning the ART. As shown in FIG. 18, the ART gaming state is composed of a normal ART and an extra zone. The normal ART and the add-on zone are game states having different game characteristics, and the normal ART displays a stop operation advantageous to the player for a predetermined number of games (for example, a combination of symbols having a large number of medals to be paid out). A stop operation necessary for maintaining the RT2 gaming state), and the additional zone notifies the stop operation advantageous to the player and adds the normal ART duration. It is a gaming state that functions as an additional chance zone to do. Note that during the extra zone, the game is normally played without digesting the duration of the ART.

  As shown in FIG. 18, there is a possibility that the normal ART shifts to an extra zone or a normal gaming state. Specifically, in the normal ART, a transition lottery to the additional zone is performed, and (E) when the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 causes the gaming state to transition from the normal ART to the additional zone. In addition, in the normal ART, the duration is managed, and (G) when the duration is over, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the normal gaming state. In addition, although the management method of the continuation period of ART is arbitrary, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment, a continuation period is managed by the number of games. Of course, the duration may be managed not by the number of games but by the number of medals and the number of differences usually paid out during ART, and the number of times of notification that affects the payout of medals during normal ART The duration may be managed by the number of times).

  As shown in FIG. 18, there is a possibility of shifting to the normal ART from the extra zone. Specifically, an end lottery is performed in the extra zone. (F) When the end lottery is won, the extra zone is terminated, and the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the extra zone to the normal ART. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18, there is a possibility of transition to the bonus state from the normal gaming state, the CZ, and the ART gaming state (normal ART or the additional zone). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when a bonus combination is won in (H) normal gaming state, CZ and ART gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the bonus state.

  Here, the bonus state includes a normal BB, an episode BB, and a special BB. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the type of bonus state is determined based on the timing at which the part associated with the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, and the situation at the timing at which the part associated with the bonus is won. Specifically, the main control board 71 determines the special BB as a bonus state to be started when the bonus-related combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the additional zone 2 which is a part of the additional zone.

  The game characteristics in the bonus state are different between the normal BB and the episode BB and the special BB. Specifically, the main control board 71 performs a lottery that grants the right of the normal ART and the extra zone based on the internal winning combination during the normal BB and the episode BB, and based on the internal winning combination during the special BB. Usually carry out an additional lottery for the duration of the ART. That is, during the normal BB and the episode BB, the rights to the ART and the additional zone are generally granted, and during the special BB, the number of additional games on which the duration of the ART is usually added is granted. The normal BB and the episode BB are different only in the effect (display) in the bonus state, and the game characteristics in the bonus state are the same. In other words, the normal BB and the episode BB are different in presentation control on the sub side (sub control board 72), but not on game control on the main side (main control board 71).

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the bonus state, transition lottery to the ART gaming state is performed, and at the end of the bonus state, (I) when the right of the ART gaming state is not granted, the main control board 71 Transition the gaming state from the bonus state to the normal gaming state. In addition, when the right of the (J) ART gaming state is granted at the end of the bonus state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state. It should be noted that the ART gaming state right is granted at the end of the bonus state, in addition to the ART gaming state right granted along with the lottery performed during the bonus state, the ART gaming state right from before the bonus state Including the case where is given.

[Various data tables 2 on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables necessary for explaining the transition of the gaming state described in FIG. 18 will be described with reference to FIGS. These various data tables are stored in the main ROM 94.

(Regulation flag decision table)
FIG. 19 is a lottery flag determination table for determining a lottery flag from the internal winning combination. Generally, in a pachislot machine, various types of lottery are performed based on the internal winning combination. However, when a large number of combinations (44 types referring to FIG. 19) can be determined as internal winning combinations, lottery is performed for each combination. If the result is provided, the amount of data required for one lottery becomes enormous. From the viewpoint of game play, it is preferable to perform various lotteries. However, since the main ROM 94 has a limited capacity due to specifications, if the amount of data required for one lottery becomes enormous, the type of lottery is reduced. As a whole, gameability becomes monotonous.

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various roles are grouped, and various types of lottery are performed based on the grouped information (flag for lottery). This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required for each lottery. Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a large number of combinations are grouped in various ways to characterize each lottery (for example, a combination which is a different group in a lottery Each lottery is characterized by being in the same group.

  The lottery flag determination table shown in FIG. 19 is used to group a large number of combinations in various modes, and specifies lottery flag information for each combination determined as an internal winning combination. For example, the combination “F_Watermelon” is defined as “3” as the lottery flag A, “3” as the lottery flag B, “3” as the lottery flag C, and “1” as the lottery flag D.

<Overview of table mode>
Next, an overview of the table mode will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has three modes of “low probability”, “high probability short” and “high probability long” as the front surface mode. This front mode is used, for example, for a CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state and an extra lottery performed during the ART gaming state. Basically, the front mode “low probability” has a low probability of winning in these lotteries. The table mode "high probability short" and "high probability long" are states where the probability of winning in these lottery is high.

  The main control board 71 shifts to the front mode based on the lottery flag B when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the ART preparation or the normal ART, and also at the end of the bonus state. Do the migration. Specifically, the main control board 71 performs table mode transition using the data tables shown in FIGS. 21 and 22.

(Table mode transition lottery number determination table)
FIG. 21 is a table mode transition lottery number determination table for determining a table mode transition lottery number from the lottery flag B. The table mode transition lottery number determination table defines the table mode transition lottery number in association with the lottery flag B and the current table mode. The table mode transfer lottery number is information used for the table mode transfer lottery. For example, in the lottery flag B “3”, when the current table mode is “low accuracy”, “2” is determined as the table mode transition lottery number, and the current table mode is “high accuracy short”. If the current table mode is “high probability long”, “4” is determined as the table mode transition lottery number. .

(Table mode transition lottery table)
FIG. 22 is a table mode transition lottery table for lottery the transition destination of the table mode, and FIG. 22 (A) is performed when the gaming state is any of the normal gaming state, ART preparation or normal ART. FIG. 22B is a table used for transitional lottery, and FIG. 22B is a table used for transitional lottery performed at the end of the bonus state.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (A), the table mode transition lottery table 1 defines information of lottery values for the table mode of the transition destination for each table mode transition lottery number. For example, when the table mode transition lottery number is “3”, “high-probable short” is always extracted as the migration destination table mode.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22B, the table mode transition lottery table 2 defines information of lottery values for the table mode of the transition destination for each of the table modes at the end of the bonus state. For example, if the table mode at the end of the bonus state is "low probability", "low probability" or "high probability short" will be extracted as the transfer destination table mode.

<Game flow during normal gaming state>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 23 to FIG. 30, the game in the normal gaming state will be described. FIG. 23 is a view showing the flow of gaming in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. 24 to 30 are views showing various data tables used in the normal gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 23, during the normal gaming state, the main control board 71 performs a CZ lottery for shifting to the CZ and an ART lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state. During the normal gaming state, the main control board 71 performs CZ lottery based on the lottery flag B and the front mode, and if the CZ lottery is won, the gaming state shifts to CZ thereafter (via a precursor). If the game is not won, the gaming state is maintained as the normal gaming state. In addition, during the normal gaming state, the main control board 71 performs an ART lottery based on the lottery flag A, and when the ART lottery is won, the gaming state is changed to the ART gaming state thereafter (via a precursor). In the case of non-winning, the game state is maintained as the normal game state.

(CZ lottery number determination table)
FIG. 24 is a CZ lottery number determination table for determining a CZ lottery number from the lottery flag B. The CZ lottery number determination table defines the CZ lottery number in association with the lottery flag B and the current table mode. The CZ lottery number is information used for CZ lottery. Referring to the CZ lottery number determination table, the lottery flags “0 (displacement)” to “3 (push order bell)” are determined as “0” as the CZ lottery number regardless of the current table mode. . Since the CZ lottery number “0” is a number that will not win the CZ lottery, the lottery flag “0 (displacement)” to “3 (push order bell)” indicates the CZ lottery number. I will never win.

(Normally medium CZ lottery table)
FIG. 25 shows a normal medium CZ lottery table used for CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state based on the CZ lottery number. The normal middle CZ lottery table defines, for each CZ lottery number, information on the lottery value regarding the lottery result of the CZ lottery. As described later, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, CZ includes CZ1, CZ2, CZ3, CZ4 and a special CZ. CZ1 to CZ4 are chance zones that have different expectations for winning ART lottery in CZ, basically, CZ1 is the hardest to win, CZ2 is the next hard to win, CZ3 is the hard to win next CZ4 is the easiest to win. The special CZ is a chance zone in which transition to the ART gaming state is determined at the transition stage.

  In CZ lottery using a normal middle CZ lottery table, among CZ1, CZ2, CZ3, CZ4 and special CZ, there is a possibility of winning to the transition to CZ1 to CZ4, and never winning to the special CZ. The special CZ may be transferred by winning a promotion lottery performed during the CZ precursor after winning the shift to CZ1 to CZ4 (see FIG. 29).

(Art lottery number determination table)
FIG. 26 is an ART lottery number determination table for determining an ART lottery number from the lottery flag A. The ART lottery number determination table defines the ART lottery number in association with the lottery flag A and the current gaming state. The ART lottery number is information used for ART lottery. Referring to the ART lottery number determination table in FIG. 26, in the state other than the normal gaming state and the state of waiting for the ART end, ART lottery corresponding to the state is performed separately. "0 (ART lottery is not won)" is determined as the ART lottery number except for the flag A (7 "and" 8 ").

(ART lottery table)
FIG. 27 is an ART lottery table used for ART lottery performed based on the ART lottery number. The ART lottery table defines, for each ART lottery number, information on lottery values regarding the lottery result of ART lottery. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the additional zone 1, the additional zone 2 and the additional zone 3 are provided as the additional zones. The additional zone 1 to the additional zone 3 are common in that the addition of the duration of the ART is usually performed, but the method of addition and the frequency of the addition are different. Details of these additional zones 1 to 3 will be described later.

  Also, in the figure, "ART stock +1" means that one ART right is usually granted, and "ART, additional zone 1 stock +1" usually means the ART right and the additional zone 1 right. “ART, additional zone 2 stock + 1” means that one normal ART right and one additional zone 2 right are granted respectively. “ART, additional zone 3 The "stock +1" is that normally one ART right and one additional zone 3 right are granted.

(Precursor game number lottery table)
Next, FIG. 28 is a precursor game number random determination table for determining the number of precursor games before shifting to the CZ or ART game state when a CZ lottery or ART lottery performed in the normal game state is won. The precursor game number lottery table defines information of lottery values for the precursor game number for each type of winning lottery. When the main control board 71 wins the CZ lottery or ART lottery during the normal gaming state, it randomly extracts the leading game number and shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the CZ or ART gaming state after this leading game number has elapsed. To do.

(CZ precursor sign CZ promotion lottery table)
Next, FIG. 29 is a CZ precursor CZ promotion lottery table used for CZ promotion lottery performed in the precursor of CZ. The CZ advance sign CZ promotion lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the promotion lottery for each lottery flag B.

(ART precursor sign addition zone lottery table)
Next, FIG. 30 is an ART precursor sign overlay zone lottery table used for stock lottery of the addition zone 1 performed in the sign of ART. The ART pre-sign extra zone lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the stock lottery for each lottery flag A.

When any of CZ1 to CZ4 is won in the CZ lottery using FIG. 25, the main control board 71 sets the number of precursor games using FIG. Then, the main control board 71 performs elevation lottery using FIG. 29 during this precursor game, and rewrites CZ1 to CZ4 that were won in CZ lottery into special CZ when winning elevation lottery. Promote).
Similarly, when the main control board 71 wins ART in the ART lottery using FIG. 27, the number of precursor games is set using FIG. Then, the main control board 71 performs stock lottery using FIG. 30 during this precursor game, and grants one right of the additional zone 1 when winning the stock lottery.

<Flow of game in CZ>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 35, the game in CZ will be described. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the flow of a game in CZ, and FIGS. 32 to 35 are diagrams showing various data tables used in CZ.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (A), CZ1 to CZ4 are composed of the first half of CZ and the second half of CZ. In the first half of CZ, 12 games are continued and ART lottery is performed, and in the second half of CZ, 3 games or 4 games are continued, and a battle effect is performed to notify the result of ART lottery in the first half of CZ.

  The main control board 71 performs the ART lottery based on the lottery flag B during the first half of the CZ, and performs the lottery of the number of games in the second half of the CZ at the start of the final game in the first half of the CZ. Further, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery according to a so-called rare role during the second half of the CZ, and rewrites the result of the ART lottery during the first half of the CZ and further grants ART rights. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state after the CZ ends if the ART performed during the CZ (second half of the previous half) is not won, and if the ART is won, the gaming state after the CZ ends. When transitioning to ART, and winning ART and the additional zone, is transferred to the additional zone of the type for which the game state is won after CZ ends.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), stock lottery in the additional zone is performed during the special CZ, and the special CZ continues until ten games have passed or until the stock lottery is won. The main control board 71 performs stock lottery of the additional zone 2 based on the flag B for lottery in the special CZ. Then, when 10 games have passed without winning the stock lottery in the additional zone 2, the main control board 71 ends the special CZ and shifts the gaming state to the normal ART, and adds it before the 10 games have elapsed. If a stock lottery in zone 2 is won, the special CZ is ended, and the gaming state is shifted to the additional zone 2.

(Number determination table for ART lottery in CZ)
FIG. 32 is a CZ ART lottery number determination table for determining the CZ ART lottery number from the lottery flag B. The CZ ART lottery number determination table is provided for each situation in the CZ. For example, during the first half of CZ which has not yet won ART lottery, the number determination table for ART lottery of "within the first half of CZ with no ART" is used, and during the second half of CZ which is performed without winning ART. The CZ during the CZ in the second half of the CZ in the second half of the non-ART category is used, and the CZ (in the first half of the first half) after winning in the ART numbering CZ in the second half of the CZ after the first prize A medium ART lottery number determination table is used.

  Further, the CZ-in-ART ART lottery number determination table defines the CZ-in-ART ART lottery number in association with the types of the lottery flags B and CZ. The CZ ART lottery number is information used for ART lottery performed during CZ1 to CZ4. Referring to the ART lottery number determination table in CZ in FIG. 32, in the first half of CZ, except for "0" for ART lottery number in CZ regardless of the classification flag B, until ART lottery is won once. It is determined. On the other hand, once winning the ART lottery, or in the second half of CZ, flags other than the ART lottery number “0” in CZ are determined only by the lottery flags B “3” to “7” (more than the so-called rare role).

(CZ ART ART lottery table)
FIG. 33 is a CZ to ART ART lottery table used for ART lottery based on the ART lottery number for CZ. The CZ ART lottery table defines lottery value information related to the ART lottery lottery result for each CZ ART lottery number. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the ART lottery number during CZ other than “0” is determined, the ART lottery will be won with a predetermined probability.

(Battle game number lottery table)
FIG. 34 is a battle game number lottery table used to determine the number of games in the second half of CZ (the number of battle games) at the start of the final game in the first half of CZ. The battle game number lottery table defines lottery value information on the number of games in the second half of CZ in accordance with the result of ART lottery in the first half of CZ (winning or not winning). In the case of the Pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the number of games in the second half of the CZ is always "3 games" when ART lottery in the first half of the CZ is not won, and when ART lottery in the first half of the CZ is won. Is a "four game" with a predetermined probability.

(Special CZ middle addition zone lottery table)
FIG. 35 is a special CZ extra zone lottery table used for extra lot stock lottery performed during the special CZ. The additional zone lottery table defines, for each of the lottery flags B, information on a lottery value related to the lottery result of the stock lottery in the additional zone 2. During Special CZ, stock lottery is performed only for the additional zone 2, and stock lottery for the other additional zones 1 and 3 is not performed.

<Flow of game in normal ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 36 to FIG. 42, the game during the normal ART will be described. FIG. 36 is a view showing the flow of gaming in the normal ART, and FIGS. 37 to 42 are views showing various data tables used in the normal ART.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (A), during the normal ART, an extra lottery is carried out in which the continuation of the duration of the ART (number of games) and stocking of the additional zone are performed. Normally, the addition lottery in ART is basically performed based on the table mode and the flag C for lottery, but if the number of continued games in the ART gaming state exceeds 250 games, the flag C for lottery is used regardless of the table mode. Be done. The number of continuing games in the ART gaming state may be the sum of the number of continuing games in the normal ART and the number of continuing games in the extra zones 1 to 3, or only the number of continuing games in the normal ART. May be Further, the number of continued games in the ART gaming state is not the total number of continued games including the previous ones, but the number of continued games in the current ART gaming state, in other words, the ART gaming state continues without ending. Is the number of continued games during the same ART gaming state.

The main control board 71 performs table mode transfer lottery during normal ART and performs the above-described extra lottery. The main control board 71 continues the normal ART without performing any extras in this extra lottery, and if it wins the extra number of games in the extra lottery, it adds the number of games (duration). If the normal ART is continued and the stock lottery of the additional zone is won in the additional lottery, the gaming state is shifted from the normal ART to the type of the additional zone of winning.
The main control board 71 performs table mode lottery and addition lottery even during ART preparation. Here, “ART ready” means that the player has the ART gaming state (normal ART, extra mode) right and is in the RT0, RT1 gaming state before the ART gaming state starts. Since the ART gaming state starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state after the rights of the ART gaming state (normal ART, extra mode) are granted, the ART gaming state starts before the ART gaming state starts (ie, ART The RT0, RT1 gaming state after the warning sign is finished is called ART ready.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), during the normal ART, the shift lottery of the release mode and the release lottery based on the release mode are performed. The cancellation mode is a mode in which the winning expectation of cancellation lottery is different. Release mode transition lottery and release lottery are performed based on the current release mode, respectively. In release mode transition lottery, the release destination of the transfer destination is sorted out based on the current release mode, and release lottery is performed on the current release mode. Perform stock lottery of the additional zone 1 based on the release mode.

  The main control board 71 switches the release mode that has been set according to the result of the release mode transition lottery. Further, the main control board 71 continues the normal ART when the release lottery is not won, and shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the additional zone 1 when the release lottery is won.

(Additional lottery number determination table)
FIG. 37 is an additional lottery number determination table for determining the additional lottery number from the lottery flag C. The extra lottery number determination table is provided for each number of continuing games in the current table mode or ART gaming state. For example, before the ART gaming state has elapsed 250, an extra lottery number determination table corresponding to the current table mode is used, and after the ART gaming state has elapsed 250 games, “ART 250G” regardless of the current table mode. An additional lottery number determination table is used. Then, the additional lottery number determination table defines the additional lottery number in association with the lottery flag C.

(Registered lottery table during normal ART)
FIG. 38 is a normal ART middle-of-the-lot zone lottery table used for the top lottery, which is performed based on the top lottery number. Usually, the ART in-area addition zone lottery table defines information of extraction value regarding the extraction result of the addition lottery for each addition lottery number.

(Number determination table for lottery of number of games added during ART)
FIG. 39 is a number-of-games number-for-superimposed-games number determination table for ART for determining the number-of-extra-games number for lottery based on the lottery flag C. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs lottery only on whether or not to add the number of games in the extra sort, and does not voluntarily count the number of games to be added, and performs extra games separately from the extra lottery. The number of games to be added by number lottery is randomly selected. The extra game number lottery number is information used in the extra game number lottery. The ART intra-game number-of-lottery number determination table is provided for each of the current table modes or the number of continued games in the ART gaming state, and defines the number-of-superimposed-game number lottery number in association with the lottery flag C.

(Additional game number lottery table)
FIG. 40 is an extra game number lottery table used for the extra game number lottery performed based on the extra game number lottery number. The additional game number lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the number of games to be added for each additional game number lottery number.

  When the main control board 71 wins the extra number of games in the extra lottery using FIG. 38, the main control board 71 determines the extra game number lottery number using FIG. 39, and based on this extra game number lottery number, FIG. Perform a lottery on the number of games added.

(Release mode transition lottery table)
Subsequently, FIG. 41 is a release mode transition lottery table used for transition lottery of the release mode. The release mode transition lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the release mode of the transfer destination for each current release mode.

(Release lottery table)
Subsequently, FIG. 42 is a release lottery table used for release lottery based on the release mode. The cancellation / lottery table defines the information of the lottery value regarding the presence / absence of stock in the additional zone 1 for each current cancellation mode. The main control board 71 performs release lottery using the release lottery table in the “default” column until the number of continuing games in the ART gaming state exceeds 250 games, and the number of continuing games in the ART gaming state is 250 games. After exceeding, the release lottery is performed using the release lottery table in the column of “ART250G”.

  The main control board 71 performs stock lottery (release lottery) of the overlay zone based on the release mode, in addition to the additional lottery (FIG. 37 to FIG. 40) using the flag C for lottery. The release mode transition lottery table and the release lottery table shown are used in this lottery.

<Flow of game in additional zones 1 and 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the game in the additional zones 1 and 2 will be described. FIGS. 43 and 44 are diagrams showing the flow of the game in the additional zones 1 and 2, and FIGS. 45 to 48 are diagrams showing various data tables used in the additional zones 1 and 2. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (A), in the extra zones 1 and 2, an event mass is set for each of the games for 5 games from the current game (current game) to the game after 4 games. The event squares slide one by one as the game progresses. For this reason, the main control board 71 sets an event mass for each game for the game at the start of the extra zones 1 and 2 and then slides for one game each time the game progresses. Set a new event space for the game.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (B), a plurality of types of event squares are provided. In the extra zone 1, the main control board 71 sets an event mass obtained by lottery from these plural types of event masses in association with each of the games for five games, while in the extra zone 2, Set “Back” only.

  Further, rewards are associated with the event squares, respectively. The reward associated with the event mass includes a reward that is advantageous to the player and a reward that is disadvantageous to the player. In the extra zones 1 and 2, the main control board 71 is associated with the event mass set for the game based on the internal winning combination (specifically, the lottery flag C) in the current game. Give a reward. Basically, when the bell or more (flag C "2" or more for lottery) is won, the main control board 71 gives an advantageous reward associated with the event box, and the replay or less (flag C for lottery If “1”) is won, an unfavorable reward associated with the event mass is granted. In addition, in the additional zone 2, regardless of the lottery flag C, an advantageous reward (the increase in the number of games) associated with the event "back" is given.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an adverse reward is associated with only the event mass “red”, and only an advantageous reward is associated with the other event masses. Specifically, “Life-1” is associated with the event mass “Red” as an unfavorable reward. During the additional zone 1, the duration is managed by the life, and when the life becomes 0 due to the “life-1” which is the disadvantageous reward of the event mass “red”, the additional zone 1 is ended. In addition, life is given by 1 at the start of the additional zone 1 and by the reward of the event mass "character 1".
In addition, in a game in which the event space "red" is set, a reward of "increase in the number of games" may be awarded when a role of "rare" or more (flag "3" or more for lottery) is won.

  In addition, "the number of games added" is associated with the event squares "blue 1" to "blue 5" as an advantageous reward. In addition, "transition to the additional zone 2" or "addition of the number of games" is associated with the event space "back" as an advantageous reward. Specifically, the event mass "back" may be set in both of the additional zones 1 and 2, and the event mass "back" set in the additional zone 1 may be shifted to the "addition zone 2" Is associated with the event space set in the additional zone 2 and “the number of games is increased”. Therefore, in the game in which the event mass “back” in the extra zone 1 is set, the main control board 71 shifts the game state to the extra zone 1 or the extra zone 2 when the bell or more wins.

  Also, the event mass “Character 1” is associated with “Life + 1” as an advantageous reward, and the event mass “Character 2” is associated with “Red square conversion stock + 1” as an advantageous reward. . Here, "red mass conversion stock" is a right to convert an event mass "red" into another event mass. The main control board 71 converts the event square “red” into another event square when the event square “red” is set for the next game in a situation where “red mass conversion stock” is included.

  Also, "2 times stock +1" is associated as an advantageous reward with the event space "Chara 3", and "resurrection stock +1" is associated with the event space "Cara 4" as an advantageous reward . Here, “double stock” is a right to convert the number of games to be added when adding the number of games to twice the number of lottery games. “Restoring stock” is a right to reset the additional zone 1 when the life becomes 0 and the additional zone 1 is terminated. When the main control board 71 has “double stock” and the number of games is increased by the event mass “blue 1” or the like, the number of games is increased by doubling the number of additional games determined by lottery. Add on. In addition, the main control board 71 resumes the addition zone 1 when the life becomes 0 (when the addition zone 1 ends) due to the event mass “red” in the situation of having “recovery stock”.

  The event mass “battle” is associated with “convert to back cell” as an advantageous reward. Here, "convert to back mass" is to convert the currently set event mass to an event mass "back". In the game in which the event mass "battle" is set, the main control board 71 converts the event mass set for the game after the next game into an event mass "back" when a bell or more is won.

(End condition of additional zone 1)
As shown in FIG. 43 (C), the main control board 71 wins an unfavorable reward “life-1” of the event mass “red” as a result of winning the following replay in the game in which the event mass “red” is set. When the life becomes 0, the extra zone 1 is terminated and the gaming state is shifted to the normal ART. Even if a game with the event mass “red” is set, if the bell or more wins, the disadvantageous reward “life-1” of the event mass “red” can be avoided, and the additional zone 1 continues. In addition, even if the life becomes 0, the main control board 71 restarts the additional zone 1 if it has “resurrection stock”.

  In addition, if the game has “double stock” or if the number of guaranteed games remains, the main control board 71 determines that the game with the event mass “red” is set to “Replay” or less. However, the disadvantageous reward “Life-1” of the event mass “Red” is not granted.

(Transfer from zone 1 to zone 2)
Subsequently, the transition from the additional zone 1 to the additional zone 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 (D) and (E). As described above, “transition to the additional zone 2” is associated with the event mass “back” as an advantageous reward. In the game in which the event mass “back” in the extra zone 1 is set, when the main control board 71 wins a bell or more, an advantageous reward “transition to the extra zone 2” of the event mass “back”, The gaming state is shifted from the additional zone 1 to the additional zone 2. On the other hand, in the game in which the event mass “back” in the extra zone 1 is set, if the main control board 71 wins a replay or less, the main control board 71 remains in the extra zone 1 without giving an advantageous reward. maintain.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (E), the main control board 71 performs a lottery promotion for the extra zone when a bonus-related role is won in the extra zone 1. When the main control board 71 wins the promotion lottery, the main control board 71 promotes the additional zone 1 to the additional zone 2. In this case, the bonus state that starts with the winning of the winning combination is a special BB having the same game characteristics as the added zone 2. On the other hand, when the promotion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 maintains the additional zone 1 without promotion, and in this case, the starting bonus state is usually BB or episode BB.

(End condition of additional zone 2)
As shown in FIG. 44 (F), the main control board 71 performs an end lottery when the replay or less is won during the extra zone 2, and when the continuation is determined in this end lottery, the extra zone 2 is continued. Conversely, when the end is determined in the lottery, the additional zone 2 is ended, and the gaming state is shifted from the additional zone 2 to the additional zone 1. In addition, in the additional zone 2, the number of guaranteed games is given, and the main control board 71 does not perform the end lottery itself when the number of guaranteed games remains.

(Additional zone level lottery table)
Subsequently, FIG. 45 is an extra zone level lottery table for determining the extra zone level. The extra zone level lottery table defines lottery value information for the extra zone level. Here, the extra zone level is information used to determine the event mass to be set in the extra zone 1, and basically, the higher the extra zone level, the easier the event mass advantageous for the player is set. .

  The main control board 71 determines the addition zone level at the start of the addition zone 1 (more specifically, at the end of the game one game before the start of the addition zone 1), and based on the determined addition zone level Set event mass. When the additional zone 1 is resumed due to the above-mentioned "resurrection stock", the main control board 71 determines the more advantageous additional zone level 3 as the additional zone level (ie, when resuming with the "resurrection stock") , Determine the additional zone level 3 with a higher probability than the first hit of the additional zone 1).

(Event mass lottery table)
Next, FIG. 46 is an event mass lottery table used for randomizing event masses to be set. The event mass lottery table defines lottery value information for an event mass set as a result of lottery. At the start of the additional zone 1, the main control board 71 determines event squares for five games using an event square lottery table shown in “start time” of FIG. By referring to the "start" event mass lottery table, it can be seen that the event mass "red" is not set except for the third grid when the additional zone 1 is started.

  The main control board 71 determines an event mass to be set using the event mass lottery table shown in “other than the start time” of FIG. 46A after the second game in the extra zone 1. Referring to the "other than start time" event mass lottery table, the event mass is determined according to the additional zone level after the second game, and the additional zone level "Lv3" has an event mass more than the additional zone level "Lv1". It can be seen that the probability of determining “red” is low.

  When the event cell “red” is converted, the main control board 71 determines the event cell after conversion using the event cell lottery table shown in “red conversion” of FIG. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the case where "red mass conversion stock" exists, the event mass "red" is converted when two event masses "red" are set in succession. . The event mass lottery table shown in “after red square” is a table referred to when two event squares “red” are set in succession, and the event mass lottery table shown in “stock consumption” is “red”. This table is referred to when there is “mass conversion stock”.

  The main control board 71 determines an event mass to be set using the event mass lottery table shown in “every 20 games” in FIG. 46A every time a game is played a specific number of times in the extra zone 1. . In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the event mass "battle" is periodically set (every 20 games) in the additional zone 1, and the event mass lottery table of "every 20 games" is a regular event. Used for mass "battle" set.

  Further, the main control board 71 draws an event mass to be set using the event lottery table shown in “Addition Zone 2” of FIG. 46A during the addition zone 2 and the special BB. Referring to the event lottery table of “extra zone 2”, it is understood that the event mass “rear” is always determined in the extra zone 2 and the special BB.

  The event cell lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 46B is a table that is referred to when the event cell “Character” is determined in the event cell lottery table 1 shown in FIG. It defines information on a lottery value for a reward (reward according to characters 1 to 4) set for "character". The main control board 71 sets an event square to be set from among the event squares "character 1" to "character 4" using the event square lottery table 2 when the event square "character" is determined in the event square lottery table 1. decide. The main control board 71 gives a reward corresponding to the set “Character 1” to “Character 4” when a bell or more is won in the game in which the event mass is set.

The event mass lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 46 (C) is a table that is referred to when the event mass “battle” is determined in the event mass lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 46 (A). Information on lottery values for the reward (number of reverse cell conversion) set for “battle” is defined. When the event cell “battle” is determined in the event cell lottery table 1, the main control board 71 determines the number of reverse cell conversions using the event cell random table and sets the event cell “battle”. Then, when a bell or more wins in the game in which this event mass is set, the main control board 71 displays the event mass set for the game corresponding to the number of reverse square conversions set for the next and subsequent times set to the event mass “back”. To "".
As will be described later, the event cell is displayed by the corresponding display cell, but the event cell “battle” has a display cell corresponding to the set reverse cell conversion number (for example, the boss of the enemy character). ) Is displayed.

(Additional game number lottery number determination table in extra zones 1 and 2)
Subsequently, FIG. 47 is a number determination table for number addition games for number addition games in the addition zone for determining the number-of-additional game numbers from the lottery flag C. During normal ART, an additional game number lottery number is determined using the ART additional game number lottery number determination table shown in FIG. 39. In the additional zones 1 and 2, the number of additional games in the additional zones 1 and 2 is determined. Using the lottery number determination table, an additional game number lottery number is determined. The number-of-superimposed-games number determination table in the additional zones 1, 2 defines the number-of-superimposed-games number for lottery in association with the lottery flag C for each type of event box.

In the extra zone 1, the event mass “back” has an advantageous reward of “transition to the extra zone 2”. Therefore, in the extra zone 1, the event mass “back” is added. A game lottery number "0" may be defined. In this case, the additional game lottery number “0” may be defined with respect to all the lottery flags C, or a part of the lottery flags C (eg, bell or less (eg, the lottery flag C “0 Specify the game lottery number "0" for additional game from "2" to "2"), and indicate for other lottery flag C (for example, the role of rare or more (eg, flag C "3" or more)). The added game lottery number may be defined.
In addition, the number-of-addition-games number determination table in the additional zones 1 and 2 indicates that the number of additional games other than “0” with respect to the rare role or more (the lottery flag C “3” or more) in the event space “red”. Although the number for lottery is defined, the number of games to be added additionally may be defined as the number for additional game number “0” even if the event space “red” has more than the rare role. That is, the event mass “red” is an event that determines whether or not life is decremented by 1 without adding the number of ART games as an event mass in which “life-1” is defined as an unfavorable reward. It may be a mass.

  When the main control board 71 determines the number-of-extra-game-number lottery number according to the lottery flag C and the event space in the additional zones 1 and 2, the main control board 71 refers to the number-of-addition-games lottery table shown in FIG. The number of added games is lottery from the added game number lottery number.

(Additional zone promotion lottery table when bonus is awarded)
Next, FIG. 48A shows a bonus winning combination zone promotion lottery table used for bonus lottery in the bonus winning combination in the additional zone 1 used for promotion lottery of the additional loading zone. The bonus winning zone additional zone promotion lottery table defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the promotion zone boost lottery. The main control board 71 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to promote the additional zone 1 to the additional zone 2 when the part relating to the bonus is won in the additional zone 1, and when winning in this promoted lottery, the additional zone 1 is promoted to the additional zone 2 and the bonus state started with the bonus winning is set to special BB.

(Additional zone 2 end lottery table)
Subsequently, FIG. 48 (B) shows an addition zone 2 end lottery table used for the end lottery of the addition zone 2. The additional zone 2 end lottery table defines information of lottery values for the result of the end lottery for each of the flags D for lottery. Referring to the extra zone 2 end lottery table, the extra zone 2 continues with a win over the bell (lottery flag D “1”) and ends with a predetermined probability at the time of winning after the replay (lottery flag D “0”). .

(Additional zone 1 end revival stock lottery table)
Next, FIG. 48C is a stock recovery table at the end of the added zone 1 used for the lottery of the “restored stock” performed at the end of the added zone 1. The stock recovery table for revoking at the end of the additional zone 1 stipulates information on the lottery value for the lottery of “resurrection stock”. In case of winning the "resurrection stock" lottery, one "resurrection stock" is awarded.

<Flow of game in additional zone 3>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 49 to FIG. 51, the game in the additional zone 3 will be described. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the flow of games in the additional zone 3, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are diagrams showing various data tables used in the additional zone 3. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (A), in the extra zone 3, a plurality of games are set as one set, and one set of games is repeated until the game is not won in the continuation determination. In addition, as shown in FIG. 49B, during the extra zone 3, the main control board 71 starts the extra zone 3 (more specifically, the game ends one game before the game that starts the extra zone 3). A lottery of a continuation rate, a lottery of guarantee stock, a lottery of a set of games, and a lottery of continuation determination at the start of one set (more specifically, at the end of the previous set). Further, in the additional zone 3, the main control board 71 performs additional lottery for each game and the number of games. Therefore, the additional zone 3 is a state in which the number of games is increased without digesting the number of games in the normal ART until the continuation determination performed for each of a plurality of games (one set) is not won. It can be said.

(Continuity rate lottery table)
FIG. 50A is a continuation rate random determination table used to extract a continuation rate that defines a winning probability of the continuation determination. The continuation rate lottery table defines lottery value information about the continuation rate. The main control board 71 randomly selects the continuation rate at the start of the additional zone 3 (more specifically, at the end of the game one game before the start of the additional zone 3), and uses this continuation rate to determine the continuation. Perform a lottery of

(Guarantee stock lottery table)
FIG. 50B is a guarantee stock lottery table used for lottering the number of guarantee stocks. The guaranteed stock lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the number of guaranteed stocks. Here, if there is a guarantee stock, the additional zone 3 is continued (the next set is started) without performing the continuation determination.
In addition, when a guaranteed stock is given by lottery of the number of guaranteed stocks using the guaranteed stock lottery table in one extra zone 3, lottery of the number of guaranteed stocks is not performed in the extra zone 3.

(One set game number lottery table)
FIG. 50C is a one-set game number lottery table used for lottering one set of game numbers. One set game number lottery table is provided for each of the number of consecutive units with and without the guarantee stock number and the number of sets (more specifically, the number of consecutive units divided by four), and the number of games as one set of game results as lottery results. Define information on lottery value.

(Continuation judgment table)
FIG. 50D is a continuation determination table used for continuation determination as to whether or not to continue the extra zone 3. The continuation determination table defines lottery value information for determination results (end, continuation) for each continuation rate. The main control board 71 performs continuation determination at the start of one set (more specifically, at the end of the previous set) according to the continuation rate determined using the continuation rate lottery table at the start of the extra zone 3. As a result of the continuation determination, the main control board 71 continues the additional zone 3 if it is determined to be continued, and ends the additional zone 3 if it is determined to be ended, and shifts the gaming state to the normal ART. Let
The main control board 71 makes a continuation determination when the guarantee stock is 0, and when there is a guarantee stock, it subtracts 1 from the guarantee stock number without performing the continuation determination.

(Additional zone 3 addition game number lottery table)
FIG. 51E is an additional game number lottery table in the additional zone 3 for determining the number of games to be added in the additional zone 3. The number-of-superimposed-games lottery table in the additional zone 3 defines, for each of the lottery flags C, information on a lottery value regarding the number of additional games as a lottery result. The main control board 71 performs the additional lottery of the number of games using the additional game number lottery table in each game, the additional zone 3 in the additional zone 3.
In addition, in the game in the set whose end is determined in the continuation determination, if the winning number of games is won (the number of added games is “10” or more), the main control board 71 ends the result of the continuation determination. Rewrite from to continuous.

<Outline of back mode>
Subsequently, the outline of the back mode will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 52, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the back mode is managed separately from the above-described front mode. The back mode is a mode that is added (accumulated) sequentially as the game progresses. Based on the back mode that has been accumulated until the winning of the bonus-related role, the right of the normal ART and the extra zone is granted. Is done.

  The addition of the reverse mode is performed at the end of the game in which the reverse mode lottery state is set. Further, the back mode subtraction is performed at the timing when a privilege based on the back mode (normal ART or right of the added zone) is given. Since the reverse mode lottery state is basically set when the game result is unfavorable to the player, the reverse mode is added when the game result is unfavorable to the player ( Will be accumulated).

  Here, the back mode lottery state is a plurality of states with different expectations for the amount of back mode to be added. In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, “reset”, “lottery small”, “ There are five types of states: “Lottery in progress”, “Lottery large” and “Special”. The reverse mode lottery state is set when the game is in a specific situation, and is cleared when the reverse mode is added based on the set reverse mode lottery state (that is, the reverse mode lottery state is Only once at the set timing).

  Specifically, the main control board 71 sets “reset” as the back mode lottery state when the back mode becomes “0”. Note that the case where the back mode is “0” corresponds to, for example, the case where the back mode is cleared along with initialization, or the case where the back mode is subtracted when a privilege is granted based on the back mode. Further, the main control board 71 sets “lottery small” as the back mode lottery state when CZ1 to CZ3 ends without winning ART lottery, and the reverse side when CZ4 ends without winning ART lottery. As the mode lottery state, “in lottery” is set.

  Further, the main control board 71 sets the back mode lottery state based on the number of continued games in preparation for ART. Specifically, the main control board 71 sets “small lottery” as the back mode lottery state when 20 games continue during ART preparation, and sets the back mode lottery state when 30 games continue during ART preparation. Set “lottery small” and set “lottery in progress” as a back mode lottery state if ART preparation continues for 40 games, and “lottery large” as a back mode lottery state if ART in preparation continues for 50 games set. In addition, when the ART preparation is continued for 50 games or more during the ART preparation, (60, 70, 80...) Is set to “lottery large” as the back mode lottery state every 10 games.

  Further, the main control board 71 sets “lottery small” as the back mode lottery state when the roles “F_chance role 1” “F_chance role 2” “F_strong cherry” are determined as the internal winning combination between the flags. set. Further, the main control board 71 sets “in lottery” as the back mode lottery state when the ART gaming state is completed by running through. Note that the term “run through” means that during the ART gaming state, the number of games will not be added, the added zone will be won, and the bonus winning combination will never be won. The main control board 71 sets “lottery in progress” as the reverse mode lottery state at the timing when the RT 2 gaming state is shifted to the RT 1 gaming state after the ART gaming state is finished by runaway. Note that the state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state after the ART gaming state ends is referred to as “waiting for ART termination” in the present embodiment.

  Further, the main control board 71 gives "special" as the back mode lottery state when the gaming state shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state in a state other than in the ART gaming state or after the termination of the ART gaming state. . As described above, in the game in the RT1 gaming state in which the roles “F_RT1 in the middle of the rip _123” to “F_RT1 in the middle of the rip _321” are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct combination of symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed The gaming state transitions from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Therefore, depending on the order of the player's stop operation, the player may accidentally shift to the RT2 gaming state during the RT1 gaming state. Similarly, from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state, there may be a chance transition due to the order of the player's stop operation. In such a case, the main control board 71 sets “special” as the back mode lottery state.

  When the back mode lottery state is set, the main control board 71 performs addition of the back mode only once at the set timing. Further, the main control board 71 grants or lotteries a privilege based on the back mode when winning a combination related to the bonus, and subtracts the back mode when granting. Specifically, the main control board 71 manages the reverse mode using the data table shown in FIGS. 53 and 54.

(Back mode added value lottery table)
FIG. 53 is a back mode addition value lottery table for determining the back mode addition value when the back mode lottery state is set. The back mode addition value lottery table defines lottery value information about the back mode addition value for each back mode lottery state. When the back mode lottery state is set, the main control board 71 extracts the back mode addition value based on the set back mode lottery state, and adds the back mode by the back mode addition value.

(Bonus winning ART ART lottery table)
FIG. 54 is a bonus lottery time ART lottery table for lottery whether or not to award a benefit based on the back mode at the time of winning of a combination related to a bonus. At the time of bonus winning, the ART lottery table defines lottery value information on the ART lottery lottery result for each value of the back mode (more specifically, the back mode 裏 50 quotient). When any of the main control boards 71 wins (other than not winning), the main control board 71 grants one right corresponding to the winning contents and subtracts 50 from the back mode. If the reverse mode becomes a negative value as a result of the subtraction, the main control board 71 sets the value of the reverse mode to 0. When the lottery at the time of winning the bonus is won, the bonus state to be subsequently started is the episode BB (however, when the bonus state to be started is the special BB, the special BB remains).

<Flow of game in bonus state>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57, the game in the bonus state will be described. FIG. 55 is a view showing the flow of the game in the bonus state, and FIGS. 56 and 57 are views showing various data tables used in the bonus state.

  As shown in FIG. 55A, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a special BB, an episode BB, and a normal BB as bonus states. These bonus states are distributed based on the conditions satisfied at the start of the bonus state. Specifically, the pachislot machine 1 (main control board 71) wins the promotion lottery at the bonus winning performed in the additional zone 1 (refer to FIG. 48A), or the part related to the bonus in the additional zone 2 is When any of the conditions of winning is satisfied, the bonus state to be started is treated as special BB.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 episodes the bonus state to be started when the stock of the normal ART is +1 or more with the winning or winning of the part relating to the bonus that triggered the start of the bonus state at the start of the bonus state. Treat as BB. Note that, for example, when the stock of the normal ART becomes +1 or more due to the winning or winning of the combination related to the start timing, for example, at the winning of the finalized BB (flag A for lottery number A 8) or during special CZ The normal BB (lottery flag A “7”) is won (see FIGS. 26 and 27), and the ART lottery based on the back mode is won (see FIG. 54).

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 treats the bonus state to be started as a normal BB when neither the special BB nor the episode BB is satisfied. The normal BB and the episode BB only differ in the content of the effect on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the gameability during the bonus state is the same. Therefore, the main control board 71 may handle the normal BB and the episode BB without distinguishing them, and the sub control board 72 may distinguish the normal BB from the episodes BB. On the other hand, since the special BB is different not only in the contents of the effects but also in the gameability, it is managed that the bonus state that starts on the main control board 71 is the special BB.

(Normal game flow during BB and episode BB)
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), during the normal BB and the episode BB, when 7 sets in the BB are established, more specifically, the combination “F_7 set 1”, “F_7 set When “2” is determined as the internal winning combination, the right of the normal ART or the extra zone is granted.

(Game flow during special BB)
Subsequently, the flow of the game in the special BB will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (C). As described above, the special BB has the same game characteristics as the added zone 2. More specifically, in the extra zone 2, the event mass “back” is set for each game, and the number of games based on each game and the event mass “back” until the end of the extra lot 2 (See FIG. 47 and FIG. 40 (In the event cell “Back”, the game number is added and the lottery number “1” or more is always determined, so the number of games is always added)). The special BB has continuity with the extra zone 2 in terms of game play, and an extra game is added for each game. In addition, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 72, the special BB has continuity from the additional zone 2 and the production side, and in the special BB and the additional zone 2, the event mass “back” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. "Is set for each game and displayed.

(In BB ART lottery table)
FIG. 56 shows a ART-in-BB lottery table used for ART lottery usually performed during BB or episode BB. During the BB, the ART lottery table is normally provided for each ART stock, and defines lottery information for the ART lottery result for the lottery flag E. The main control board 71 normally performs ART lottery based on the lottery flag E during BB or episode BB, and adds 1 to the corresponding stock when winning this lottery.

(Special BB extra game number lottery game table)
FIG. 57 is a special BB added game number lottery table used for performing the additional lottery of the number of games on the special BB based on the flag E for lottery. The special BB added number-of-games lottery table is associated with the lottery flag E and defines information of lottery values for the number of added games as a lottery result. As described above, during the bonus state, the combination "F_RB combination", "F_7 combination combination", "F_7 combination combination 1" and "F_7 combination combination 2" are always determined as internal combination combinations and never become "off". With reference to the special BB middle added game number lottery table, the lottery flag E according to these roles “F_RB role”, “F_7 role”, “F_7 alignment role 1” and “F_7 alignment role 2” is added by 5 or more. Since the number of games is associated, during the special BB, every game is always added to the number of games.

<Overview of push order notification in ART>
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various gaming states are controlled by the main control board 71. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a stop operation mode (push order) advantageous to the player is notified during the ART gaming state or the like. This notification is performed on both the main (main control board 71) and the sub (sub control board 72), but in FIG. 58, the contents of the main notification (navigation), the main notification, and the sub notification The correspondence relationship between

(Contents of the main navigation system)
FIG. 58 (A) is a diagram showing the contents of notification (navigation) performed on the main side. As shown in FIG. 58, basically, the main side displays a value uniquely indicating the correct push order for the push order on the notification lamp 147a (see FIG. 3) when the push order is won. Thus, information on the stop operation is notified. Specifically, when the correct answer push order is “left, middle, right”, “1” is displayed on the notification lamp 147a, and when the correct answer push order is “left, right, middle”. When “2” is displayed on the notification lamp 147a and the correct push order is “middle, left, right”, “3” is displayed on the notification lamp 147a, and the correct push order is “middle, right, left”. "4" is displayed on the notification lamp 147a, and "5" is displayed on the notification lamp 147a when the correct answer push order is "right, left, middle", and the correct answer push order is If "right, middle, left", "6" is displayed on the notification lamp 147a, and the pressing order of the correct answer is "left 1st (the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L)" In this case, “7” is displayed on the notification lamp 147a, and the correct push order is “middle 1st (reel 3C in which the first stop operation is middle). In the case of “to be performed”, “8” is displayed on the notification lamp 147a, and the pressing order of the correct answer is “right 1st (the first stop operation is to the right reel 3R)”. In this case, "9" is displayed on the notification lamp 147a.

(Correspondence between main navigation and sub navigation)
FIG. 58 (B) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the content of notification (navi) performed on the main side and the content of notification (navi) performed on the sub side. On the sub (sub control board 72) side, information on the stop operation is notified by performing display on the liquid crystal display device 11 to directly indicate the pressing order of the correct answer. The notification performed on the sub-side is composed of a push order pattern and a color pattern. The push order pattern is a display pattern that directly indicates the push order of correct answers. For example, when the pressing order of the correct answer is “left, middle, right”, the secondary control board 72 displays “1, 2, 3” on the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the pressing order pattern 1. , Notify the order of the stop operation. Also, for example, when the pressing order of the correct answer is “medium 1st”, the secondary control board 72 displays “−, 1, −” on the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the pressing order pattern 8, Informing the order of the stop operation.

  The color pattern represents a color when notification according to the push order pattern is provided, and a color corresponding to the push order to be notified is provided. For example, in the case of notifying the replay, the sub control board 72 displays the content according to the pressing order pattern in blue based on the color pattern 1, and in the case of notifying the bell, the sub control board 72 Based on the color pattern 2, the content corresponding to the push order pattern is displayed in yellow. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, only two types of replay (blue) and bell (yellow) are provided as pushing orders, but the sub-control board 72 uses the color pattern 3 (white). The order of pushing correct answers may be reported. This point will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (B), the sub-side push order pattern has a one-to-one correspondence with the navigation content on the main side. When performing navigation on the main side, the main control board 71 notifies the sub-control board 72 of navigation contents (1 to 9 or none) on the main side and the type of winning combination (replay or bell). In the sub-control board 72, the corresponding push order pattern is determined from the navigation contents on the main side, the color pattern is determined from the type of the winning combination, and the content corresponding to the determined push order pattern is the color corresponding to the color pattern. By displaying with, navigation on the sub side is performed.

[Control on secondary control side]
The control on the main control board 71 has been described above. Subsequently, control on the side of the sub control board 72 will be described. Specifically, the effects controlled by the sub control board 72 and the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 11 will be described.

(Outline of production)
The sub control board 72 executes a number of effects. First, an outline of typical effects among these effects will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 (A) is a diagram showing an outline of the reverse mode effect. The back mode effect is an effect that suggests the back mode managed on the main (main control board 71) side. As described above, on the main side, the back mode is accumulated at a predetermined timing. The back mode absorption effect of the back mode suggestion effects is an effect that suggests that the back mode has been accumulated (added), and the back mode suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the accumulated amount of the current back mode. These effects for the back mode are performed using the spherical object 12 in addition to the liquid crystal display device 11.

  The sub-control board 72 stores the back mode by controlling the liquid crystal display device 11 and the sphere accessory 12 so that the energy (back mode) is absorbed by the sphere accessory 12 in the back mode absorption effect. I suggest that. Specifically, when performing the back mode absorption effect, the sub control board 72 generates energy from the left side, the right side, or the lower side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and this energy is absorbed by the spherical object 12. The display of the liquid crystal display device 11 is controlled. At this time, the sub control board 72 changes the magnitude of energy and the appearance position of energy according to the amount of back mode accumulated (added) on the main side.

  In addition, in the reverse mode suggestive effect, the sub control substrate 72 suggests the amount of reverse mode accumulation by controlling the liquid crystal display device 11 and the sphere character 12 so that the absorbed energy overflows from the sphere character 12. To do. At this time, the sub control board 72 changes the magnitude of the energy overflowing from the spherical object 12 according to the current accumulation amount of the back mode.

  Subsequently, FIG. 59 (B) is a diagram showing an outline of the extra zone effect. As described above, on the main side, event squares for five games are set in the additional zones 1 and 2. The additional zone effect is an effect performed by displaying an image corresponding to the set event mass on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  On the main side, in the additional zone 1, various types of event squares are set as event squares. Therefore, the sub control board 72 displays images corresponding to various set event masses on the liquid crystal display device 11 during the additional zone 1. In addition, in the extra zone 1, a double stock or a recovery stock may be provided. In such a case, the sub-control board 72 indicates that the double stock or the recovery stock is provided. Display on the device 11.

On the other hand, during the extra zone 2, only “back” is set as an event mass on the main side. Therefore, in the additional zone 2, the sub control board 72 displays an image (black diamond described later) corresponding to the event mass "back" in association with each game. In addition, in the additional zone 2, the display screen is darkened to make the overall impression of the additional zone 1 different.
During the special BB, the secondary control board 72 darkens the display screen even during the special BB and has an image corresponding to the event mass “back” because it has continuity in the added zone 2 and the playability and performance. (The black diamond described later) is displayed in association with each game.

<Overview of Menu Screen>
Subsequently, the menu screen of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60A is a diagram illustrating an outline of a menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and FIG. 60B is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the menu screen. When the determination button of the operation button 22 is operated in a situation where a game is not being performed, the sub control board 72 calls a menu screen shown in FIG. 60A and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (B), on this menu screen, “custom game”, “volume adjustment”, “game data”, “payout / arrangement”, and “dedicated site” are provided as main menus. There is a more detailed submenu. For example, the main menu “custom game” is provided with submenus “character selection”, “easy start”, “enter password”, “view midway record”, “record and end”, and “member registration”.

  The sub-menu "character selection" is a menu for customizing the character used for the effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 11. This character customization will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The sub-menus "easy start" to "member registration" are menus used for the registration game of the player. In recent pachislot machines, by registering a player who performs a game, a privilege that does not affect the appearance may be given compared to a player who does not register. Specifically, when the secondary control board 72 registers the player, the secondary control board 72 executes the game history after the registration (for example, in addition to the game history such as the number of bonus times and the winning probability of the small winning combination, (Including the production history of the production), and a certain privilege is given based on this history. The game history can include not only the current game but also the previous game. Specifically, the game history of each player is managed on the server, and when playing a game, the server notifies the gaming machine of the game history from the server via a mobile phone etc. You can play a game taking over the history.

  The sub-menu “Easy Start” is a menu that is operated in order to simply store the current game history without taking over the previous game history, that is, to perform simple login. Further, the sub-menu “enter password” is a menu that is operated when the history of the current game is further accumulated while taking over the history of the previous game, that is, for a formal login. Here, simple login can be completed simply by operating the “Quick Start” submenu, while formal login is performed by entering a password in the pachislot machine 1 after registering as a member. Is called. Therefore, comparing simple login with formal login, it can be said that simple login is a simpler registration procedure than formal login, and conversely, formal login is more complicated than simple login. It can be said that it is a procedure.

The sub-menu “view midway record” is a menu operated when confirming the halfway record of the game history accumulated so far when logging in (simple or formal). The sub-menu “record and end” is a menu operated when recording a history of games accumulated so far on the server when logging in (simple or formal). When these submenus “view midway record” and “record and end” are operated, the accumulated game history is read from the pachislot machine 1 onto the player's mobile phone or server.
Further, the sub menu "membership registration" is a menu operated to perform initial registration of the player on the server.

  In addition, a sub menu "game history 1" and "game history 2" is provided in the main menu "game data". The submenu “game history 1” is a menu operated when checking the first page of the accumulated game history, and the submenu “game history 2” is the second page of the accumulated game history. This is the menu operated when confirming. Here, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the sub menu "game history 2" can be selected only at the time of formal login, and at the time of simple login or no login, only the submenu "game history 1" can be selected. (It is possible to select both the sub-menu “game history 1” and “game history 2” at the time of official login).

Specifically, the sub-control board 72 controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 11 so that both the first page and the second page of the game history can be displayed when login is accepted by a formal registration procedure. On the other hand, when the login is accepted by a simple registration procedure, the display of the liquid crystal display device 11 is controlled so that the first page of the game history can be displayed and the second page of the game history cannot be displayed. .
The contents displayed on the first page and the second page of the game history will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main menu “payout / arrangement” is further provided with a submenu shown in FIG. 60B, and when a submenu is selected, contents corresponding to the submenu are displayed. On the other hand, the submenu is not provided in the main menu “volume control” and “dedicated site”, and when selected, contents corresponding to the main menu are displayed.

<Operation Mode of Pachi-Slot Machine 1 (Touch Operation, Selection Operation)>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64, a character customization method in the pachislot machine 1 will be described, and an operation mode in the pachislot machine 1 will be described.

  FIG. 61A shows a character customization screen for customizing characters. In the character customization screen, a "character" selection field, a "costume" selection field, a "pose" selection field, and an "accessory" selection field are provided, and a plurality of selectable icons are provided in each selection field. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the character is customized based on the icon content selected in each selection field at the timing when the determination icon is operated.

  The “character” selection field is used for selecting a character, and the sub-control board 72 determines one character selected in the “character” selection field from a plurality of types of characters. Also, the "costume" selection field is used to select the character's costume, the "pose" selection field is used to select the character's pose, and the "accessory" selection field is to select the character's accessories Used to do. The “costume” selection field to the “accessory” selection field are used to customize the character display mode (costume, pose, accessory), respectively. The sub-control board 72 determines one display mode selected in the selection field from among a plurality of display modes corresponding to the corresponding selection field.

  In the character customization screen, when character customization is performed, the sub control board 72 displays the costume selected in the "costume" selection column and the "character" selection column wearing the accessory selected in the "accessory" selection column. The character selected in is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the pose selected in the "pose" selection field.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the entire surface of the liquid crystal display device 11 is a touch panel, and includes an operation button 22 having a cross key and a determination button. Selection on the display screen can be performed both in the touch operation using the touch panel and the button operation using the operation button 22. In the example shown below, the operation method will be described using the character customization screen as an example. However, the display screen that can be operated is not limited to the character customization screen, and may be displayed on other display screens such as the menu screen shown in FIG. Similar operations are possible.

(Touch operation mode and button operation mode)
As shown in FIG. 61 (B), the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a touch operation mode and a button operation mode. In the touch operation mode, the sub control board 72 determines an icon selected by a touch operation via the touch panel (touch sensor 111), and in the button operation mode, the sub control board 72 passes the cross key of the operation button 22. The selected cursor is moved based on the operated operation (moving operation), and the icon pointed to by the selected cursor is determined by the operation (decision operation) via the determination button of the operation button 22.

  The sub-control board 72 switches between the touch operation mode and the button operation mode by a simple method. Specifically, when the operation according to each mode is performed, the sub control board 72 switches to the corresponding operation mode. More specifically, the sub control board 72 switches the operation mode from the touch operation mode to the button operation mode when the operation button 22 is operated in the touch operation mode, and via the touch panel in the button operation mode. When the touch operation is accepted, the operation mode is switched from the button operation mode to the touch operation mode.

(Overview of touch operation mode)
Subsequently, an outline of the touch operation mode will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 62 (A), in the touch operation mode, the selected content is determined according to the touch operation of the player. At this time, in a situation where the icon is touched (selected icon), the sub control board 72 generates a touch-on effect on the icon so that the player can know the touched (selected) icon. Display on Further, when the sub control board 72 releases the finger from the touched icon, the determined effect is generated on the icon, and the selected icon is displayed so that the player can understand.

  By the way, in a pachislot machine that enables customization of characters, the customizable range may be gradually released, and in such a case, a plurality of icons are an opened icon and an unopened icon. Will be included. As shown in FIG. 62 (B), in the touch operation mode, even if an unopened icon is touched, it does not react. That is, the sub-control board 72 generates a touch-on effect on the icon when a released icon is touched, but does not generate a touch-on effect even when an unopened icon is touched.

  FIG. 62C is a diagram showing an icon mode in the touch operation mode described above. As shown in FIG. 62C, in the touch operation mode, the opened icon can be selected (determined), and a touch-on effect occurs when the touch operation is performed. Further, when the touch operation on the released icon is finished (a finger is released from the icon), a determined effect is generated on this icon. On the other hand, in the touch operation mode, an unopened icon cannot be selected and does not react at all even if the touch operation is performed.

(Overview of button operation mode)
Subsequently, an outline of the button operation mode will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 63 (A), in the button operation mode, the selection cursor appears and moves among a plurality of icons. The selection cursor is moved up, down, left, and right by the operation on the cross key of the operation button 22. In the button operation mode, when the determination button of the operation button 22 is operated, the icon pointed to by the selection cursor is determined, and the determined effect is generated on the icon.

  Also, in the button operation mode, it is the same as the touch operation mode in that an unopened icon cannot be selected (determined). However, in the button operation mode, an unopened icon is also selected as shown in FIG. You can place the cursor.

  As described above, the unopened icon does not react in the touch operation mode, but can be matched with the selection cursor in the button operation mode. The touch operation mode is an operation mode in which an intuitive operation is possible, and if the player responds to the unopened icon (touch-on effect occurs) during such an operation mode, the player is intuitive. It is misunderstood that the unopened icon can be selected. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the player can not select the unopened icon by selecting no response to the operation on the unopened icon in the touch operation mode. It is supposed to be able to inform intuitively.

  On the other hand, in the button operation mode using the selection cursor, if it does not react to the unreleased icon, the position of the selection cursor will be unclear, so even if it is an unopened icon, it is possible to align the selection cursor I can do it. Thereby, the difference of both operation can be clarified.

  Subsequently, FIG. 63C is a diagram showing a method of moving the selection cursor. When the cross key is operated in the button operation mode, the sub control board 72 moves the selection cursor in the direction shown in FIG.

  FIG. 63 (D) is a diagram showing the form of the icon in the button operation mode described above. As shown in FIG. 63D, in the button operation mode, the selection cursor can be placed on both the opened icon and the unopened icon. When the selection cursor is set, the selection cursor is displayed together with the icon so that it can be seen that the icon is being selected. Also, when the decision button of the operation button 22 is operated, a decided effect is generated on the icon.

  Comparing FIG. 62 with FIG. 63, it is different in the touch operation mode and the button operation mode whether or not the selection cursor is displayed. In the touch operation mode, an unopened icon does not respond, but in the button operation mode, the selection cursor can be matched even with an unopened icon. In the touch operation mode, the icon being selected can be determined by generating a touch-on effect, whereas in the button operation mode, the icon being selected can be determined by aligning the selection cursor. The point is also different. On the other hand, the point that the determined effect is generated in the selected (determined) icon is common to both the touch operation mode and the button operation mode.

(Customizable combination table)
Subsequently, a customizable range in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. From the player's point of view, it is preferable that the character can be freely customized without limitation, but from the character manager's point of view, it is preferable that the character can be customized only within a range that does not impair the character image. In order to enable customization within a range that does not impair the image of the character, selectable parts may be limited, and for example, a costume that impairs the image of the character may not be selected from the beginning.

  In this way, although customization of only one part (for example, a costume) may be prohibited if selection is not possible from the beginning, the part is basically acceptable but in combination with other parts. May become unacceptable. In such a case, it is not necessary to make the selection impossible from the beginning, and only a specific combination may be prohibited. For example, if the first costume and the first accessory can be combined, but the first costume and the second accessory cannot be combined, the first costume itself or the second accessory itself is prohibited. Instead of doing this, you should forbid this combination.

  FIG. 64 is a customizable combination table defining customizable combinations. This customizable combination table defines, for each part (costume, pose, accessory), types of other parts that can be selected in combination with the part. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, for the accessory 3, only the costume 5 can be selected and the costumes 1 to 4 cannot be selected.

  For the sub-control board 72, only one option among a plurality of options in the first part can be selected, and the second part in which all the other options cannot be selected is selected (determined) ), It automatically selects (determines) one option that can only be selected for the second part, regardless of the player's selection. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 64, when the accessory 3 is selected as the accessory, the sub-control board 72 automatically selects the costume 5 that can be combined only as a costume instead of the player's selection. Choose.

  Thereby, the character can be customized without losing the image unique to the character. Also, if there is only one possible combination, it is possible to customize the character without losing the unique image without having to take the trouble of the player, since the one which can be combined is automatically selected. .

  The costume may be selected prior to the accessories depending on the order in which the player customizes. In the case where the costume selected earlier is stipulated so that it cannot be combined with the accessory selected later, the sub-control board 72 displays the selected content of the costume selected earlier based on the accessory selected later. It may be cleared. Further, when there is only one costume that can be combined with the accessory selected later, the sub-control board 72 automatically changes the costume selected previously to the one costume. It is also good. As an example, when the player selects the costume 1 after the player has selected the costume 1, the sub-control board 72 can only combine the costume 1 selected earlier with the accessory 3 selected later. It is good also as changing automatically to a different costume 5.

(Overview of history screen)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 65, an outline of a history screen for displaying a game history will be described. 65A is the first page of the game history called from the submenu “Game History 1”, and FIG. 65B is the second page of the game history called from the submenu “Game History 2”. is there. As shown in FIG. 65A, on the first page of the game history, the total number of games, the current number of games, the number of bonuses, the number of CZs, the number of ARTs, the number of added zones 1, 2 and the number of added zones 3 are displayed. Be done. Thus, on the first page of the game history, in addition to the total number of games and the current number of games, the number of times that a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a bonus or ART, has been performed is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the “to next page” icon is displayed on the first page of the game history. When this “next page” icon is selected, the second page of the game history is called. As described above, the first page of the game history can be displayed by all players, but the second page of the game history can be displayed only by the player who has officially logged in. The player of login and the player of simple login can not be displayed. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 prevents the “next page” icon from being hidden or selected when login is not performed or only simple login is performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the second page of the game history includes the number of times that the watermelon (“F_watermelon”) is determined as the internal winning combination (winning number) and the chance item A (“F_ Number of wins of chance role 1 ”), number of wins of chance role B (“ F_chance role 2 ”), number of wins of weak cherry (“ F_weak cherry ”), number of wins of strong cherry (“ F_strong cherry ”), And the number of winnings of the confirmed cherry ("F_confirmed cherry") is displayed. That is, on the second page of the game history, the number of winning so-called rare roles is displayed.

  In this way, by displaying the number of rare winnings only for a player who has officially logged in, the pachislot machine 1 is directly connected to the player who has registered intentionally following the official procedure. It is possible to give the privilege that does not affect (indication of the number of wins of the role of rare). As a result, a player who wants to display the number of rare roles won can be encouraged to use formal registration, and as a result, the game machine can be attached and the operation of the game machine can be improved.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 does not display the second page of the game history that displays the number of times a rare role has been won for a player who has logged in according to a simple procedure. Thus, it is possible to prevent the act of stealing the result of another person's game after the other person has played a game.

<Back mode effect>
Subsequently, a back mode effect performed based on the back mode will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the sub control board 72 performs back mode absorption effect and back mode suggestion effect shown in FIG. 59 (A). Below, the execution method of these back mode absorption production and back mode suggestion production is explained.

(Back mode absorption effect lottery table)
66 and 67 show a back mode absorption effect lottery table which is referred to when executing the back mode absorption effect. The back mode absorption effect lottery table is provided for each game situation, and the back mode absorption effect lottery table shown in FIG. 66 (B) is a CZ failure (that is, when the CZ fails without winning the ART lottery). 66 (C) is referred to at the end of ART, and the back mode absorption effect lottery table of FIG. 66 (D) is referred to during ART preparation, FIG. 67 (E). ) Of the back mode absorption effect lottery table is referred to when the continuous production fails, and the back mode absorption effect lottery table of FIG. 66A is referred to in other cases.
In the pachislot machine 1, it is an effect to be performed over a plurality of games, and if it succeeds in the effect, the possibility of winning a bonus or ART increases, and if it fails in an effect, the possibility of winning a bonus or ART increases. There are times when it is done continuous production. The back mode absorption effect selection lottery table of FIG. 67 (E) is referred to when this continuous effect fails.

  The back mode absorption effect lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the effect pattern of the back mode absorption effect for each difference of the back mode. The difference between the back modes will be described later with reference to FIG. The sub-control board 72 executes the corresponding back mode absorption effect when any effect pattern is determined as a result of lottery using the back mode absorption effect lottery table.

(Back mode suggestion lottery table)
Subsequently, FIG. 68 shows a back mode suggestion effect lottery table which is referred to when executing the back mode suggestion effect. The back mode suggestion effect lottery table is referred to in the case where the back mode absorption effect is not won (not performed). That is, the back mode suggestion effect may be performed in a game in which the back mode absorption effect is not performed. The back mode suggestion effect lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the effect pattern of the back mode suggestion effect for each current back mode (the value of a main back mode counter described later). The sub-control board 72 executes the corresponding back mode suggestion effect when any effect pattern is determined as a result of lottery using the back mode suggestion effect lottery table.

<The management method of the back mode on the sub side and the trigger of the back mode effect>
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 69, the sub mode (sub control board 72) side mode management method, the back mode effect (back mode absorption effect, back mode suggestion effect) and the main (main control board 71) The relationship with the back mode addition trigger on the side will be described.

  FIG. 69A is a diagram showing a method of managing the back mode on the sub side. The sub side (sub RAM 103) has a main back mode counter and a sub back mode counter as counters for counting the back mode. The main back mode counter is a counter that completely matches the value of the back mode on the main side, and stores the value of the back mode received from the main side as it is.

  On the other hand, the sub back mode counter is basically a counter to which the value of the main back mode counter at the time of executing the back mode absorption effect is transferred. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a back mode absorption effect may be performed at a predetermined timing (see FIGS. 66B to 66E). This back mode absorption effect is basically performed based on the value of the back mode (difference in the above-mentioned back mode) increased from the previous back mode absorption effect. In order to specify the value of the increased back mode between such back mode absorption effects, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the sub RAM 103 is provided with a main back mode counter and a sub back mode counter, and the main back mode is determined. By subtracting the sub back mode counter (the value of the back mode at the previous stage) from the counter (the current back mode value), the value of the back mode increased between the back mode absorption effects (the difference between the back modes) is calculated. To do. The back mode difference referred to in FIG. 66 and FIG. 67 means “value of main back mode counter−value of sub back mode counter”.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (A), when the value of the main back mode counter is 0, the value of the main back mode counter of the next game is transferred to the sub back mode counter. This update trigger is for setting a value as an initial value to the sub back mode counter at the time of initialization. Further, the value of the main back mode counter of the current game is transferred to the sub back mode counter when (2) the back mode absorption effect is won. That is, because the back mode absorption effect suggests the value (difference) of the back mode increased from the previous back mode absorption effect, the value of the sub back mode counter is updated. In addition, (3) when the value of the main reverse mode counter is reduced compared to the previous game, the value of the main reverse mode counter of the current game is transferred to the sub reverse mode counter. As described above, when a bonus based on the back mode is given on the main side, the back mode is reduced by 50. Since the back mode effect (the back mode absorption effect, the back mode suggestion effect) is an effect performed in order to guess the timing when the privilege is granted based on the back mode, after the privilege based on the back mode is granted, Update the value of the sub back mode counter.

  Subsequently, FIG. 69 (B) is a diagram showing a relationship between the trigger of the back mode effect (back mode absorption effect, back mode suggestion effect) and the back mode addition trigger on the main (main control board 71) side. . On the main side, accumulation of the back mode, (1) back mode reset, (2) CZ failure, (3) ART end, (4) ART preparation in progress, (5) Flags, and (6) non-ART There is a possibility that it will be performed at six opportunities when transitioning from RT2 gaming state to RT1 gaming state (see FIG. 52).

  On the other hand, on the sub side, there is a possibility of performing back mode absorption effects at four occasions: (1) CZ failure, (2) ART termination, (3) ART preparation in progress, (4) Continuous rendition failure (See FIGS. 66 and 67). When the trigger for performing the back mode absorption effect on the sub side is compared with the trigger for performing the back mode accumulation on the main side, there are common parts but not common parts. In this way, the opportunity to perform the back mode absorption effect is different from the opportunity to accumulate the back mode, so that the main side capacity (that is, the opportunity to accumulate the back mode) is suppressed and the opportunity to produce with various opportunities. Can be executed, and the production can be varied.

  More specifically, the back mode is accumulated when the result of the game is disadvantageous for the player. In many cases, the result that is unfavorable for the player is directed. I feel from the side. For example, if a so-called rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination, but the player does not win a bonus, ART, or CZ, the player will receive a result of the presentation performed with the rare combination (continuous production failure). Along with this, you will feel that the result was unfavorable. Then, in order to accumulate the back mode on the main side at the timing when the player feels an adverse result, it is necessary to provide an enormous number of opportunities to accumulate the back mode on the main side, and the capacity of the main side increases End up.

  In this regard, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment is different from the opportunity for accumulating the back mode on the main side, and the opportunity for the player to feel that the result is unfavorable. Perform mode absorption effects. From the viewpoint of the player, the back mode is expressed as being accumulated by the back mode absorption effect, and it is felt that the back mode is accumulated at the timing when the player felt that the result is disadvantageous. And since the grant of benefits in the back mode approaches as the back mode accumulates, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the grant of benefits in the back mode has approached at the timing when the player felt an unfavorable result. I can tell you. In other words, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back mode absorption effect can be performed with various triggers than the main trigger, while limiting the main trigger and suppressing the main capacity.

<Game flow in the extra zones 1 and 2 (sub-side)>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 70, the flow of the game in the additional zones 1 and 2 under the control of the sub (sub control board 72) will be described. As described above, in the additional zones 1 and 2, on the main side, the event squares associated with the rewards are set for five games. Below, how to show (display) the set event mass will be described.

  On the main side, a plurality of event masses “Red” to “Battle” are managed. On the other hand, on the sub-side, as the display cell, display cells “enemy” “treasure box” “diamond” “pet” “weak?” “Strong?” “Character 1” “character 2” “character 3” “character 4” It has “Character 5”, “Black Diamond”, “Battle 1”, “Battle 2”, and “Battle 3”. As shown in FIG. 70A as an example, these display squares are associated with event squares based on rewards associated with the event squares.

  Specifically, the display cell “enemy” is a display cell that may end the extra zone 1, and the event cell “red” associated with the reward of “life-1” is set. Displayed for games.

  In addition, the display squares “treasure box”, “diamond”, “pet” and “character 5” are display squares that may be added to the number of games, and event squares to which the rewards of “number of games added” are associated "Blue 1" to "Blue 5" are displayed for the set game.

  The display cells “weak?” And “strong?” Are display cells whose display is switched to other display cells. The display cell “weak?” Is displayed more than the display cell “treasure box”, and the display cell “strong?” Is switched to display cells “character 1” to “character 5”.

  In addition, the display cells “Character 1” to “Character 4” are display cells in which “life + 1”, “red cell conversion stock + 1”, “double stock + 1”, “resurrection stock + 1” may be performed, respectively. It is displayed with respect to the game in which the event mass "character 1"-"character 4" with which each reward was matched was set.

  In addition, the display space "black diamond" is a display space where "transition to the additional zone 2" or "addition of the number of games" may be performed, and the event space "back" to which the same reward is associated is It is displayed for the set game.

  In addition, the display cells “battle 1”, “battle 2”, and “battle 3” are display cells that may be “converted to the back cell”, and an event cell “battle” associated with the same reward is set. Is displayed for the played game. The event cell “battle” is set with the back cell conversion number (see FIG. 46C). The display mass "battle 1" is displayed corresponding to the event mass "battle" in which "1" "2" "4" is set as the back mass conversion number, and the display mass "battle 2" is the number of back mass conversion "2" and "4" are displayed corresponding to the event mass "battle" set, and the display mass "battle 3" corresponds to the event mass "battle" where "4" is set as the back mass conversion number Is displayed.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 86 stores image data corresponding to the display squares described above. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 also stores image data corresponding to a display cell “unknown” described later.

(Display example 1)
As shown in FIG. 70 (B), when the event mass is set on the main side, the sub-control board 72 can select any display mass (see FIG. 70 (A)) that can be displayed for the set event mass. Are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

(Display example 2)
The player performs the extra zones 1 and 2 using the display mass displayed under the control of the sub side, but some players may not want to display the event mass (display mass). is there. For example, in a situation where an event mass that is not very favorable for a player is set, it may be considered that some players do not want to display the event mass. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined operation is performed, the event mass is not displayed. The predetermined operation may be any operation. For example, the operation button 22 may be operated simultaneously on the cross key and the determination button.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), even if the main control side sets the event mass as shown in FIG. 70C, the common display mass "unknown" is set regardless of the set event mass. , Corresponding to each game and display. As a result, the contents of the set event mass (reward) are not understood, so that the player plays the game while expecting every game.

  Note that the sub control board 72 may hide all of the squares for five games (display squares "unknown"), or hide some squares and display some squares. You may do it. In the example shown in FIG. 70C, for the event mass set for the current game, the corresponding display cell “treasure chest” is displayed, and the event set for the game for the next and subsequent four games is displayed. The squares are hidden.

<Example of special BB effect>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, an effect example of the special BB will be described. As described above, the special BB has a certain continuity with the additional zone 2 in terms of playability and effects. Continuity related to game play is realized by lottery of the number of added games on the main side, while continuity from the production side is realized by control on the sub side. Hereinafter, the continuity regarding the production surface of the special BB and the extra zone 2 will be described by comparing the normal BB and the special BB.

(Normal BB display example)
FIG. 71 is a display example when the bonus state (normal BB) starts in the additional zone 1. As shown in FIG. 71A, in the additional zone 1, display squares are displayed over five games. In this additional zone 1, in addition to being the additional zone 1, the number of additional games acquired in the additional zone 1 is displayed.

  When the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in the extra zone 1, a display example shown in FIG. 71 (B) is displayed. Specifically, in addition to the display of the display cells for five games unique to the extra zone 1, a display “bonus confirmation” indicating that the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination is displayed.

  When the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination in this way, a so-called bonus confirmation screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. This is the same when the bonus-related combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the extra zone 1, and the sub control board 72 displays the bonus confirmation screen shown in FIG. Displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Thereafter, when the bonus state starts, the sub control board 72 displays a display screen (bonus effect screen) during the bonus shown in FIG. 71 (D) on the liquid crystal display device 11. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the bonus condition end condition is “pay out more than 232 medals”, so the sub-control board 72 determines the number of medals acquired during the bonus state and the end of the bonus state. The remaining number up to the condition (that is, the number obtained by subtracting the number of medals paid out during the bonus state from the 232 sheets as the ending condition of the bonus state) is displayed.

(Display example of special BB)
Subsequently, FIG. 72 is a display example when the bonus state (special BB) starts in the additional zone 2. As shown in FIG. 72 (A), during the extra zone 2, as in the extra zone 1, a display cell is displayed over the game for five games. At this time, in the extra zone 2, the display screen is darkened and only the event cell “back” is set, so only the display cell “black diamond” is displayed.

  When the bonus-related combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the extra zone 2, a display example shown in FIG. 72 (B) is displayed. Specifically, in addition to the display of a display cell for five games peculiar to the extra zone 2, a display “bonus confirmation” indicating that the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination is displayed.

  In the case of the above-mentioned normal BB, the bonus confirmation screen (FIG. 71 (C)) is displayed. However, in order to realize the continuity from the production surface of the additional zone 2 and the special BB, the sub-control board 72 is displayed. When the bonus-related combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the extra zone 2, display of display squares for five games peculiar to the extra zone 2 (addition effect screen) without switching to the bonus confirmation screen Maintain. On the other hand, so that the bonus state can be appropriately started, the sub-control board 72 displays on the additional effect screen the target combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination such as “Aim 7”. To promote winning of a bonus-related role.

  Thereafter, when the bonus state starts, the sub control board 72 displays the display screen shown in FIG. 72 (D) on the liquid crystal display device 11. More specifically, the sub-control board 72 displays display squares for five specific games, similarly to the extra effect screen in the extra zone 2. The sub-control board 72 displays the remaining number up to the bonus condition end condition during the normal BB, but the bonus condition end condition is satisfied instead of the remaining number during the special BB. The remaining number of games required (up to 30 times in this embodiment) is displayed.

  From the player's point of view, the continuity from the gaming aspect and the presentation aspect is secured, so that the gaming nature as if the additional zone 2 continues can be provided to the player. Further, by replacing the end timing of the bonus state with an intuitively easy-to-understand display of the number of remaining games, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if 30 games have been guaranteed for the additional zone 2.

(Lock at bonus start (end))
By the way, in recent pachislot machines, the progress of the game may be temporarily stopped at the start and end of the bonus state. Such lock control at the bonus start (end) is preferable because it can emphasize the start and end of the bonus state, but in the case where continuity is provided as in the additional zone 2 and the special BB, This leads to a loss of continuity. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the bonus state is normal BB or episode BB, the main control board 71 temporarily stops the progress of the game at the start and end of the bonus state. In the case of the special BB (that is, in the extra zone 2), the progress of the game is not stopped at the start and end of the bonus state. As described above, since the main control board 71 manages whether or not the bonus state is the special BB, the lock control may be different depending on whether the special BB or not. Can be realized.

(Display example when starting normal BB)
Subsequently, a display example at the start of the normal BB will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 71 performs the ART lottery based on whether or not the combination “F_7 uniform combination 1” and “F_7 uniform combination 2” are won during the normal BB (see FIG. 56). In recent years, the result of ART lottery based on 7 sets in such a bonus state is announced in various ways. Typical examples are "announcement of chance", "complete notification" and "post notification". In the pachislot machine, the result of the ART lottery in the bonus state is notified according to the mode selected by the player from these various modes.

  In this way, there are pachislot machines that allow the selection of the notification mode, even in existing pachislot machines. However, in the existing pachislot machine, the effect (video + music) in the bonus state is determined according to the notification mode. End up. From the player's point of view, the player wants to be notified of the result of the ART lottery in a favorite manner while playing his favorite performance in the bonus state, but the existing pachislot machine has a combination of the notification mode and the production. Can not be selected individually.

  In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the mode of notification and the effect can be selected individually. FIG. 73 is a display example of the bonus start screen at the normal BB start. As shown in FIG. 73, the player can select the ART lottery notification mode from “chance notification”, “complete notification”, and “post notification” on the bonus start screen, and the sub-control board 72 is selected. It announces the result of ART lottery in the following manner. In addition, the player can select an effect flowing during the bonus state on the bonus start screen from “effect A”, “effect B”, and “effect C”, and the sub-control board 72 reads the selected effect. The effect is performed during the bonus state.

  Thereby, since the mode of notification and the effect (video + music) can be individually selected, it is possible to play a game in the bonus state with a combination that is impossible with existing pachislot machines. In the example shown in FIG. 73, an effect in which video and music are set can be selected, but video and music may be individually selectable.

[Description of main control circuit operation]
Next, the contents of various processing executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 99.

<Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU>
First, a procedure of main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to a flowchart shown in FIG. 74 (hereinafter referred to as main flow).

  First, when power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at the time of power-on (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been normally performed or the setting has been appropriately changed, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is, for example, a storage area in which it is necessary to erase data for each unit game (game) such as the internal winning combination storing area and the display combination storing area.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, the medal sensor and the input of the start switch 79 are checked.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table (FIG. 13) according to the current gaming state, and lotteries a combination determined as an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the combination ("F_BB1" to "F_BB3") relating to the bonus has been determined as the internal winning combination (S5). When the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the RT3 gaming state flag to ON and shifts the RT gaming state to the RT3 gaming state (between flags) (S6). .

  When the RT3 gaming state flag is updated to ON, or when the combination related to the bonus is not determined as the internal winning combination in S5 (NO), the main CPU 93 performs lottery flag conversion processing (S7). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines the lottery flag from the internal winning combination determined in S4 with reference to the lottery flag determination table (FIG. 19).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs start-time state control processing which will be described later with reference to FIG. 75 (S8). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a start command generation process (S9). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by command data transmission processing in interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG.

  The start command data includes various kinds of information such as an internal winning combination, information on the main navigation, a back mode value, and a gaming state. Here, the main CPU 93 groups and includes some of the combinations (push order combination) in the start command when it is determined as an internal winning combination. Specifically, push order replays ("Lip in F_RT1_123" to "Lip in F_RT2_3rd") are grouped as replays, and push order bells ("F_push order bell 1_1st" to "F_push order bell 2_3rd"). Group as a bell. On the side of the sub control circuit 101, the navigation on the sub side (pushing order pattern, color pattern) can be appropriately determined from the information on the main navigation and the information on the grouped replay (or bell).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop initial setting process described later with reference to FIG. 90 (S10). In this process, reel stop control information to be used for the stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S4. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 95 and used in the reel stop control process of S12.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process after performing a wait process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, each reel is accelerated and controlled until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed by an interrupt process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). It is controlled to maintain a constant speed.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process described later with reference to FIG. 91 (S12). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S10, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 19L, the middle stop button 19C, and the right stop button 19R are pressed. The

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In this winning determination medal payout process, as a result of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R being stopped, based on the combination of symbols displayed along the active line, depending on the combination of symbols such as medal payout and re-game operation. Grant benefits. In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a winning operation command and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The winning action command data includes various types of information such as combinations of symbols displayed along the active line.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs bonus end check processing described later with reference to FIG. 92 (S14). In this process, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus state according to the number of medals paid out during the bonus state, and shifts the gaming state to the general gaming state. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs bonus operation check processing described later with reference to FIG. 93 (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 activates a bonus according to the combination of symbols displayed along the active line.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs an RT operation check process described later with reference to FIG. 94 (S16). In this process, the main CPU 93 shifts the RT gaming state according to the combination of symbols displayed along the active line. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs end-time state-dependent control processing described later with reference to FIG. 95 (S17). When the end state control process is performed, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2 on the assumption that one game (unit game) has ended.

<Start-time state control processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the start state control process will be described. In the start-by-start state control process, the main CPU 93 first performs a table mode shift process described later with reference to FIG. 76 (S31). Here, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the table mode transition is performed at the start of the game (S8 in FIG. 74), but the table mode transition is performed at the end of the game (S17 in FIG. 74). It may be done in

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state (S32). When the gaming state is in the normal gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a normal processing at the start described later in FIG. 77 (S33).

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is not in the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is CZ precursor (S34). If the gaming state is CZ precursor (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs start time CZ precursor processing described later with reference to FIG. 78 (S35).

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is not in the CZ precursor (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the gaming state is in the CZ (S36). When the gaming state is CZ (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a start-time CZ process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 79 (S37).

  On the other hand, if the gaming state is not CZ (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the gaming state is ART precursor (S38). If the gaming state is ART prediction (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs start processing during start ART described later with reference to FIG. 82 (S39).

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is not in the ART sign (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the gaming state is in the ART (S40). Here, the ART in S40 includes not only that the gaming state is the ART gaming state (normal ART, additional zone) but also that the ART is being prepared and that the ART is waiting to be completed. When the gaming state is ART (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a start ART process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 (S41).

  On the other hand, if the gaming state is not ART (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the gaming state is in the bonus state (S42). When the gaming state is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a start bonus process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 (S43).

  Subsequent to the start bonus process, or when the gaming state is not in the bonus state in S42 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs other processes (S44), and ends the start state control process. To do. In this process, the main CPU 93 determines the contents of navigation on the main side, or sets “small lottery” as the back mode lottery state when a combination “F_chance combination 1” or the like is determined between the flags. I do.

<Table mode transition process>
Subsequently, table mode transition processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the table mode transition process, first, the main CPU 93 determines the table mode transition lottery number from the lottery flag and the current table mode with reference to the table mode transition lottery number determination table (FIG. 21) (S51). . Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the table mode transition lottery table 1 (FIG. 22A) and determines and sets the transition destination table mode based on the table mode transition lottery number determined in S51 (S52). End the table mode transition process.

<Normal processing during start>
Next, normal start processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal processing at the start, first, the main CPU 93 determines the CZ lottery number from the lottery flag B with reference to the CZ lottery number determination table (FIG. 24) (S71). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs CZ lottery based on the CZ lottery number determined in S71 with reference to the normal CZ lottery table (FIG. 25) (S72).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ lottery has been won (S73). If the CZ lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 then adds 1 to the CZ stock of the winning type (S74).

  Following the processing of S74 or when the CZ lottery is not won in S73 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the ART lottery number determination table (FIG. 26) and determines the lottery flag A. The ART lottery number is determined (S75). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART lottery table (FIG. 27) and performs ART lottery based on the ART lottery number determined in S75 (S76).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S77). If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the ART of the winning type and the stock of the additional zone (S78).

  Subsequent to the processing of S78 or when the ART lottery is not won in S77 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not there is a normal ART stock (S79). If there is a normal ART stock (YES), the main CPU 93 then refers to the precursor game number lottery table (FIG. 28) and lots and sets the precursor game number (S80). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets ART warning in the next game (S81), and ends the normal processing at the start.

  On the other hand, if there is no normal ART stock in S79 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether there is a CZ stock (S82). If there is no stock of CZ (NO), while processing is normally ended at the start, if there is stock of CZ (YES), the precursor game number lottery table (FIG. 28) is referred to and the precursor is The number of games is extracted and set (S83). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets CZ precursor during the next game (S84) and ends the normal processing at the start.

<Start-up CZ precursor processing>
Subsequently, the start CZ precursor processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the start CZ warning process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the special CZ is won (S91). If the special CZ has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the CZ precursor CZ promotion lottery table (FIG. 29), and based on the flag B for lottery, promotes the main lottery of CZ. Perform (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the promotion lottery has been won (S93), and when the promotion lottery has been won (YES), the type of the stocked CZ is rewritten to the special CZ (S94) ).

  Following the processing of S94, if the special CZ is won in S91 (YES) or if the promotion lottery is not won in S93 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines the ART lottery number. With reference to the table (FIG. 26), the ART lottery number is determined from the lottery flag A (S95). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART lottery table (FIG. 27) and performs ART lottery based on the ART lottery number determined in S95 (S96).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S97). If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 then adds 1 to the winning type of ART or the extra zone stock (S98), and the start CZ precursor sign process ends.

  On the other hand, when the ART lottery is not won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently updates the number of precursor games (S99). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of precursor games has become 0 (S100). When the number of precursor games is not zero (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the CZ precursor warning process at the start, while when the number of precursor games is zero (YES), the main CPU 93 wins the next game. The CZ corresponding to the type of CZ that is present is set, the CZ stock is decremented by 1 (S101), and the start CZ warning process is terminated.

<Process at start CZ>
Subsequently, processing during start CZ will be described with reference to FIG. In the start CZ process, first, the main CPU 93 determines the ART lottery number from the lottery flag A with reference to the ART lottery number determination table (FIG. 26) (S111). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART lottery table (FIG. 27) and performs ART lottery based on the ART lottery number determined in S111 (S112).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S113). If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the ART of the winning type and the stock of the additional zone (S114).

  Subsequent to the process of S114, or when the ART lottery has not been won in S113 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not CZ1 to CZ4 is in progress (S115). If CZ1 to CZ4 are in progress (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs normal CZ processing described later with reference to FIG. 80 (S116), and ends the processing at CZ at start. On the other hand, if it is not in CZ1 to CZ4 (NO), it is in the special CZ, so the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the special CZ process described later with reference to FIG. 81 (S117), and ends the CZ process at the start. To do.

<Normal CZ processing>
Subsequently, the normal CZ processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal CZ process, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the CART-in-ART lottery number determination table (FIG. 32), and based on the state in CZ (previous second half, ART's yes / no), The ART lottery number in CZ is determined (S131). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs an ART lottery based on the CZ ART lottery number determined in S131 with reference to the CZ ART lottery table (FIG. 33) (S132).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S133). When the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the stock of the type of the winning type and the extra zone (S134). Subsequent to the process of S134, or when the ART lottery has not been won in S133, the main CPU 93 updates the number of games in CZ (S135).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the final game of the first half (that is, the twelfth game) (S136). If it is the final game of the first half (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the battle game number lottery table (FIG. 34), lotteries and sets the battle game number (S137), and performs the normal CZ process. finish.

  On the other hand, when it is not the last game of the first half (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is the last game of the second half (S138). If it is not the final game of the second half (NO), the main CPU 93 normally ends the CZ process, whereas if it is the final game of the second half (YES), the main CPU 93 continues to stock the ART. It is determined whether it is 1 or more (that is, whether or not ART has been stocked in CZ) (S139).

  If the ART stock is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets ART preparation in the next game (S140), and ends the normal CZ process. On the other hand, when the ART stock is 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the normal gaming state in the next game (S141). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the back mode lottery state (CZ1 to CZ3 is “lottery small” and CZ4 is “lottery is in progress”) corresponding to CZ, assuming that CZ has failed (S142), and ends the normal CZ process. To do.

<Special CZ treatment>
Subsequently, the special CZ process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special CZ process, first, the main CPU 93 performs an ART lottery based on the lottery flag B with reference to the special CZ addition zone lottery table (FIG. 35) (S151). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S152). If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the ART of the won type and the stock of the additional zone (S153), and sets ART preparing for the next game (S157) ), The special CZ process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the ART lottery is not won in S152 (NO), the main CPU 93 updates the number of games in the CZ (S154). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the final game of the special CZ (that is, the tenth game) (S155). If it is not the final game of the special CZ, the main CPU 93 ends the special CZ process.

  On the other hand, if it is the final game of the special CZ (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the normal ART stock (S156). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets ART being prepared for the next game (S157), and ends the special CZ process.

<Treatment of the warning sign of ART at start>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 82, the start-up ART precursor processing will be described. In the start ART warning sign process, first, the main CPU 93 determines the ART lottery number from the lottery flag A with reference to the ART lottery number determination table (FIG. 26) (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART lottery table (FIG. 27) and performs ART lottery based on the ART lottery number determined in S171 (S172).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S173). If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds one to the stock of the normal ART or the winning zone of the winning category (S174).

  Subsequent to the processing of S174 or when the ART lottery is not won in S173 (NO), the main CPU 93 continues to refer to the ART omen sign addition zone lottery table (FIG. 30) to determine the lottery flag. An extra zone lottery is performed based on A (S175). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the extra zone lottery has been won (S176). If the winning zone lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the ART warning sign process at the start, while if the winning zone lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 Subsequently, 1 is added to the stock of the added zone of the winning type (S177), and the start ART warning sign process is terminated.

<Processing during ART at start-up>
Subsequently, processing during ART at start will be described with reference to FIG. In start-up ART processing, the main CPU 93 first determines the ART lottery number from the lottery flag A with reference to the ART lottery number determination table (FIG. 26) (S191) ). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs an ART lottery based on the ART lottery number determined in S191 with reference to the ART lottery table (FIG. 27) (S192).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S193). If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the ART of the winning type and the stock of the additional zone (S194). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not ART termination is awaited (S195). When waiting for the end of ART (that is, winning an ART lottery while waiting for the end of ART) (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the type of ART or extra zone that won the next game, and sets the corresponding stock to 1 Subtraction is performed (S196), and the processing during ART at the start ends.

  If the ART lottery has not been won in S193 (NO), or if the ART is not waiting for completion in S195 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the normal ART is being performed (S197). ). If the normal ART is in progress, the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the normal ART processing described later with reference to FIG. 84 (S198), and ends the processing during ART at start.

  On the other hand, if it is not during normal ART (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the extra zone 1 or 2 (S199). If it is in the add-on zones 1 and 2, the main CPU 93 subsequently performs an add-on zone 1 and 2 process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 (S200), and terminates the start ART process.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the extra zone 1 or 2 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the extra zone 3 (S201). If it is not in the add-on zone 3 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the processing during the ART at the start, whereas if it is in the add-on zone 3, the main CPU 93 continues to be described later with reference to FIG. The additional zone 3 processing is performed (S202), and the processing during ART at the start is ended.

<Normal ART processing>
Subsequently, normal ART processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal ART process, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the extra lottery number determination table (FIG. 37) and determines the extra lottery number from the lottery flag C (S211). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the normal ART extra zone lottery table (FIG. 38) and performs extra lottery based on the extra lottery number determined in S211 (S212).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the extra zone is won in this extra lottery (S213), and when the extra zone is won (YES), the stock of the extra zone that is won is set to 1 Add (S214). Subsequent to this processing, or when the additional zone is not won in S214 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether the increase in the number of games has been won (S215).

  If the number of games is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the number-of-addition game number determination table during ART (FIG. 39) and adds the number of games to be added from the lottery flag C. A number is determined (S216). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the extra game number lottery table (FIG. 40), and draws the extra game number based on the extra game number lottery number determined in S216 (S217). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 adds the number of added games lottery for the duration of the normal ART (ART game number) (S218).

  Subsequent to the processing of S218 or when the number of games has not been won in S215 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the release mode transition lottery table (FIG. 41) and sets the release mode. While performing lottery, the release lottery is performed based on the release mode with reference to the release lottery table (FIG. 42) (S219).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the additional zone is won in the release lottery (S220). If the winning zone is won (YES), the main CPU 93 then adds 1 to the stock of the winning zone of the added zone (S221).

  Subsequent to this process or when the bonus zone has not been won in S220 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently updates the number of ART games (S222). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether there is stock in the additional zone (S223). If there is an extra zone stock (YES), the main CPU 93 sets an extra zone corresponding to the next game, subtracts 1 from the extra zone stock (S224), and ends the normal ART process.

  On the other hand, when there is no additional zone stock, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of ART games is 0 (S225). When the number of ART games is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the normal ART process, while when the number of ART games is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the ART in the next game. Waiting is set (S226), and the normal ART processing is ended.

<Addition zone 1, 2 processing>
Subsequently, the additional zones 1 and 2 will be described with reference to FIG. In the additional zone 1 and 2 processes, the main CPU 93 first determines whether or not the additional zone 2 is in progress (S231). If it is in the extra zone 2 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether there is a guaranteed number of games (S232).

  When there is no guaranteed number of games (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the extra zone 2 end lottery table (FIG. 48B), and finishes the extra zone 2 end lottery based on the lottery flag D. (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether the end has been determined in the end lottery (S234). If the end is determined (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the extra zone 1 for the next game (S235), and finishes the extra zone 1 and 2 processing.

  If it is not in the extra zone 2 in S231 (NO), if there is a guaranteed number of games in the processing of S232 (YES), or if the end is not determined in S234 (continuation) (NO), the main CPU 93 Subsequently, with reference to the extra game number lottery number determination table (FIG. 47) in the extra zone, the extra game number lottery number is determined from the lottery flag C and the event mass set for the current game. (S236). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the added game number lottery table (FIG. 40) and draws the added game number based on the added game number lottery number determined in S236 (S237).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is a double stock (S238). If there is a double stock (YES), the number of games obtained by doubling the number of added games extracted in S237 is added to the duration (the number of ART games) of the normal ART (S239, S240). Further, in this processing, the main CPU 93 subtracts one from the double stock (S239). On the other hand, if there is no double stock (NO), the main CPU 93 adds the number of added games lottered in S237 to the normal ART duration (ART game number) as it is (S240).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs an event mass control process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 (S241), and ends the additional zone 1 and 2 process.

<Event mass control processing>
Subsequently, event mass control processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. In the event mass control process, the main CPU 93 first determines whether a bell or more is won (S251). As described above, in the extra zone, an advantageous reward is awarded for winning over the bell, and an unfavorable reward is awarded for winning after the replay. The determination in S251 determines whether an advantageous reward is to be given or a disadvantageous reward is to be given in the subsequent processing. In the case of a win after the replay (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S271 in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the case of winning over the bell (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the number of guaranteed games (S252). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the event mass set in the current game is “Character 1” (S253). When “Character 1” is set as the event mass (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to life (S254), and ends the event mass control process.

  On the other hand, when “Character 1” is not set as the event mass (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the event mass set in the current game is “Character 2”. (S255). If “character 2” is set as the event space (YES), the main CPU 93 adds one to the red space conversion stock (S256), and ends the event space control process.

  On the other hand, when “Character 2” is not set as the event mass (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the event mass set in the current game is “Character 3”. (S257). When “Character 3” is set as the event mass (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the double stock (S258) and ends the event mass control process.

  On the other hand, when "Chara 3" is not set as the event space (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether the event space set in the current game is "Chara 4". (S259). When “Character 4” is set as the event mass (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the resurrection stock (S260) and ends the event mass control process.

  On the other hand, when “Character 4” is not set as the event mass (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the event mass set in the current game is “Battle”. (S261). When “battle” is set as the event cell (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the event cell “battle” (see S463 of FIG. 96 described later) and the number of the back cells converted after the next game. The event mass is converted to a back mass (S262), and the event mass control process is ended.

  On the other hand, if “battle” is not set as the event mass (NO), the main CPU 93 continues to set the event mass in the current game in the additional zone 1 and in the current game. Is determined to be “back” (S263). If the determination is NO, the main CPU 93 ends the event mass control process, while if the determination is YES (YES), the main CPU 93 converts all squares to the event square “back”. (S264). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the additional zone 2 for the next game, adds 10 to the guaranteed number of games (S265), and ends the event mass control process.

  On the other hand, in the case of winning after replay, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the event mass set in the current game is “red” (S271). If “red” is not set as the event mass (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently updates the guaranteed number of games (S281) and ends the event mass control process.

  On the other hand, when “red” is set as the event mass (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is within 5 games since the addition zone 1 is started (S272). If this determination is YES, the main CPU 93 converts all event masses into “back” (S273). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the extra zone 2 for the next game, adds 10 to the guaranteed number of games (S274), and ends the event mass control process. As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reward “life-1” corresponding to the event mass “red” is given within 5 games from the start of the extra zone 1, the main CPU 93 starts from the extra zone 1. The gaming state is shifted to the additional zone 2.

  On the other hand, if it is not within 5 games in S272 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether there is a guaranteed number of games (S275), whether there is a double stock (S276), and this additional zone In step S277, it is determined whether the addition has been performed even once. If YES in any of these determinations, the main CPU 93 subsequently updates the guaranteed number of games (S281) and ends the event mass control process. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the number of guaranteed games remains, when there is a double stock, and when addition is never performed, the life subtraction by the event space “red” is performed. I can not do it.

  On the other hand, if all of S275 to S277 are NO, the main CPU 93 subsequently subtracts 1 from the life (S278). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the life has become 0 (S279). When the life is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the event mass control process, while when the life is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the normal ART to the next game. (S280) The event mass control process ends. If there is a resurrection stock, the main CPU 93 resumes the additional zone 1 in the processing in the additional zone 1 and 2 at the end described later (FIGS. 96 and 97 described later).

<Addition zone 3 processing>
Subsequently, the additional zone 3 processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the additional zone 3 processing, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the additional game number lottery table (FIG. 51 (E)) in the additional zone 3, and performs lottery of the number of additional games based on the lottery flag C (S291) . Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the lottery has been won (S292). If the lottery has not been won (NO), the extra zone 3 process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the player has won a lottery for the number of added games (YES), the main CPU 93 then adds the number of added games to the ART game number (S293). Subsequently, when the continuation determination is non-continuation, the main CPU 93 converts the continuation determination to continuation (S294), and ends the extra zone 3 process. As described above, during the extra zone 3, the continuation determination is performed at the start of one set (more specifically, at the end of the previous one set). When the number of ART games is added while the continuation determination is not continued, the main CPU 93 rewrites the result of the continuation determination as continuation.

<Bonus processing at start>
Subsequently, the start bonus process will be described with reference to FIG. In the start bonus process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the special BB is being performed (S311). If it is not during the special BB (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs an ART lottery based on the lottery flag E with reference to the ART lottery table during BB (FIG. 56) (S312).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S313). When the ART lottery has not been won, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus bonus process at the start, while when the ART lottery has been won (YES), the winning type of ART or the stock of the extra zone Is added by 1 (S314), and the processing at the start bonus is ended.

  On the other hand, if the special BB is in progress in S311 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the special BB added game number lottery table (FIG. 57) and based on the lottery flag E Perform an additional lottery (S316). Referring to FIG. 57, in this extra lottery, the number of extra games of five or more games is always lottery. The main CPU 93 then adds the number of extra games that have been lottery to the number of ART games (S317), and a bonus at the start. Finish the middle process.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the reel stop initial setting process will be described. In the reel stop initial setting process, first, the main CPU 93 refers to a rotating drum stop initial setting table (not shown) and obtains a rotating drum stop number based on an internal winning combination or the like (S331). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the rotation stop initial setting table, and acquires each information based on the rotation stop number (S332). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires various types of information associated with the number for stopping the spinning, such as determination data for each pressing order.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (not shown) (S333). That is, the main CPU 93 sets the bits of all symbol code storage areas (excluding unused areas) to “1”. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S334), and ends the reel stop initial setting process. The stop button non-operating counter is used to determine the number of stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R that have not been stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95.

<Reel stop control process>
Subsequently, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop control process, the main CPU 93 first determines whether a valid stop button has been pressed (S351). This process is a process of determining whether a signal is output from the stop switch substrate 80 or not. If the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has not been pressed (NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of step S351.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the main CPU 93 selects a pressing order storage area (not shown) and an operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 5) according to the pressed stop button. Not shown) and updated (S352). That is, the main CPU 93 manages the type of the pressed stop button by updating the operation stop button storage area, and updates the pressing order storage area based on the type and order of the pressed stop button. And manage the order (stopping order) of the stop operation.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S 353), determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S 354), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter ( S 355). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch substrate 80.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes sliding symbol number determination processing (S356). In this sliding piece number determination process, the number of sliding pieces defined at the stop start position is determined based on the reel stop control information (stop table group) selected based on the internal winning combination from the turning stop initial setting table. It is a process.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated reel stop command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95. The generation process is executed (S357). The reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines a planned stop position based on the stop start position and the sliding piece number determination data, and stores it in the main RAM 95 (S358). The planned stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any one of predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” defined as the number of sliding symbols to the stop start position, and the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. It is.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets a planned stop position as a search symbol position (S359). Next, the main CPU 93 executes a symbol code storage process (S360). In this symbol code storage process, the symbol code of the check symbol position data for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired by the symbol code storage processing (S361). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S362). In this control change process, the stop information group used to stop the reel is updated when it is at the specific stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the pressed stop button has been released (S363). This process is a process of determining whether or not the signal is not output from the stop switch substrate 80.

  When determining that the pressed stop button has not been released (NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of step S363. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button has been released (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S364). Here, if it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes a drawing priority storage process (S365), and executes the process of step S41. In this drawing priority order storing process, the drawing priority order of all symbols on the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process.

<Bonus end check process>
Subsequently, the bonus end check process will be described with reference to FIG. In the bonus end check process, the main CPU 93 first determines whether the number of medals paid out during the bonus state (payout number) exceeds the specified number (252) (S371). If the number of payouts does not exceed the specified number, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process.

  On the other hand, when the number of paid-out sheets exceeds the specified number (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently executes bonus time-out table mode transition processing (S372). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the table mode transition lottery table 2 (FIG. 22B) and lots and sets the table mode of the transition destination.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets a gaming state corresponding to the next game (S373). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets a gaming state corresponding to the next game based on the type of stock held. For example, when no stock is held, the main CPU 93 sets the next game. Set the normal gaming state to.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs bonus end processing (S 374), and performs bonus end check processing. In this process, the main CPU 93 performs various processes accompanying the end of the bonus state, such as clearing information used during the bonus state. Further, in this process, the main CPU 93 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated bonus end command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. . This bonus end command data includes information such as the type of game state set for the next game.

<Bonus activation check process>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 93, the bonus operation check process will be described. In the bonus operation check process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a combination of symbols of BB ("C_BB_A" to "C_BB_C3") is displayed (S391). When the combination of symbols of BB is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process.

  On the other hand, when the combination of symbols of BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the game in which the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination is in the extra zone 2. (S392). If it is in the extra zone 2, the main CPU 93 sets a special BB for the next game (S393). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 executes bonus start processing (S394), and ends the bonus operation check processing. In the bonus start process, the main CPU 93 performs various processes associated with the start of the bonus state, such as setting information used for the bonus state. Further, in this process, the main CPU 93 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated bonus start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. . This bonus start command data includes information about the type of bonus state that has been started (normal BB or special BB) and whether or not ART stock has been awarded in accordance with the winning of the combination related to the bonus. The sub control circuit 101 distinguishes normal BB, episode BB or special BB from these pieces of information.

  On the other hand, if the game in which the bonus-related role is determined as the internal winning combination in S392 is not in the extra zone 2 (NO), the main CPU 93 adds the game in which the bonus-related role is determined as the internal winning combination. It is determined whether or not it was in zone 1 (S395). When the game in which the winning combination is determined to be the internal winning combination is in the extra zone 1 (YES), the main CPU 93 continues to the extra zone promotion lottery table at the time of bonus winning (FIG. 48 (A)). Referring to FIG. 6, the extra zone promotion lottery at the time of bonus winning is performed (S396).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the extra zone promotion lottery has been won (S397). If the winning zone promotion lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 sets a special BB for the next game (S398). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 executes bonus start processing (S399), and ends the bonus operation check processing.

  On the other hand, if the game in which the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in S395 is not in the extra zone 1 (NO), or if the game is not won in the extra zone promotion lottery in S397 (NO), the main CPU 93 Then, with reference to the bonus lottery ART lottery table (FIG. 54), the ART lottery is performed based on the reverse mode based on the value of the reverse mode (S400).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S401). If the episode BB is won (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the winning type of ART or the extra zone stock (S402), and then subtracts 50 from the back mode (S403). If the back mode becomes a negative value as a result of the subtraction, the main CPU 93 sets the back mode value to 0. When the back mode becomes 0 with subtraction of the back mode, the main CPU 93 subsequently sets “reset” as the back mode lottery state (S404).

  Subsequent to the process of S404, or when the ART lottery is not won in S401, the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a bonus start process (S405) and ends the bonus operation check process.

<RT operation check process>
Next, the RT operation check process will be described with reference to FIG. In the RT operation check process, first, the main CPU 93 shifts the RT gaming state in accordance with the displayed symbol combination (S411). Specifically, the main CPU 93 shifts the RT gaming state in accordance with the conditions described in FIG.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether ART preparation is in progress (S412). If ART preparation is in progress (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the processing has shifted to the RT2 gaming state in the processing of S411 (S413). If the state changes to the RT2 gaming state during the ART preparation (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the gaming state corresponding to the next game (S414). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding gaming state in accordance with the stock of the normal ART and the additional zone. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs an ART start process (S415) and ends the RT operation check process. In this process, the main CPU 93 performs subtraction of stock, setting of an initial value of the number of ART games, and the like.

  On the other hand, if the ART is not being prepared in S412 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines in the process of S411 whether or not the RT2 gaming state has shifted to the RT1 gaming state (S416). If the RT2 gaming state has not shifted to the RT1 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT operation check processing, while transitioning from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (YES The main CPU 93 then determines whether the gaming state is in the normal gaming state or CZ (S417).

  If the normal gaming state or CZ shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets "special" as the back mode lottery state (FIG. 94), and checks the RT operation check The process ends.

  On the other hand, when the transition from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state is not in the normal gaming state or CZ (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is waiting for the ART to end (S419). ). When not waiting for the end of ART (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT operation check process, while when waiting for the end of ART (YES), the main CPU 93 continues to run through the ART. In step S420, it is determined whether or not the process is terminated. If the ART has been run through and ended (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets “in lottery” as the back mode lottery state (S421).

  Following the processing of S421, or when it is determined that the ART has not been run through in X420 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets a gaming state corresponding to the next game (S422). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs ART end processing to clear various information used during the ART gaming state (S 423), and ends the RT operation check processing.

<End-state control process>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 95, the end state control process will be described. In the end state control process, the main CPU 93 first determines whether ART preparation is in progress (S431). If ART preparation is in progress, the main CPU 93 sets the back mode lottery state according to the number of continuing games (S432).

  On the other hand, if the ART is not being prepared, the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the extra zones 1 and 2 (S433). It should be noted that in addition to being in the additional zones 1 and 2 and in the additional zones 1 and 2, the additional zones 1 and 2 are started from the next game (the additional zones 1 and 2 are set in the next game at the start) ) Is also included. If it is in the extra zones 1 and 2 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs an end zone extra zone 1 and 2 process which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97 (S434).

  On the other hand, when it is not in the additional zones 1 and 2 in S433, the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether it is in the additional zone 3 (S435). In addition, in addition zone 3, in addition to the case where it is currently in addition zone 3, the case where addition zone 3 starts from the next game (the addition zone 3 is set in the next game at the start) is included. If it is in the additional zone 3 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the processing in the additional zone 3 at the end described later with reference to FIG. 98 (S436).

  Subsequent to the processing of S432, S434, and S436, or when it is not in the additional zone 3 in S435 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the back mode lottery state is set (S437). ). When the reverse mode lottery state is set (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the reverse mode addition value lottery table (FIG. 53), based on the set reverse mode lottery state. A mode addition value lottery process is performed (S438). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 updates the reverse mode based on the reverse mode addition value extracted (S439) and clears the reverse mode lottery state (S440).

  Subsequent to the process of S440 or when the back mode lottery state is not set in S437 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs other processes necessary according to the current gaming state (S441). . Subsequently, the main CPU 93 generates unit game end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated unit game end command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 ( S442). This unit game end command data includes information about the result of each process at the end of the unit game.

<Process at end of addition zone 1, 2>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 96, processing in the end-time additional zones 1 and 2 will be described. In the processing in the extra zone 1 and 2 at the end, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the start time of the extra zone 1 (S451). The start time of the extra zone 1 is the end time of the game where the extra zone 1 starts from the next game.

  If it is the start time of the extra zone 1 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the extra zone level is set, and if the extra zone level is not set, the extra zone level lottery table. Referring to (FIG. 45), the additional zone level is lottery and set (S452). The case where the extra zone level is not set is, for example, when the extra zone 1 starts from the normal ART, when the extra zone 2 started from a state other than the extra zone 1, and when the extra zone level is set. Is set, for example, when the additional zone 1 restarts based on the resurrection stock (the additional zone level 3 is set), at the end of the additional zone 2 that has shifted from the additional zone 1 (the initial additional zone 1 The added zone level set at the start is maintained). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the event mass lottery table 1 (FIG. 46A), and lots and sets event masses for five games (S453). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets “5” as the guaranteed number of games.

  On the other hand, when it is not the start time of the extra zone 1 in S451 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the number of specific games in the extra zone 1 is reached (S454). As described above, an event mass “battle” is set every 20 games in the extra zone 1. The process of S454 is a process for determining whether it is time to set the event mass “battle”. When it is the specific number of games in the extra zone 1 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets “battle” as a new event mass (S455).

  On the other hand, when it is not the specific game number in the additional zone 1 in S454 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the event cell lottery table 1 (FIG. 46A) and makes a new event cell. A lottery is set (S456).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is a red cell conversion stock (S457). If there is a red mass conversion stock (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether the event mass set for the next game is "red" (S458). When the event mass set for the next game is “red” (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the event mass lottery table 1 (FIG. 46A) and performs the next game. The event cell “red” set in this way is converted into another event cell, and 1 is subtracted from the red cell conversion stock (S459).

  Following the processing of S453, S455, and S459, if there is no red square conversion stock in S457, or if the event mass set for the next game in S458 is not “red” (NO), the main CPU 93 Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is an event cell in which “character” is set among the event cells for five games (S460). If there is an event box in which "character" is set (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the event box lottery table 2 (Fig. 46 (B)) and extracts the character type, and the process is performed. The event mass “character” to be set is set (S461). When an event cell “Character” is set in a plurality of event cells out of the event cells for 5 games, the main CPU 93 decides all of the plurality of event cells by one lottery. A character type may be set, or individual lottery may be performed on each of the plurality of event squares, and the character type determined by the individual lottery may be set.

  Subsequent to the process of S461, or when there is no event square in which "character" is set in S460 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets "battle" in the event squares for 5 games. It is determined whether or not there is an event mass being processed (S462). If there is an event box for which “battle” is set (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the event box lottery table 3 (FIG. 46 (C)) and The corresponding event mass "battle" is set (S463). In addition, when the event cell “battle” is set in a plurality of event cells out of the event cells for five games, the main CPU 93 determines all of the plurality of event cells by one lottery. The number of reverse square conversion may be set, or individual lottery may be performed for each of the plurality of event masses, and the reverse square conversion number determined by the individual lottery may be set.

  Subsequent to the processing of S463, or when there is no event mass for which "battle" is set in S462 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the ART is normally set for the next game. (S471). When the normal ART is not set in the next game (NO), the main CPU 93 finishes the processing in the addition zone 1 and 2 at the end, while when the normal ART is set in the next game ( YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the return stock lottery table at the end of the extra zone 1 (FIG. 48 (C)), performs the return stock lottery at the end of the extra zone 1 (S472), and determines the lottery result. Based on the number of revival stocks is updated (S473).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the recovery stock is 1 or more (S474). If the resurrection stock is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the processing in the addition zone 1 and 2 at the end, while if the resurrection stock is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 Subsequently, the extra zone 1 is set in the next game, that is, the gaming state set in the next game is rewritten from the normal ART to the extra zone 1 (S475).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the additional zone level 3 as the additional zone level (S 476), and sets “5” as the guarantee game number (S 477). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 subtracts one from the resurrection stock (S 478), and ends the processing in the end addition zone 1, 2.

<Process at end of addition zone 3>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 98, the process in the end-time additional zone 3 will be described. In the process in the extra zone 3 at the end, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the start time of the extra zone 3 (S491). Note that the start time of the extra zone 3 is the end time of the game in which the extra zone 3 starts from the next game. When it is the start time of the extra zone 3 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently draws and sets the continuation rate with reference to the continuation rate lottery table (FIG. 50A) (S492). Further, in this processing, the main CPU 93 adds 4 to the guaranteed stock number.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start time of the additional zone 3 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently updates the number of continued games in one set (S493). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of continued games in one set has reached the number of one set games (S494). When the number of 1-set games has not been reached (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the process in the additional zone 3 at the end, while the number of 1-set games has been reached (at the end of one set) (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not continuation is set (S495).

  When the continuation is not set (NO), the main CPU 93 sets the normal ART for the next game (S496), and ends the process in the extra zone 3 at the end. On the other hand, when continuation is set (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the guaranteed stock lottery has been completed (S497). If the guarantee stock lottery has not been completed (NO), or following the processing of S492, the main CPU 93 performs guarantee stock lottery with reference to the guarantee stock lottery table (FIG. 50 (B)) (S498).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a guaranteed stock lottery has been won (S499). If a guarantee stock lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 3 to the number of guarantee stocks and sets the guarantee stock drawer completed (S500).

  Subsequent to the processing of S500, when it is determined in S497 that the guaranteed stock lottery has been completed (YES), or when it is determined in S499 that the guaranteed stock lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 It is determined whether there is a guarantee stock (S501). When there is a guaranteed stock (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently subtracts 1 from the guaranteed stock number and refers to the one-set game number lottery table (FIG. 50C) to set one set of the next set. The number of games is lottery and set (S502). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the number of continuing games in one set. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 finishes the process in the extra zone 3 at the end.

  On the other hand, if there is no guarantee stock (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a continuation determination lottery with reference to the continuation determination lottery table (FIG. 50D) and sets the lottery result (continuation or end). (S503). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the one-set game number lottery table (FIG. 50C) and lots and sets the number of one-set games in the next set (S504). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the number of continuing games in one set. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 finishes the process in the extra zone 3 at the end.

<Interrupt processing under main CPU control>
Subsequently, interrupt processing under control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S511). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S512). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs timer update processing (S513). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes, for example, a process of subtracting the value of a predetermined timer for each interrupt process. Next, the main CPU 93 performs communication data transmission processing (S514). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits various commands stored in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 to the sub control circuit 101.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel control processing (S515). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, and thereafter, each reel rotates at a constant speed. Drive control of three stepping motors. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 93 waits until the updated symbol counter matches the value corresponding to the planned stop position, and drives and controls the corresponding stepping motor so that the rotation of the corresponding reel is decelerated and stopped. .

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lamp and 7-segment driving process (S516). In this process, the main CPU 93 drives and controls the information display 14 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 executes register restoration processing (S517). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt processing.

[Description of sub-control circuit operation]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization of the communication message queue (S611), and executes a check of the received command (S612). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (S613). If it is determined that a command different from the previous command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the process of S611.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 creates game information from the received command, and stores the created game information in the sub RAM 103 (S614). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers an effect based on the game information created in S614 (S615). Although details are omitted, the sub CPU 102 registers, for example, the effect using the display space corresponding to the event space set on the main side, and registers the reverse mode effect based on the value of the reverse mode, etc. Do the processing. After registering the effect, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 65L and 65R, various LEDs, and the like to execute the registered effect. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 performs a navigation error time insurance process described later with reference to FIG. 101 (S616), and returns to the process of S101.

<Insurance handling at the time of navigation error>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 101, a navigation error insurance process under control of the sub CPU 102 will be described. This insurance process at the time of navigation error is performed at the timing when the start command is received from the main control circuit 91. In the navigation error insurance process, the sub CPU 102 first determines whether there is a main navigation (S631). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the received start command includes information about the main navigation.

  If there is no navigation on the main side (NO), the insurance process at the time of navigation error is terminated, while if there is a main side (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs a navigation effect pattern check (S632), It is determined whether or not an effect that matches the main navigation is registered (S633). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect registered in S615 of FIG. 100 is an effect corresponding to the main navigation. As an example, when “1” is determined as the main navigation, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub navigation of the push order pattern “1” is set (see FIG. 58B). .

  When an effect that matches the main navigation is registered (YES), the insurance process at the time of navigation error is terminated, while when an effect that does not match the main navigation is registered (NO), Subsequently, the CPU 102 rewrites the push order pattern of the effects on the notification (navi) on the sub side into a push order pattern that matches the main side navigation (S634). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets "color 3 (white)" as a color pattern of the effects relating to the notification (navi) on the sub side (S635), and ends the navigation error insurance process.

  Here, a rough flow of this navigation error insurance process is shown in FIG. FIG. 102 shows the flow of the insurance process at the time of navigation error when the combination “F_push order bell 1_1st” is determined as the internal winning combination. When the main side (main CPU 93) determines the combination “F_push order bell 1_1st” as an internal winning combination, the main side (main CPU 93) determines the contents of the main side navigation corresponding to the internal winning combination. Here, the main navigation "7" corresponds to the combination "F_push order bell 1_1st" (see FIG. 58).

  When the main CPU 93 determines the internal winning combination and the main-side navigation, the main CPU 93 generates start command data including these and sends them to the sub-side. When the sub side (sub CPU 102) receives the start command, it registers effect contents from the information included in the start command. In the example shown in FIG. 102, the sub CPU 102 basically determines the push order pattern “7” and “color 2 (yellow)” as an effect of the sub-side navigation, but when an error occurs. Nothing may be determined as a different sub-side navigation or a sub-side navigation. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 102 determines the content of the effect, the sub CPU 102 compares the determined navigation content with the main navigation. Note that the sub CPU 102 may compare at least the push order pattern of the main navigation and the sub navigation, and may or may not compare the internal winning combination and the color pattern of the sub navigation.

  If the result of this comparison is that the main navigation and the determined content of the presentation match, the sub CPU 102 performs sub-side navigation according to the determined content of the production. For example, the sub CPU 102 performs navigation on the sub side by displaying on the liquid crystal display device 11 using yellow characters or images that the correct answer is in the left 1st order.

  On the other hand, as a result of this comparison, if the result of this comparison does not match the determined content of the main navigation, the sub CPU 102 rewrites the determined content of the effect to an effect corresponding to the content of the main navigation. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 rewrites the pressing order pattern of the sub side navigation to “7”. At this time, the sub CPU 102 sets “color 3 (white)” as the color pattern. That is, when the main navigation and the effect contents determined are different, the sub CPU 102 sets a push order pattern matching the main navigation and the color pattern “color 3 (white)”. Then, the sub CPU 102 performs navigation on the sub side according to the rewritten content of the effect. For example, the sub CPU 102 performs navigation on the sub side by displaying on the liquid crystal display device 11 using white characters or images that the correct answer is in the left 1st order.

[Modification]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to this.

[Modification 1: Transition to CZ or ART]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the transition to the CZ or ART gaming state is made by winning the transition lottery performed during the normal gaming state. Here, in the pachislot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, there may be a setting difference with respect to this transition lottery, but this transition lottery may be performed based on “information with no difference in setting value”. Note that “information with no difference in setting values” means that all the setting values in the internal lottery process are determined as internal winning combinations with the same probability (setting unquestioned roles), and all settings when all reels are stopped. It includes at least a combination of symbols that will be displayed with the same probability in value (a combination of symbols with no set difference).

  That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the modified example, when a setting unquestioned combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a transition lottery to CZ or ART gaming state is performed, and a combination with a setting difference (setting differential combination) is used as an internal winning combination If it is determined, the lottery for transition to the CZ or ART gaming state is not performed. Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when combinations of symbols having no setting difference are displayed when all reels are stopped, the transition lottery to the CZ or ART gaming state is performed, and the combination of symbols having the setting difference is When displayed, the lottery for shifting to the CZ or ART gaming state is not performed.

In addition, the shift lottery to the CZ or ART gaming state is performed based on the complete probability which is predetermined and does not change at all. The “predetermined complete probability that does not vary” means a probability that does not vary based on at least the set value (that is, a probability that the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value).
It should be noted that the “previously determined complete probability that does not change at all” may further include that the probability is uniquely defined for “information having no difference in setting value”. In recent pachislot machines, there are cases where it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to win the transition lottery and a state in which it is difficult to win it. In such a case, when a transition lottery is performed with a “probability uniquely determined for information that does not have a difference in setting values”, for example, in any game state at the time of winning a setting unquestioned role It will carry out the transition lottery that wins with the same probability. On the other hand, when a transfer lottery is performed with a “probability that is not uniquely determined for information that does not have a difference in setting values (that is, a probability that fluctuates)”, for example, Transition lottery winning at a probability according to the current gaming state, that is, when the current gaming state is a high probability state, performing a transition lottery winning at a high probability, the current gaming state is a low probability state In the case, it will be a transition lottery that wins with low probability.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the modification, the CZ or ART gaming state is performed by performing the transfer lottery performed based on the "information having no difference in the setting value" with the same probability of winning regardless of the setting value. The degree of expectation regarding the transition to the same can be made the same for each set value, and the difference in the out-of-the-box performance can be suppressed to the winning probability of the set difference with the set difference.

<Example of lottery table used for migration lottery>
Here, FIG. 103 shows an example of a lottery table used for transition lottery to a CZ or ART gaming state. FIG. 103A shows an internal lottery table for determining an internal winning combination.

  As in the example illustrated in FIG. 103A, the internal lottery table defines lottery value information corresponding to each combination. Here, the combination determined by the lottery using the internal lottery table includes a set combination in which the lottery value is different depending on the set value, and a set non-matcher having the same lottery value regardless of the set value. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (A), the winning combinations “F_BB1”, “F_maintenance Lip A”, etc. are set differences with different lottery values depending on the setting values. “, Etc.” are setting unquestioned roles having the same lottery value regardless of the setting value. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the modified example, when the set winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the CZ or the unquestioned setting is determined as the internal winning combination without performing the lottery to shift to the CZ or ART gaming state. Transfer lottery to ART gaming state. Note that not performing transition lottery to the CZ or ART gaming state includes not only performing transition lottery itself, but also performing transition lottery but not necessarily winning. In addition, the lottery for the transition to the CZ or ART gaming state is not necessarily performed when any of the setting unquestioned roles is determined as the internal winning combination. There may be no unquestioned setting.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the lottery for shifting to the CZ or ART gaming state includes (1) an internal lottery for determining an internal winning combination, and (2) whether or not to perform the transition. There are three types of lottery, that is, the migration lottery of (3) and the advantageous section type lottery for determining the transition destination when migrating. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the modification, these three lotterys may be performed using individual random number values, or all the lottery may be performed using a common random number value, and 2 One lottery may be performed using a common random number value, and the remaining one lottery may be performed using individual random number values. Note that the common random number is used when, for example, (1) “F_watermelon” is determined in the random number range of “0 to 128” in the internal lottery, (2) “0 to 64” is transferred to the lottery. Non-winning random number range, “65-128” is the random number range winning the lottery, (3) “65-83” is the random number range where the destination is CZ1, and “83-99” is the destination Is a random number range in which CZ2 is set, “99 to 115” is a random number range in which the transfer destination is a normal ART, and “115 to 128” is a random number range in which the transfer destination is an additional zone 1. In other words, the lottery result of another lottery is assigned to a part of the random number range won in one lottery.

  The present invention can be applied not only to a pachislot machine but also to a pachinko machine. Here, the pachinko machine is played without accepting the player's start and stop operations, etc. In addition to performing fluctuations of the pattern using a mechanical reel, display on the liquid crystal display device It can also be done above. Therefore, when applied to a pachinko machine, symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols, symbol variation means for varying symbols based on the establishment of the start condition, and internally based on the establishment of the start condition Is displayed on the symbol display means when the variation of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means for stopping the variation of the symbol based on the internal lottery means for performing the random lottery, the variation result of the symbol based on the lottery result of the internal lottery means It is only necessary to have game control means for controlling the progress of the game based on the combination of symbols.

[Modification 2: Reel production using medal insertion]
In recent years, in order to prevent the game operation from the insertion of medals to the operation of the stop button as a series of flow tasks and becoming office-like, when the medals are inserted into the gaming machine, the symbol for effect of the sub reel When the start lever is operated and the start operation of the unit game is detected, a gaming machine is proposed that stops the rotation of the effect symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means. There is. However, there is a need to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented gaming properties that allows symbols to be rotated and stopped by operations other than the player's operations to make the winning combination predictable. .

  Therefore, when the medal is stored (credited), the main control circuit 91 specifies that the symbols on at least one of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped by changing a specified amount. You may make it possible to predict the winning combination by controlling the effect and changing the symbol by a specific amount.

  By doing so, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having an unprecedented game characteristic of rotating and stopping symbols and making it possible to predict a winning combination triggered by a storage operation (credit operation) of medals. it can.

<Game lock lottery table>
FIG. 104 is a game lock effect table for lottery of the presence or absence of the lock effect. As shown in FIG. 104, the game lock lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the presence or absence of the lock effect according to the type of the lottery flag A.

<Direction control table when locked>
FIG. 105 shows an effect control table at the time of locking, which is referred to when executing a lock effect. As shown in FIG. 105, the effect control table at the time of locking defines lottery value information for determining the final stop position of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R according to the type of the lottery flag A.

  For example, when the lottery flag A is “3” (watermelon) and the lottery result is the production number “31”, the main control circuit 91 performs a plurality of reels 3L in response to a medal storage (credit) operation. , 3C, 3R, first, a specific effect of stopping by changing the symbol on the left reel 3L by one frame is executed until the watermelon symbol at the symbol position “17” is stopped on the center line. Subsequently, the main control circuit 91 performs a center effect on the center line by changing the symbol on the middle reel 3C by one frame among the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R according to the medal storage (credit) operation. Execute until the watermelon pattern of the symbol position "10" stops at the top. Then, the main control board 71 performs, on the center line, a specific effect of stopping the design by changing the symbol on the right reel 3R by one frame among the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R according to a medal storage (credit) operation. Execute until the watermelon pattern at the symbol position "13" stops.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU)
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 106 and 107 (hereinafter referred to as main flow).

  Compared with the main flow (FIG. 74) described in the present embodiment, in this modification, the game lock lottery process (step S711) is added after the lottery flag conversion process (step S7), and the reel stop initialization process ( The difference is that the game start lock process (step S712) is added after step S10). Further, when the start command generation process (S9) is performed, the start command is different in that the start command includes information on the result of the lottery in the game lock lottery process.

(Game lock lottery processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 108, a game lock lottery process under control of the main CPU 93 will be described.

  In the game lock lottery process, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the game lock lottery table (FIG. 104) and performs a game lock lottery according to the lottery flag A (S731). Whether the lock number is “0” (without the lock effect) or the lock number “1” (with the lock effect) is determined by the process of S 731.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the determined game lock number in the game lock counter (S732). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined value in the lock timer (S733), and ends the game lock lottery process.

  The value set in the lock timer in the process of S733 may be a predetermined constant value such as 10 seconds, 30 seconds, or a plurality of values such as 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, and 60 seconds. It may be a value determined by lottery from the value of.

(Lock processing at game start)
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a game start time lock lottery process under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described.

  In the game start lock lottery process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the lock number set in the game lock counter is “1” (with a lock effect) (S751). When the lock number is “1” (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S752. When the lock number is “0” (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game start lock process.

  If the lock number is “1” (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the effect lottery table at the time of locking (FIG. 105) and determines the symbol position to be stopped according to the effect random number (S752) ). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the left reel effect flag, the middle reel effect flag, and the right reel effect flag on (S753). At this time, a command of the reel effect flag is also generated, and the command also includes information indicating that the left reel effect flag, the middle reel effect flag, and the right reel effect flag are on.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not credit is possible (S754).

  The medals accepted from the medal slot 20 are used for one game with the preset number (for example, three) as the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the preset number is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. be able to. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a so-called credit function. An upper limit (for example, 50) is set in advance for the number of credits that can be deposited inside the pachislot machine 1.

  At S754, the main CPU 93 determines whether the number of sheets deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 is less than a preset upper limit. If credit is possible (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S755 and permits the reception of medals (S755). When the acceptance of medals is permitted, a medal acceptance command is also generated. If the credit is not possible (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S763.

  After the main CPU 93 permits reception of medals (after the process of S755), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether the lock timer has a positive value (S756). When the lock timer is a positive value (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S757, and when the lock timer is not a positive value (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S763.

  In S757, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted. When a medal is inserted (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S758 and adds “1” to the value of the credit number counter (S758). When no medal is inserted (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S756.

  After the main CPU 93 adds “1” to the value of the credit number counter (after the process of S758), the main CPU 93 subsequently executes a reel effect process (S759). The reel effect process is a process for performing an effect with a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R according to the symbol position determined in the process of S752. Details of the reel effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not credit is possible (S760). When credit is possible (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S761. If the credit is not possible (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S763.

  If credit is possible (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not any reel effect flag is off (S761). If any of the reel effect flags is off (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S762, sets the lock timer to “0” (S762), and shifts the process to S763. If any of the reel effect flags is on (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S763.

  In S763, the main CPU 93 clears the lock number and the effect number (S763). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 updates from “medal acceptance permission” to “medal acceptance prohibition” (S764), and the game start lock process is terminated. When the medal acceptance is prohibited, a medal acceptance prohibition command is also generated.

(Reel production process)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 110, the reel effect process by the control of the main CPU 93 will be described.

  In the reel effect process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the left reel effect flag is “ON” (S771). When the left reel effect flag is “ON” (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S772 and moves the left reel 3L by one frame (S772). If the left reel effect flag is not "ON" (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S775.

  After the main CPU 93 moves the left reel 3L by one frame (after the process of S772), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol stop position stopped at the middle stage of the left reel 3L is the symbol position determined in the game start locking process. It is determined whether or not (S773). When the symbol stop position stopped at the middle stage of the left reel 3L is the symbol position determined by the lock process at the start of the game (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S774 and sets the left reel effect flag off (S774). ), And the reel effect processing ends. At that time, a command for the reel effect flag is also generated, and the command includes information that the left reel effect flag is set to off. If the symbol stop position stopped at the middle of the left reel 3L is not the symbol position determined in the game start lock processing (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the reel effect processing.

  If it is determined that the left reel effect flag is not “ON” (NO in S771), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S775 and determines whether or not the middle reel effect flag is “ON” (S775). When the middle reel effect flag is “ON” (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S776 and moves the middle reel 3C by one frame (S776). When the middle reel effect flag is not “ON” (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S779.

  After the main CPU 93 moves the middle reel 3C by one frame (after the process of S776), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol stop position stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel 3C is the symbol position determined by the game start locking process. It is determined (S777). When the symbol stop position stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel 3C is the symbol position determined by the lock process at the start of the game (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S778 and sets the middle reel effect flag off (S778). ), And the reel effect processing ends. At that time, a command for a reel effect flag is also generated, and the command includes information that the middle reel effect flag is set to off. If the symbol stop position stopped at the middle of the middle reel 3C is not the symbol position determined in the game start lock process (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the reel effect process.

  When it is determined that the middle reel effect flag is not “ON” (NO in S775), the main CPU 93 moves the right reel 3R one frame (S779). After the main CPU 93 moves the right reel 3R by one frame (after the process of S779), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol stop position stopped at the middle stage of the right reel 3R is the symbol position determined by the game start locking process. It is determined (S780). When the symbol stop position stopped at the middle stage of the right reel 3R is the symbol position determined by the lock process at the start of the game (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S781 and sets the right reel effect flag off (S781). ), And the reel effect processing ends. At that time, a command for the reel effect flag is also generated, and the command includes information that the right reel effect flag is set to off. When the symbol stop position stopped at the middle stage of the right reel 3R is not the symbol position determined by the game start lock process (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the reel effect process.

<Example of game lock>
Next, with reference to FIG. 111 and FIG. 112, an example of the game lock in the present modification will be described. Specifically, FIG. 111 is an example in the case where a game lock is performed in a unit game where the internal winning combination is watermelon, and reel effects using medal insertion are performed using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Further, FIG. 112 is an example of a case where a game lock is performed in a unit game in which the internal winning combination is a loss, and reel effects using medal insertion are performed using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

(When the internal winning combination is watermelon)
First, FIG. 111 will be described. After determining the watermelon as the internal winning combination in the internal lottery process (S4 in FIG. 106), the main CPU 93 performs the game lock lottery process (S711 in FIG. 106, FIG. 108). In the game lock lottery process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game lock lottery table (FIG. 104) and performs game lock lottery in accordance with the lottery flag A (number "3," watermelon) (S731 in FIG. 108). When the lottery result is determined to be the lock number “1” (with lock effect), the main CPU 93 generates a start command (S9 in FIG. 106). This start command includes information related to the result of lottery in the game lock lottery process. Since sub CPU 102 receives the start command which is a command different from the previous one (YES in S613 in FIG. 100), the game lock lottery is performed in sub RAM 103 in the subsequent processing of the main board communication task (FIG. 100). Information related to the result of lottery in the process is stored (S614 in FIG. 100).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a game start lock process (S712 in FIG. 106, FIG. 109). In the game start lock process, the main CPU 93 refers to the effect lottery table (FIG. 105) at lock and determines the effect number, that is, the symbol position to be stopped according to the lottery flag A (number "3", watermelon). (S752 in FIG. 109). When the production number is “31”, the symbol position for stopping the left reel 3L is “17” (watermelon), the symbol position for stopping the middle reel 3C is “10” (watermelon), and the right reel The symbol position to stop 3R is "13" (watermelon).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 93 sets the left reel effect flag, the middle reel effect flag, and the right reel effect flag to ON (S753 in FIG. 109). If credit is possible (YES in S754 in FIG. 109), Allow medal reception. When the acceptance of medals is permitted, a medal acceptance command is also generated.

  The sub RAM 103 stores information related to the lottery result in the game lock lottery process. In addition, since the sub CPU 102 has received a medal acceptance command, which is a command different from the previous command (YES in S613 in FIG. 100), the sub RAM 103 also stores information that medal credits are possible (FIG. 100). 100 S614). Therefore, the sub CPU 102 registers an effect that prompts medal credit (S615 in FIG. 100). After registering the effect, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 65L and 65R, various LEDs, and the like to execute the registered effect.

  111A shows a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time and a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R inside the display window 4. FIG. On the liquid crystal display device 11, the characters "save medals!" Are displayed as an effect of prompting the credits of the medals. The display window 4 displays a symbol when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped and displayed in the previous unit game. In particular, in the left reel 3L, “replay” (symbol position: 11 in FIG. 9), “bell” (symbol position: 10), and “blue 7” (symbol position: 9) are displayed from the top. In the middle reel 3C, “replay” (symbol position: 2), “cherry” (symbol position: 1), and “blank 1” (symbol position: 0) are displayed from the top. In the right reel 3R, “replay” (symbol position: 1), “blank 3” (symbol position: 0), and “red 7” (symbol position: 19) are displayed from the top.

  Subsequently, while the lock timer is a positive value (while it is determined YES in S756 of FIG. 109), the main CPU 93 every time a medal is inserted (when YES is determined in S757 of FIG. 109). ), Reel effect processing is executed (S759 in FIG. 109), and the left reel 3L is moved frame by frame (S772 in FIG. 110). The process of moving the left reel 3L frame by frame is performed until the symbol stop position stopped at the middle stage of the left reel 3L becomes "17" (watermelon) which is the symbol stop position determined in the game start lock process (FIG. 110). This is performed until YES is determined in S773).

  When the symbol stop position stopped at the middle stage of the left reel 3L becomes “17” (watermelon) which is the symbol stop position determined by the lock process at the start of the game, the main CPU 93 sets the left reel effect flag to OFF (FIG. 110). S774). At that time, a command for the reel effect flag is also generated, and the command includes information that the left reel effect flag is set to off. Since the sub CPU 102 has received a command different from the previous one (YES in S613 in FIG. 100), the sub RAM 103 also stores information that the left reel effect flag is set to OFF (S614 in FIG. 100). Therefore, the sub CPU 102 registers an effect that prompts further credit of medals (S615 in FIG. 100). After registering the effect, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 65L and 65R, various LEDs, and the like to execute the registered effect.

  111B shows a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time and a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R inside the display window 4. FIG. On the liquid crystal display device 11, the characters “save more medals!” Are displayed as an effect of prompting further credits of the medals. The display window 4 displays a symbol when seven medals are credited from the display state in FIG. 111A and the symbol of the left reel 3L has moved seven frames. Specifically, on the left reel 3L, “red 7” (symbol position: 18 in FIG. 9), “watermelon” (symbol position: 17), and “replay” (symbol position: 16) are displayed from the top. Further, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are the same as the display state in FIG.

  Subsequently, while the lock timer is a positive value (while it is determined YES in S756 of FIG. 109), the main CPU 93 every time a medal is inserted (when YES is determined in S757 of FIG. 109). ), Reel effect processing is executed (S759 in FIG. 109), and the middle reel 3C is moved frame by frame (S776 in FIG. 110). The process of moving the middle reel 3C frame by frame is performed until the symbol stop position stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel 3C reaches “10” (watermelon) which is the symbol stop position determined in the game start lock process (FIG. 110). This is done until it is determined YES in S777).

  When the symbol stop position stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel 3C becomes “10” (watermelon) which is the symbol stop position determined by the lock process at the start of the game, the main CPU 93 sets the middle reel effect flag off (FIG. 110). S778). At that time, a command for a reel effect flag is also generated, and the command includes information that the middle reel effect flag is set to off. Since the sub CPU 102 has received a command different from the previous one (YES in S613 in FIG. 100), the sub RAM 103 also stores information that the middle reel effect flag is set to OFF (S614 in FIG. 100). Therefore, the sub CPU 102 registers an effect that prompts further credit of medals (S615 in FIG. 100). After registering the effect, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 65L and 65R, various LEDs, and the like to execute the registered effect.

  111C shows a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time and a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R inside the display window 4. FIG. On the liquid crystal display device 11, as an effect of prompting further credits of medals, characters “Stay more medals!” Are displayed. The display window 4 displays a symbol when nine medals are credited from the display state in FIG. 111B and the symbol of the middle reel 3C has moved nine frames. Specifically, in the middle reel 3C, “cherry” (symbol position: 11 in FIG. 9), “watermelon” (symbol position: 10), and “blue 7” (symbol position: 9) are displayed from the top. Further, the left reel 3L and the right reel 3R are the same as the display state in FIG.

  Subsequently, while the lock timer is a positive value (while it is determined YES in S756 of FIG. 109), the main CPU 93 every time a medal is inserted (when YES is determined in S757 of FIG. 109). ), Reel effect processing is executed (S759 in FIG. 109), and the right reel 3R is moved frame by frame (S779 in FIG. 110). The process of moving the right reel 3R frame by frame is performed until the symbol stop position stopped at the middle stage of the right reel 3R becomes "13" (watermelon) which is the symbol stop position determined by the lock process at the start of the game (FIG. 110). This is performed until YES is determined in S780).

  When the symbol stop position stopped at the middle stage of the right reel 3R becomes “13” (watermelon), which is the symbol stop position determined by the lock process at the start of the game, the main CPU 93 sets the right reel effect flag off (FIG. 110). S781). At that time, a command for the reel effect flag is also generated, and the command includes information that the right reel effect flag is set to off. Since the sub CPU 102 has received a command different from the previous one (YES in S613 in FIG. 100), the sub RAM 103 also stores information that the right reel effect flag is set to OFF (S614 in FIG. 100). Therefore, the sub CPU 102 registers an effect that prompts further credit of medals (S615 in FIG. 100). After registering the effect, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 65L and 65R, various LEDs, and the like to execute the registered effect.

  111D shows a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time and a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R inside the display window 4. FIG. On the liquid crystal display device 11, the word "watermelon" is displayed as an effect that suggests that the internal winning combination is watermelon. In this modification, the characters “watermelon” are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a pattern or color suggesting that the internal winning combination is “watermelon”.

  Then, on the display window 4, 13 medals are credited from the display state in (C) of FIG. 111, and the symbol when the symbol of the right reel 3R is moved by 13 frames is displayed. Specifically, on the right reel 3R, “BAR” (symbol position: 14 in FIG. 9), “watermelon” (symbol position: 13), and “bell” (symbol position: 12) are displayed from the top. The symbol combination “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is displayed on the center line connecting the symbol stop positions in the middle of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. From this symbol combination, the internal winning combination is expected to be watermelon.

(When the internal winning combination is lost)
Next, FIG. 112 will be described. The main CPU 93 determines the lost game as an internal winning combination in the internal lottery process (S4 in FIG. 106), and then performs a game lock lottery process (S711 in FIG. 106, FIG. 108). In the game lock lottery process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game lock lottery table (FIG. 104) and performs game lock lottery in accordance with the lottery flag A (number "0", missing) (S731 in FIG. 108). When the lottery result is determined to be the lock number “1” (with lock effect), the main CPU 93 generates a start command (S9 in FIG. 106). This start command includes information related to the result of lottery in the game lock lottery process. Since sub CPU 102 receives the start command which is a command different from the previous one (YES in S613 in FIG. 100), the game lock lottery is performed in sub RAM 103 in the subsequent processing of the main board communication task (FIG. 100). Information related to the result of lottery in the process is stored (S614 in FIG. 100).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a game start lock process (S712 in FIG. 106, FIG. 109). In the game start lock process, the main CPU 93 refers to the effect lottery table (FIG. 105) at lock and determines the effect number, that is, the symbol position to be stopped according to the lottery flag A (number "0", off). (S752 in FIG. 109). When the production number is “03”, the symbol position for stopping the left reel 3L is “17” (watermelon), the symbol position for stopping the middle reel 3C is “10” (watermelon), and the right reel The symbol position for stopping 3R is "12" (bell).

  Thereafter, the effects using the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C are as described with reference to FIG. That is, (A) to (C) in FIG. 112 are the same as (A) to (C) in FIG.

  After the effects (A) to (C) in FIG. 112 are performed, the main CPU 93 inserts medals while the lock timer is a positive value (while it is determined YES in S756 in FIG. 109). Every time (every time YES is determined in S757 in FIG. 109), the reel effect processing is executed (S759 in FIG. 109), and the right reel 3R is moved one frame at a time (S779 in FIG. 110). The process of moving the right reel 3R one frame at a time until the symbol stop position stopped at the middle of the right reel 3R becomes “12” (bell) which is the symbol stop position determined by the lock processing at the game start (FIG. 110 This is performed until YES is determined in S780).

  When the symbol stop position stopped at the middle stage of the right reel 3R becomes “12” (bell), which is the symbol stop position determined by the lock process at the start of the game, the main CPU 93 sets the right reel effect flag off (FIG. 110). S781). At that time, a command for the reel effect flag is also generated, and the command includes information that the right reel effect flag is set to off. Since the sub CPU 102 has received a command different from the previous one (YES in S613 in FIG. 100), the sub RAM 103 also stores information that the right reel effect flag is set to OFF (S614 in FIG. 100). Therefore, the sub CPU 102 registers an effect that prompts further credit of medals (S615 in FIG. 100). After registering the effect, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 65L and 65R, various LEDs, and the like to execute the registered effect.

  112D shows a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time and a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R inside the display window 4. FIG. On the liquid crystal display device 11, the character "Sorry" is displayed as an effect indicating that the internal winning combination is a loss.

  Then, on the display window 4, 12 medals are credited from the display state in (C) of FIG. 112, and the symbol when the symbol of the right reel 3R is moved by 12 frames is displayed. Specifically, on the right reel 3R, “watermelon” (symbol position: 13 in FIG. 9), “bell” (symbol position: 12), and “replay” (symbol position: 11) are displayed from the top. A symbol combination of “watermelon-watermelon-bell” is displayed on the center line connecting the symbol stop positions in the middle of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. Also from this symbol combination, the internal winning combination is expected to be lost.

  According to this modification, the main CPU 93 that controls the production using the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R, among the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R, when medals are stored (credits) in the credit number counter. The design on at least one of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is controlled by a specific amount (in this modified example, each frame is not limited to this), but is stopped by changing the specific amount. The result of the presence / absence of the privilege grant determined by the main CPU 93 is suggested by the symbols made. In addition, in this modification, the result of the internal winning combination is illustrated as an example of the result of the presence / absence of a bonus, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any content may be used as long as it corresponds to the presence or absence.

  This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented gaming properties that allows the symbol to be rotated and stopped and the internal winning combination to be predicted in response to the medal storage operation.

  In the present modification, the production triggered by the medal storage operation is performed while the game start lock process is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of whether the game is locked or not, if the start lever 23 is operated and the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are operated, the medal storage operation is triggered in any period. You may make it possible to perform the effect.

  In this modification, the main CPU 93 has been described as capable of executing the process of moving the mechanical reels 3L, 3C, 3R in response to the detection of the insertion of a medal, but the present invention is not limited to this. In response to the main CPU 93 detecting the insertion of a medal, the main CPU 93 generates a command indicating that the medal has been inserted, and the sub CPU 102 displays the command on the liquid crystal display device 11 in response to the reception of the command. The sub CPU 102 may execute the process of moving the liquid crystal reel (not shown).

In the present modification, at a trigger of the storage operation of medals, effects are performed to cause the symbols on at least one of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R to fluctuate by a specific amount (one frame each in this modification), and to change the specific amount Although the suggested symbol suggests the result of the presence or absence of the privilege given by the main CPU 93, the present invention is not limited thereto.
For example, a period from when the start lever 23 is operated to when the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are operated is a period in which medals can be stored, and in this period, each time a medals storage operation is performed. The effect according to the determination result of the presence or absence of the privilege may be made executable. For example, the effect of informing the storage operation of the first medal whether the internal winning combination is lost or not, the storage operation of the second medal is notified of whether the internal winning combination is replay or not Effects, an operation to notify whether the internal winning combination is a bell, an operation to store the third medal, an notification to indicate whether the internal winning combination is a cherry, an operation to notify whether the internal winning combination is a bell Production, production that reports whether the internal winning combination is the watermelon, ..., the storage operation of the fifth medal, ... whether the internal winning combination is the bonus, the storage operation of the Nth medal It is set as the effect which alert | reports. Then, if the internal winning combination is a bonus, when the first medal storing operation is performed, a negative denial effect is executed to deny that the internal winning combination is lost, and the second medal storing operation is performed. Replay negative effect which denies that internal winning combination is replay is executed, and ... bonus decision effect notifying that internal winning combination is bonus at the time of storage operation of ... Nth medal May be executed. Alternatively, if the internal winning combination is a replay, when the first medal storing operation is performed, a negative denial effect of denying that the internal winning combination is lost is executed, and the second medal storing operation is performed. At the time, a replay determination effect may be performed to notify that the internal winning combination is a replay. In this case, even if the storage operation of the third and subsequent medals is performed, the effect of informing the internal winning combination is not performed.

  An upper limit (for example, 50) is provided for the number of medals that can be stored. The production contents when the upper limit is reached are not particularly limited. For example, the production is not executed even if a further storage operation is performed. And the like.

[Modification 3: A function to turn off the sound of a favorite character even if it becomes a predetermined trigger]
In recent years, in a gaming machine capable of notifying of the presence or absence of provision of a benefit, music sound output means for causing a sound output means to output music sound composed of vocal sound and accompaniment sound which is sung voice, and notification by notification means It has been proposed that a game within a predetermined period of time enabling speech sound output means to output a speech sound, which is a sound containing the character's speech, from the sound output means. In this gaming machine, the sound output control means outputs the sound signal of vocal sound, accompaniment sound and line sound to the sound output means via separate channels when the output of the music sound and the output of the line sound are performed simultaneously. In addition, the volume of the vocal sound is set smaller than the volume when the output of the music sound and the output of the dialogue sound are not performed simultaneously.

  In this gaming machine, for example, since the volume of the navigation voice sound output from the upper left speaker and the upper right speaker is set to be lower than the predetermined volume, the volume of the navigation voice sound is set to the predetermined volume In comparison, music sounds are easier to hear. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the production by sound and enhance the interest of the game.

  However, in the above gaming machine, when the effect on the gaming machine is switched to the next effect based on a predetermined trigger such as a so-called medal bet operation, start lever operation, or third stop operation, the line sound of the character is Despite being in the middle of a dialogue, it may be forcibly terminated.

  As for vocal sounds and music sounds, the meaning of sound effects and BGM for displaying images is large and it takes a relatively long time, so there is no way to force it to end in the middle of vocal sounds or music sounds. There is also. On the other hand, the line sound of the character is relatively short, and if it is forcibly terminated despite being in the middle of the line, the line sound is cut off in the middle of the line to the player. It gives the impression that it has Therefore, further improvement is required for the speech sound of the character when switching the effect of the gaming machine to the next effect based on a predetermined opportunity.

  Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 terminates the effect different from the effect of at least one target character selected from a plurality of types of characters and the effect of displaying the image of the target character when a predetermined trigger occurs. On the other hand, the operation of the device group related to the effect may be controlled so that at least the effect of outputting the voice of the target character is continuously executed even when the predetermined trigger occurs.

  By doing so, the voice of the character preferred by the player becomes a predetermined opportunity, and even if the effect on the gaming machine is switched to the next effect, it is output to the end without ending halfway. Be heard. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of gaming is further enhanced.

<Sound data transmission channel>
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a sound data transmission channel provided in the sub RAM 103. As shown in FIG.

  The sound data transmission channel has a function of temporarily registering sound data determined by the sub CPU 102, and includes a sound data transmission channel A110 and a sound data transmission channel B120. Each sound data transmission channel is provided with a different transmission channel depending on the type of character, sound effect, and BGM.

  In this modification, when the sub CPU 102 registers a new effect, the sound data and other effect data (image data, lamp effect data, etc.) necessary for the new effect are set. At the start of the game, when the sub CPU 102 registers a new effect, sound data necessary for the new effect are set in the sound data transmission channel A 110 in different transmission channels depending on the types of character, sound effect, and BGM. Subsequently, when the sub CPU 102 registers a new effect, this time, the sound data necessary for the new effect is set in the sound data transmission channel B120 in a different transmission channel depending on the type of character, sound effect, and BGM.

  Then, the sub CPU 102 produces an effect to end the effect different from the effect of the at least one target character selected from the plurality of types of characters used in the effect and the effect of displaying the image of the target character. (Speaker group 65L, 65R, LED group 85, liquid crystal display device 11) is controlled. In particular, the sub CPU 102 sets the volume value for the sound data transmission channel, the sound effect data transmission channel, and the BGM data transmission channel of a character different from the target character among the sound data registered in the sound data transmission channel A110 to “ The speaker groups 65L and 65R are controlled to be updated to “0”. On the other hand, the sub CPU 102 controls the speaker groups 65L and 65R so as to maintain the volume value as it is for the sound data transmission channel of the target character. The sub CPU 102 can output sound from the speaker group 65L, 65R by setting the volume value to a predetermined value for any sound data transmission channel for sound data newly registered in the sound data transmission channel B120. Control.

  Thereafter, each time the sub CPU 102 registers a new effect, the sound data is alternately set in the order of the sound data transmission channel A110 and the sound data transmission channel B120.

  By doing so, in the present modification, the voice of the character preferred by the player becomes a predetermined trigger, and ends in the middle even if the effect on the gaming machine is switched to the next effect. It is possible to output sound to the end.

Providing an Opportunity to De-Attend the Voice of a Favorite Character Using Uni-Memo
In recent years, a service that links the mobile phone and the dedicated site on the Internet to each other and provides the player with the game content (game history) from the start of the game to a certain point by the dedicated site ") Is known. Using this service, for example, the sub CPU 102 creates a game record QR code when an intermediate progress acquisition operation is performed, a recording end operation is performed, and the like, and the player uses a mobile phone to play a game By reading the recorded QR code and inputting the read information to a dedicated site on the Internet, it becomes possible to manage the game history of the player at the dedicated site. And, when a predetermined game history, for example, a player has played 10,000 unit games in total, it is possible to mute the sound of a favorite character from the data management server that manages the dedicated site Even if it is the case that the effect on the gaming machine is switched to the next effect for the first time by transmitting the special pass third for playing and the player entering the special password into the pachislot machine 1 at the start of the game. , And may make it possible to un-mute the voice of a favorite character. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the appeal of making a predetermined game history such that the total number of unit games is 10,000.

  FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram of the game information providing system S in the present modification. The game information providing system S includes the pachislot machine 1, a mobile communication terminal 400 with a camera possessed by the player (hereinafter referred to as “mobile terminal”), and a data management server 500 for managing game information. In FIG. 114, for convenience of explanation, one mobile terminal 400 is shown, but a plurality of mobile terminals 400 can access the data management server 500 at the same time.

  The portable terminal 400 and the data management server 500 can send and receive data to and from each other using, for example, TCP / IP as a communication protocol via the network NW. The network NW is constructed by, for example, the Internet, a dedicated communication line (for example, a CATV (Community Antenna Television) line), a mobile communication network (including a base station), a gateway, and the like. The pachislot machine 1 is not connected to the network NW.

  The portable terminal 400 and the data management server 500 are each provided with a control unit, a storage unit, a display unit, a communication unit, and the like, although not particularly illustrated.

  The sub CPU 102 of the pachislot machine 1 records the game content after the player starts the game in the game data area or the like of the sub RAM 103, and the game information indicates the game content during the game or at the end of the game. When trying to acquire the game information, the game information is provided to the player by the QR code (registered trademark) 330 of the two-dimensional code.

  When the sub CPU 102 of the pachislot machine 1 performs a game information providing service, the game of the player recorded in the game data area 103 of the sub RAM 103 or the like so that the player's portable terminal 400 can access the data management server 500. The information is converted into a QR code (registered trademark) 330 and the QR code (registered trademark) 330 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Specifically, i) when a player starts a game, ii) when a player tries to acquire game information in the middle of a game, iii) when a player tries to acquire game information at the end of the game Sometimes, a QR code (registered trademark) 330 is displayed.

  Instead of or in addition to the QR code (registered trademark) 330, a barcode obtained by converting the player's game information may be displayed.

  I) Information regarding the domain of the data management server 500, log-in number information indicating the number of log-in since power-on, and the own game machine and other game machines are identified in the transmission information when the player starts the game Game machine identification information and the like.

  In addition, the above transmission information when ii) the player tries to acquire game information in the middle of the game, or iii) the player tries to acquire game information at the end of the game includes the information. In addition, i) game information indicating the game content recorded after the player started the game is included.

  The control unit of the portable terminal 400 reads the QR code (registered trademark) 330 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 with a camera, and accesses the data management server 500 according to information such as the domain included in the QR code (registered trademark) 330. In the case of i) above, the log-in number information, gaming machine identification information, etc. included in the QR code (registered trademark) 330 are transmitted as start-up transmission data, and in the case of ii) or iii) The login number information, gaming machine identification information, gaming information, and the like included in the QR code (registered trademark) 330 are transmitted as output transmission data.

  When there is an access at the time of i), the control unit of the data management server 500 stores the login count information, the gaming machine identification information, and the like included in the received start transmission data in the storage unit.

  When there is an access at the time of ii) and iii), the control unit of the gaming information management server 500 includes the log-in number information and the gaming machine identification information included in the received output transmission data, and the above i) It is determined whether the login count information and the gaming machine identification information stored sometimes match, and if they match, the login count information, gaming machine identification information, gaming information, etc. included in the output transmission data are not shown. It accumulates in game information DB (database).

  In addition, the control unit of the game information management server 500 generates display data (for example, a web page) that allows the mobile terminal 400 to display the content indicated by the received game information and the like. Send back. Based on the received display data, the control unit of the portable terminal 400 causes the display unit to display an image indicating game content and the like. The player can confirm the game content and the like from the displayed image.

<Description of operation of sub control circuit>
Next, contents of various processing executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Uni-memo management task)
FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a uni-memo management task performed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

  First, the sub CPU 102 sets a cycle of 10 ms as time management of the OS (S811). When the period of 10 ms elapses, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the operation performed by the player is a menu activation operation (S812). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation is a menu activation operation, the sub CPU 102 issues a unimemo menu display request which will be described later with reference to FIG. 116 (S813), waits for a period of 10 ms (S827), and then the player performs It moves to a determination process of whether the operation is a menu start operation (S812).

  In S812, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation performed by the player is not a menu activation operation, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the operation performed by the player is a recording start operation (S814).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation performed by the player is a recording start operation, the sub CPU 102 initializes the recording area for unimemo (S815). For example, the sub CPU 102 initializes the game data area of the sub RAM 103.

  Subsequent to S815, the sub CPU 102 creates a game record start QR code (registered trademark) (S816), and then makes a game record start request (S817). At this time, the game record start QR code (registered trademark) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the player reads it with the camera of the portable terminal 400. Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 waits for a period of 10 ms (S817), and then proceeds to a determination process as to whether or not the operation performed by the player is a menu activation operation (S812).

  In S814, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation performed by the player is not the recording start operation, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the operation performed by the player is a progress acquisition operation (S818).

  In S818, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation performed by the player is the progress acquisition operation, for example, the player selects the “progress acquisition” item by the selection button 24 and presses the determination button 25. If so, password input processing is executed (S819).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the password input process has been canceled (S820). If it is determined that the password input process has been canceled, the sub CPU 102 waits for a period of 10 ms (S827), and then the player It moves to a determination process of whether or not the operation performed by the menu is the menu activation operation (S812).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in S822 that the password input process has not been canceled, it creates a game record QR code (registered trademark) (S821). This QR code (registered trademark) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and when the player reads it with the camera of the portable terminal 400, game information on the progress is recorded in the player-specific area of the storage unit of the data management server 500. Ru.

  In S818, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation performed by the player is not an intermediate progress acquisition operation, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the operation performed by the player is a recording end operation (S822).

  In S822, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation performed by the player is not the recording end operation, after waiting for a cycle of 10 ms (S827), the operation performed by the player is the menu activation operation or not (S812).

  In S822, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation performed by the player is a recording end operation, the sub CPU 102 executes a password input process (S823). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the password input process has been canceled (S824). When it is determined that the password input process has been canceled, the sub CPU 102 waits for a period of 10 ms (S827), and then the player It moves to a determination process of whether or not the operation performed by the menu is the menu activation operation (S812).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in step S824 that the password input process has not been canceled, it creates a game record QR code (registered trademark) (step S825). This QR code (registered trademark) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and when the player reads it with the camera of the portable terminal 400, it is in the area unique to the player of the storage section of the data management server 500 Game information is recorded.

  Subsequent to step S825, the sub CPU 102 issues a game record end request (S826), waits for a 10 ms period (S827), and then proceeds to a determination process as to whether or not the operation performed by the player is a menu activation operation. (S812).

(Uni memo menu display request processing)
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the uni-memo menu display request process executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a character selection operation has been performed within a predetermined time (S 831).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in S831 that there has been a character selection operation within a predetermined time, it sets character selection information (S832). In S831, if the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no character selection operation within a predetermined time, the sub CPU 102 proceeds to a process of registering information according to the operation content (S836).

  In S832, when the sub CPU 102 executes a process of setting character selection information (S 832), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not a special password input operation has been performed within a predetermined time (S 833).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in step S833 that the special password has been input within the predetermined time, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special password is correct (S834). In S834, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the special password is correct, the sub CPU 102 sets the special effect flag to ON (S835), and registers information according to the operation content (S836). If the sub CPU 102 determines in S834 that the special password is not correct, the sub CPU 102 repeats the processing in S834.

  In S833, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the special password input operation has not been performed within the predetermined time, the sub CPU 102 proceeds to a process of registering information according to the operation content (S836).

  In step S836, when the sub CPU 102 executes a process of registering information according to the operation content, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an end request operation for displaying the unimemo menu is performed (S837).

  If it is determined in S837 that there is an operation to request termination of the uni memo menu display, the sub CPU 102 ends the uni memo menu display request processing, and waits for a cycle of 10 ms in the uni memo management task (FIG. 115). After that (S827 in FIG. 115), the process proceeds to a determination process as to whether or not the operation performed by the player is a menu activation operation (S812 in FIG. 115).

  If it is determined in S837 that the uni-memo menu display end request operation has not been made, the sub CPU 102 returns to the process (S831) of determining whether or not the character selection operation has been performed within a predetermined time.

(Main board communication task)
FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task in the third modification.

  Compared with the main board communication task (FIG. 100) described in the present embodiment, in the third modification, processing for effect registration according to game information (step S615), and navigation error insurance processing (step S616) It differs in that processing is added in between.

  In S615, when the sub CPU 102 registers effects according to the game information, the sub CPU 102 determines whether a new effect is registered (S851). If it is determined in S851 that a new effect has been registered, the sub CPU 102 sets the effect update flag on (S852), and proceeds to the navigation error insurance process (S616). If it is determined in S851 that a new effect has not been registered, the sub CPU 102 shifts to a navigation error insurance process (S616).

(Periodical interrupt processing)
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing a periodic interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101. This interrupt processing is performed every 2 ms.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect update flag is on (S871). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect update flag is on, it performs sound data set processing which will be described later with reference to FIG. 119 (S 872), and performs processing for setting other effect data (S 873) Then, the periodic interrupt process is terminated. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect update flag is not on (is off), the periodic interrupt process is terminated.

(Sound data set processing)
119 and 120 are flowcharts showing sound data set processing executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the channel A use flag is on (S891). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the channel A use flag is ON, the sub CPU 102 sets the sound data to be output in the next effect to a predetermined channel of the sound data transmission channel B (S892), and designates the volume of the channel B ( S893).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the channel A use flag is not on (is off), the sub CPU 102 sets sound data to be output in the next presentation to a predetermined channel of the sound data transmission channel A (S899) The volume of channel A is specified (S900).

  After the sub CPU 102 specifies the volume of the channel B (S893), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the special effect flag is on (S894). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the special performance flag is on, the sub CPU 102 designates a phrase number for muting the volume of the sound data transmission channel A other than the channel for transmitting the sound of the selected character ( In step S895, the channel A use flag is turned off (S897).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the special effect flag is not ON (OFF), the sub CPU 102 designates a phrase number for muting the sound volume for all the channels constituting the sound data transmission channel A (S896). The use flag is turned off (S897).

  After the sub CPU 102 turns off the channel A use flag (S897), the sub CPU 102 turns on the channel B use flag (S898). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the sound data set process, and moves the process to S873 in FIG.

  On the other hand, after the sub CPU 102 specifies the volume of the channel A (S900), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the special effect flag is on (S901). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the special effect flag is on, the sub CPU 102 designates a phrase number for muting the volume of the sound data transmission channel B other than the channel for transmitting the sound of the selected character ( S902) The channel B use flag is turned off (S904).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the special effect flag is not on (is off), the sub CPU 102 designates a phrase number for muting the volume for all the channels constituting the sound data transmission channel B (S903). The use flag is turned off (S904).

  After the sub CPU 102 turns off the channel B use flag (S904), the sub CPU 102 turns on the channel A use flag (S905). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the sound data set process, and moves the process to S873 in FIG.

  According to this modification, after the uni-memo menu is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, a character selection operation is performed during a predetermined time (S831 and S832 in FIG. 116), and the special password is correct within the predetermined time. When input (S833, S834 in FIG. 116), the special effect flag is set on (S835 in FIG. 116). Then, when a new effect is registered (S851 in FIG. 117), the effect update flag is set on (S852 in FIG. 117), and the sound data set process is executed (S872 in FIG. 118). In the sound data set process, the sub CPU 102 silences the sound that is different from the sound of the target character related to the selection operation (S895 in FIG. 119, S902 in FIG. 120). On the other hand, for at least the effect of outputting the voice of the target character, the sub CPU 102 continues to output the sound without muting even if a new effect is registered (S895 in FIG. 119, S902 in FIG. 120). .

  As a result, for the voice of the character that the player likes, even if the effect on the pachislot machine 1 is switched to the next effect by registering a new effect, Sound is emitted. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachislot machine 1 in which the interest of the game is further enhanced.

  In addition, in the present modification, when a new effect is registered, if the sound of all characters can be output, various sounds (characters) in the next effect that start when the new effect is registered It is possible that the voice is not identifiable, and the voice cannot be identified. According to the pachi-slot machine 1 described in the present modification, since the voice for executing the presentation following a new presentation is registered to the voice of the character of the character selected by the player, various kinds of voices are generated. It is possible to prevent a situation in which each voice cannot be identified due to confusion.

  If voices of all characters are allowed to be output according to a predetermined opportunity, various sounds (not only voices of characters but all sounds including vocal sounds and music sounds) in the next effect starting with the opportunity can be output. ), And the voice may not be identified. According to such a gaming machine, since the voice that continues to perform the production is narrowed down to the voice of the favorite character selected by the player even when a predetermined opportunity occurs, various voices are confused with each voice. It is possible to prevent the situation that can not be identified.

[Modification 4: Effect of presentation by medal input]
Until now, a gaming machine has been proposed that can grasp that the player has shifted to the ART state by repeatedly hitting the player's own bet button. However, no gaming machine has been proposed in which a so-called continuous hit effect can be executed not only by a physical button operation but also by another operation, leading to an advantageous state for the player.

  Therefore, when the main control circuit 91 detects a medal storage signal while executing a predetermined effect, the sub control circuit 101 responds to the detected storage signal to produce a notification effect regarding provision of a benefit on the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like. You may enable it to control. By doing so, so-called continuous hit effects can be performed not only by physical button operations but also by other forms of operation such as medal storage operation (credit operation), which leads to an advantageous state for the player In this respect, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new gameability that has never been seen before.

<Direction group lottery table>
FIG. 121 shows an effect group lottery table for extracting effect groups. As shown in FIG. 121, the effect group lottery table defines lottery value information for selecting an effect group number in accordance with the presence / absence of ART winning.

<Battle production lottery table>
FIG. 122 shows a battle effect lottery table for lottery effect numbers in battle effect. The battle effect lottery table is referred to when the result of the lottery with reference to the effect group lottery table shown in FIG. 121 is the effect group number “1” (battle effect).

  The battle effect lottery table defines lottery value information for selecting an effect number in accordance with the presence or absence of ART winning. If you win ART, you will be more likely to perform a battle victory (rendering numbers “1” and “3”) than if you won't win ART (if you do not win ART, ART It is easier to produce an effect of defeating the battle than in the case of winning (production numbers “2” and “4”).

  In addition, when a rendition of a chance to hit is performed (rendering number “3”, “4”), the winning for ART is better than when a rendition of a chance to hit is not performed (reproduction number “1”, “2”) There is a high possibility. Then, when the effect of winning the battle is performed after the continuous hitting chance, the player wins the ART with a probability of 100/101 (the effect number "3"). In addition, if the effect of defeating the battle is performed after the continuous hitting chance, the player does not win the ART with a probability of 5/6 (rendering number "4"). Therefore, it can be said that the rendition of the chance to hit is not only the rendition that raises the expectation for winning the ART, but also the rendition to the credibility to the presence or absence of the ART winning for the result of the battle.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, a specific aspect of the medal reception / start check process (S3) in the main flow (FIG. 74) in the present embodiment will be described.

(Medal reception / start check process)
In the medal acceptance / start check process, the main CPU 93 first determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S1011). When a replay role is won in the previous unit game, medals are automatically inserted in the current unit game. That is, the determination process in step S1011 is equivalent to determining whether or not a replay is won in the previous unit game.

  When it is determined in step S1011 that there is an automatic insertion request, the main CPU 93 executes automatic insertion processing for automatically inserting the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game (step S1012). Specifically, the main CPU 93 copies the automatic insertion counter to the insertion number counter and clears the automatic insertion counter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S1013). The medal insertion command data includes information such as the number of inserted medals. After the process of step S1013, the main CPU 31 moves the process to step S1015.

  When determining in step S1011 that there is no automatic insertion request, the main CPU 93 executes medal acceptance permission (step S1014). Specifically, the main CPU 93 drives a solenoid of a selector (not shown) to prompt passage of medals in the selector.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum number of inserted cards according to the gaming state (step S1015). In the present modification, the main CPU 93 is described as setting the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets to “3” in all gaming states, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is a medal acceptance permission (step S1016). When the determination is YES, the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the process of step S1017. When the determination is NO, the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the process of step S1021.

  In step S1017, the main CPU 31 executes medal insertion check processing to check the number of inserted medals. In the medal insertion check process, the main CPU 93 updates the value of the insertion number counter according to the checked number of medals.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S1018). The medal insertion command data includes information such as the number of inserted medals.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not either medal insertion or credit is possible (step S1019). When the main CPU 31 determines that neither medal insertion nor credit is possible based on the result of detection by a medal sensor (not shown) or data representing the number of credits stored in the main RAM 95 (NO), Is prohibited (step S1020), the process proceeds to step S1021.

  After executing the processing of step S1020, if it is determined in step S1016 that there is no medal acceptance permission, or if it is determined that either medal insertion or credit is possible in step S1019 (YES), the main CPU 93 is inserted It is determined whether or not the number of medals is the number that can start the game (three in this modification) (step S1021).

  If it is determined in step S1021 that the number of inserted medals is not the number that can start the game (NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to step S1016.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of inserted medals is the number that can start the game (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the start switch 79 is on (step S1022).

  When determining in step S1022 that the start switch 79 is not on, the main CPU 93 returns the process to step S1016. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start switch 79 is on, the main CPU 93 prohibits medal acceptance (step S1023). Specifically, the solenoid of the selector (not shown) is not driven, and the discharge of the medal inserted into the insertion slot from the medal payout opening 32 is urged. After executing the process of step S1023, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

<Description of operation of sub control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127, the contents of various processing executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using a program will be described.

(Main board communication task)
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task in the fourth modification.

  Compared with the main board communication task (FIG. 100) described in the present embodiment, in the fourth modification, the processing mode when receiving a start command, receiving a reel stop command, and receiving a medal insertion command is specifically described. It differs in the point currently demonstrated (S1031-S1037).

(Process when receiving start command)
FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing start command reception processing executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state is a normal gaming state or a chance zone (S1051). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the chance zone, the process proceeds to S1052. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state or the chance zone, the process proceeds to S1057.

  In S1052, the sub CPU 102 refers to the effect group lottery table (FIG. 121), and determines the effect group number according to the result of ART lottery.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the effect group number is “1” (S1053). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect group number is “1”, it moves the process to S1054. On the other hand, when determining that the effect group number is not “1”, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1057.

  In S1054, the sub CPU 102 refers to the battle effect lottery table (FIG. 122), and determines the effect group number according to the result of ART lottery.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the effect number is “3” or “4” (S1055). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect number is “3” or “4”, the sub CPU 102 sets the consecutive hit effect flag to ON (S1056), and moves the process to S1058. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect number is not “3” or “4”, it moves the process to S1058.

  In S1057, the sub CPU 102 determines an effect number according to the gaming state and the effect group.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 registers the production data at the start according to the decided production number. (S1058). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes other processing upon reception of the start command (S1059), and ends the processing upon reception of the start command.

(Reel stop command reception processing)
FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing a reel stop command reception process executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is “0” (S1071). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the stop button non-operating counter is “0”, the process proceeds to S1072. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the stop button non-operation counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S <b> 1074.

  In S1072, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the continuous hit effect flag is on. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the continuous hit effect flag is on, it starts measurement of the continuous hit timer (S1073), and shifts the processing to S1074. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the continuous hit effect flag is not on (off), the process proceeds to S <b> 1074.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 registers the stop effect data according to the effect number and the type of the operation stop button (S1074), and ends the reel stop command reception process.

(Process when receiving medal insertion command)
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a medal insertion command reception process executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the continuous hit effect flag is on (S1091). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the continuous hitting effect flag is on, the process proceeds to S1092. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the continuous hit effect flag is not on (is off), the process proceeds to S1099.

  In step S1092, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the measurement time of the continuous impact effect timer is less than 20 seconds. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the measurement time of the continuous hit effect timer is less than 20 seconds, the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the continuous hit count counter (S1073), and moves the process to S1094. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the measurement time of the continuous hit presentation timer is not less than 20 seconds (is not less than 20 seconds), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1096.

  In step S1094, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the counter of repeated hits is “30”. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the number-of-times-of-shots counter is “30”, the sub-CPU 102 registers effect data of a continuous hit effect according to the effect number (S1095), and moves the process to S1097. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the repeated hit counter is not “30”, the process proceeds to S1100.

  In step S1096, the sub CPU 102 registers effect data indicating failure of consecutive hits, and the process proceeds to step S1097.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 clears the continuous hitting timer and the continuous hitting effect counter (S1097), sets the repeated hitting effect flag to off (S1098), and moves the process to S1100.

  In S1099, the sub CPU 102 registers effect data at medal insertion according to the type of effect number, and shifts the processing to S1100.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes another process at the time of receiving the medal insertion command (S1100), and ends the medal insertion command reception process.

  According to the pachislot machine 1 described in the present modification, when a medal sensor (not shown) detects a medal credit operation during execution of a battle effect, and the sub CPU 102 receives a medal insertion command, the sub CPU 102 In response to the input command, it controls the effect of notification regarding the provision of ART in the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like. Therefore, not only physical button operations but also other operations such as medal credit operations enable so-called continuous hit effects to be performed, leading to a state advantageous to the player, It is possible to provide a pachislot machine 1 having no new game characteristics.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 described in the present modification, the sub CPU 102 detects the credit operation of the medal during execution of the battle effect, and the number of times the sub CPU 102 receives the medal insertion command. Accordingly, the notification effect relating to the provision of ART in the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like is controlled. Therefore, not only physical button operation but also continuous operation in other forms such as continuous credit operation (storage operation) of medals enables so-called continuous hit production to be performed, which is advantageous for the player In connection, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with newer gaming characteristics.

  In this modification, the period during which medals can be inserted is from the third stop to the start operation, but is not limited thereto. For example, other timing may be used, such as during rotation of the reel.

  An upper limit (for example, 50) is provided for the number of medals that can be stored. The production contents when the upper limit is reached are not particularly limited. For example, the production is not executed even if a further storage operation is performed. And the like.

  Further, in the present modification, the storage operation of one medal is described as equivalent to the effect of one hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a storage operation for one medal may correspond to an effect of two or more hits, and a storage operation of two or more medals corresponds to an effect of one hit. It is good also as things.

[Modification 5: New relief function]
Until now, a gaming machine having a relief function for forcibly shifting to an advantageous state when the advantageous state is not performed for a long period of time is known. However, the device related to the relief function so far is relief by shifting the game state from the normal state to the advantageous state when the normal state that is not the advantageous state continues for a long time. Therefore, it is required to provide a new remedy means and to provide a variation in the treatment for preventing the player from receiving a great disadvantage.

  Therefore, a new relief means may be provided, and variations may be given to the relief function for preventing the player from receiving a large disadvantage.

<Game flow during normal gaming state>

  FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the flow of games during the normal game state in the present modification. In contrast to the flow of gaming in the normal gaming state in the present embodiment (FIG. 23), in the present embodiment, regarding the ART lottery, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the lottery flag A and wins the ART lottery. In this case, in the present variation, the ART gaming state is the first normal ART, and the second normal ART, while the gaming state is shifted to the ART gaming state after that (via the precursor). In the case of winning an ART lottery, the game state is first shifted from the normal game state to the first normal ART, and then a cherry (a weak cherry, a strong cherry, or a confirmed cherry) is won. The game state is different from the first normal ART to the second normal ART.

  FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the flow of the game during the ART gaming state in the present modification.

  The first normal ART is configured to include a notification pattern A of 1000 games and a notification pattern B of 100 games. The notification pattern A is a section in which notification of stop operation information can hardly be performed, and is a section in which a privilege is hardly given to the player. The notification pattern B is a section in which notification of stop operation information can be performed, and is a section where a privilege is given to the player.

  When the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first normal ART, the main control board 71 executes 1000 games for the section of the notification pattern A, and then executes 100 games for the section of the notification pattern B.

  Here, even when the section of the notification pattern A is being executed, if the player wins a cherry (a weak cherry, a strong cherry, or a confirmed cherry), the gaming state shifts from the first normal ART to the second normal ART. Be done. The second normal ART is configured to include a notification pattern A of 32 games and a notification pattern B of 100 games. When the gaming state shifts from the first normal ART to the second normal ART, the section of the notification pattern A of the main control board 71 is changed to 32 games. Then, when 32 sections of the notification pattern A are executed, 100 sections of the section of the notification pattern B are subsequently executed.

  In this modification, when the internal winning combination is a cherry, the first normal ART is shifted to the second normal ART without performing lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. When some lottery is performed and the lottery is won, the first normal ART may be shifted to the second normal ART.

  Alternatively, the probability of winning the transition from the first normal ART to the second normal ART may be changed depending on the type of cherry. For example, when the internally won cherry is a strong cherry, it is easier to win the transition from the first normal ART to the second normal ART than when the internally won cherry is a weak cherry. May be easier to win the transition from the first normal ART to the second normal ART than when the internally won cherry is a strong cherry.

(Number selection table for ART lottery according to the modification)
FIG. 130 is an ART lottery number determination table according to a modification. The table shown in FIG. 130 is referred to when the current gaming state is the normal gaming state.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, in this embodiment, different ART lottery numbers are defined according to the type of the lottery flag A and the set value (FIG. 26). However, in this modification, the same ART lottery number "10" is defined regardless of the type of the lottery flag A or the set value.

(ART lottery table according to a variation)
FIG. 131 is an ART lottery table according to a modification. The table shown in FIG. 131 is referred to when the ART lottery number is “10”.

  In the ART lottery table, information of lottery values regarding the lottery result of ART lottery is defined. In the present modification, a lottery value “1” is assigned to ART non-winning, and a lottery value “255” is assigned to ART winning.

  According to the table group shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the normal gaming state, ART lottery is performed regardless of the type of the lottery flag A, and it can be said that ART is won at a ratio of 255/256.

(Stop information notification flag lottery table)
FIG. 132 is a stop information notification flag lottery table.

  The stop information notification flag lottery table defines lottery value information for determining the state of the stop information notification flag (turned on or off) from the type of the notification pattern. When the notification pattern is A, the rate at which the stop information notification flag is determined to be "on" is 10/256. On the other hand, when the notification pattern is A, the ratio at which the stop information notification flag is determined to be “on” is 256/256.

  Although detailed description of the processing flow is omitted, if the stop information notification flag is on, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (in the case of the present embodiment, the gaming state is the RT2 gaming state) The notification of the information on the stop operation can be performed. On the other hand, when the stop information notification flag is off, notification of the stop operation information even if the predetermined condition is satisfied (in the case of this embodiment, even if the gaming state is the RT2 gaming state) Is infeasible.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, the operation of the main control circuit 91 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Process at the start of processing according to the modified example)
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a start-time normal process (FIG. 77 in this embodiment) executed by the CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART lottery number determination table (FIG. 130) according to the modification, and determines the ART lottery number from the lottery flag A (S1111). In this modification, regardless of the type of the lottery flag A, the ART lottery number “10” is determined.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART lottery table (FIG. 131) according to the modification and performs ART lottery based on the ART lottery number (S1112). In this modification, the rate of winning the ART is 255/256, and the rate of not winning is 1/256.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART has been won (S1113). When winning the ART, the main CPU 93 sets “first normal ART” as the next game (S1114), sets the notification pattern A remaining number counter to “1000” (S1115), and starts normal processing Finish.

  On the other hand, when the ART is not won, the main CPU 93 ends the normal processing at the start.

(Processing during ART at start according to modification)
FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing a process during start-time ART (FIG. 83 in this embodiment) executed by the CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the stop information notification flag lottery table (FIG. 131) and extracts the state of the stop information notification flag based on the notification pattern (S1131). In this process, when the value of the notification pattern A remaining number counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 93 executes lottery as the notification pattern is the notification pattern A. On the other hand, when the value of the notification pattern B remaining number counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 93 executes lottery as the notification pattern is the notification pattern B.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the lottery of the stop information notification flag is won (S1132). When winning, the main CPU 93 sets the stop information notification flag to ON (S1133), and moves the process to S1135. When not winning, the main CPU 93 sets the stop information notification flag to OFF (S1134), and moves the process to S1135.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the first normal ART (S1135). When the gaming state is the first normal ART (YES), the main CPU 93 executes a first normal ART update process, which will be described later, and terminates the start-time ART process. If the gaming state is not the first normal ART (NO), the main CPU 93 executes a second normal ART update process to be described later, and ends the start-time ART process.

(First normal ART update process)
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a first normal ART update process executed by the CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the notification pattern A remaining number counter is larger than 0 (1 or more) (S1151). When the notification pattern A remaining number counter is larger than 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S1152. When the notification pattern A remaining number counter is 0 or less (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S1159.

  In S1152, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the notification pattern A remaining number counter. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the notification pattern A remaining number counter is larger than 32 (S1153). If the notification pattern A remaining number counter is larger than 32 (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S1154. If the notification pattern A remaining number counter is 32 or less (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S1157.

  In S1154, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the cherry is won. The cherries here include any of weak cherries, strong cherries and determined cherries, but are not limited thereto, and may be specific cherries. Alternatively, instead of cherry, another role with a relatively low frequency of winning may be used. When the cherry is won (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S1155. If the cherry has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S1157.

  In S1155, the main CPU 93 sets “second normal ART” for the next game. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 updates the notification pattern A remaining number counter to “32” (S1156), and moves the process to S1157.

  At S1157, the main CPU 93 determines whether the notification pattern A remaining number counter is 0 or not. When the notification pattern A remaining number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the notification pattern B remaining number counter to “100” (S1158), and ends the first normal ART update process. When the notification pattern A remaining number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the first normal ART update process.

  In S <b> 1159, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the notification pattern B remaining number counter. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the notification pattern B remaining number counter is 0 (S1160). When the notification pattern B remaining number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 sets “normal game state” for the next game (S1161), and ends the first normal ART update process. When the notification pattern B remaining number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the first normal ART update process.

(Second normal ART update process)
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing a second normal ART update process executed by the CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the notification pattern A remaining number counter is greater than 0 (1 or more) (S1171). If the notification pattern A remaining number counter is larger than 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S1172. If the notification pattern A remaining number counter is 0 or less (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S1175.

  In S1172, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the notification pattern A remaining number counter. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether the notification pattern A remaining number counter is 0 or not (S1173). When the notification pattern A remaining number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the notification pattern B remaining number counter to “100” (S1174), and ends the second normal ART update process. When the notification pattern A remaining number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the second normal ART update process.

  In S1175, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the notification pattern B remaining number counter. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether the notification pattern B remaining number counter is 0 or not (S1176). When the notification pattern B remaining number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the “normal game state” for the next game (S1177), and ends the second normal ART update process. When the notification pattern B remaining number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the second normal ART update process.

  According to the gaming machine described in the present modification, in the normal gaming state (non-ART), the main CPU 93 determines the type of internal winning combination (lottery flag A) for each unit game in the normal gaming state (non-ART). Regardless, it is determined whether to shift from the normal gaming state (non-ART) to the first normal ART. Thereby, the transition from the normal gaming state (non-ART) to the first normal ART can be executed with a relatively small number of unit games.

  Then, in the first normal ART, when the internal winning combination (flag A for lottery) is a cherry (one of weak cherry, strong cherry, and determined cherry), the main CPU 93 executes the first normal ART to the second normal ART. To shift to normal ART. Since the main CPU 93 makes the determination when the internal winning combination (flag A for lottery) is cherries, it is relatively rare that the main CPU 93 decides to shift from the first normal ART to the second normal ART. It is. Then, when the first normal ART is shifted to the second normal ART, the number of notification patterns A decreases from 1000 times to 32 times less, and if the unit pattern of notification pattern A is played 32 times, notification The unit game of the notification pattern B having a larger privilege than the pattern A can be executed. Thereby, when it is determined to shift to the second normal ART in the first normal ART, the number of games of the notification pattern A may be reduced to execute the unit game of the notification pattern B having a larger privilege. It will be possible.

  On the other hand, it is relatively rare for the main CPU 93 to decide to shift from the first normal ART to the second normal ART, and therefore, it is the first until the number of unit games of the notification pattern A reaches 1000 times. It may not be determined to move from one normal ART to the second normal ART. Even at such times, if the number of unit games of the notification pattern A reaches 1000, then the unit game of the notification pattern B having a larger bonus than the unit game of the notification pattern A is executed . Thereby, when the unit game of the notification pattern B is not executed for a long time, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if it is a relief function for forcibly executing the unit game having a privilege.

[Modification 6: Link of medal input and effect]
In recent years, in order to prevent the game operation from the insertion of medals to the operation of the stop button as a series of flow tasks and becoming office-like, when the medals are inserted into the gaming machine, the symbol for effect of the sub reel When the start lever is operated and the start operation of the unit game is detected, a gaming machine is proposed that stops the rotation of the effect symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means. There is.

  According to this configuration, in the sub reel, the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means is notified at the timing when the gaming operation is conventionally performed without any effect being performed. As a result, it is possible to notify the winning combination with impact, and the player can enjoy the performance on the sub reel with an unprecedented interest.

  However, there is no effect during the period from the insertion of the medal to the operation of the start lever, and even during such a period, some effect relating to the game is executed, and the unprecedented gameplay It is required to provide a gaming machine that is possessed.

  Therefore, even during the period from the insertion of the medal to the operation of the start lever, some effects relating to the game may be executable.

<Medal holding effect lottery table>
FIG. 137 shows a medal reserve effect lottery table. In this table, lottery value information for determining the mode of the medal displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in accordance with the credit operation (storage operation) of the medal is defined.

  When the production number “0” is determined, the content of the production is “out of place”, and no medal symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 even if a medal credit operation is performed.

  When the effect number "1" is determined, the effect content is "blue medal withholding effect", and the liquid crystal display device 11 executes an effect indicating that the medal is withheld in response to the credit operation of the medal. . At that time, the medal is glowing blue.

  When the effect number "2" is determined, the effect content is "yellow medal withholding effect", and the liquid crystal display device 11 executes an effect indicating that the medal is held according to the credit operation of the medal. . At that time, the medal is shining yellow.

  When the effect number “3” is determined, the effect content is “red medal hold effect”, and an effect indicating that the medal is held is executed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in accordance with the medal credit operation. . At that time, the medal is glowing red.

  According to the medal holding effect lottery table, the effect number “1” is determined at a ratio of 50/256, the effect number “2” is determined at a ratio of 20/256, and the effect number “3” is 10/256. It is determined by the ratio. Therefore, while "blue medal holding effect" is a relatively frequent effect, "yellow medal holding effect" and "red medal holding effect" are compared to the frequency at which "blue medal holding effect" is made, It can be positioned as a rare effect.

<Medal holding effect information storage area>
FIG. 138 shows a medal holding effect information storage area. This storage area is an area in which information on the lottery result determined with reference to the medal holding effect lottery table (FIG. 137) is stored, and is provided in a part of the sub RAM 103.

  The medal suspension effect information storage area includes the first area to the fourth area.

  The first area is an area where information is first stored when no information is stored in any of the first area to the fourth area. The first area corresponds to a medal holding effect for the most recent first game.

  The second area is an area in which information is subsequently stored when information is stored in the first area but no information is stored in any of the second to fourth areas. The second area corresponds to a medal holding effect for the latest second game.

  The third area is an area where information is subsequently stored when information is stored in the first area and the second area, but information is not stored in the third area and the fourth area. The third area corresponds to the medal hold effect of the latest third game.

  The fourth area is an area where information is subsequently stored when information is stored in the first area to the third area but information is not stored in the fourth area. The fourth area corresponds to the medal holding effect of the latest fourth game.

  When the unit game of the most recent first game is completed, information stored in the second area to the fourth area is transferred from the first area to the third area, respectively. Then, the information stored in the fourth area is cleared. Thereby, it is possible to continue storing information relating to the mode of medals displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in accordance with the medal insertion operation.

<Character lottery table>
FIG. 139 shows a character lottery table. In this table, information of the lottery value for determining whether or not the character effect is to be executed according to the information stored in the first area of the medal holding effect information storage area (the contents of the medal holding effect) It is stored.

  When the information stored in the first area (contents of the medal hold effect) is “blue medal hold effect”, the probability that the character effect is performed is 1/256. For this reason, the “blue medal holding effect” corresponds to an effect in which a sense of expectation for performing the character effect is hardly obtained.

  When the information stored in the first area (contents of the medal holding effect) is “yellow medal holding effect”, the probability that the character effect is performed is 56/256. Therefore, "yellow medal holding effect" corresponds to an effect that can have a little sense of expectation for the character effect to be performed.

  When the information stored in the first area (contents of the medal holding effect) is “red medal holding effect”, the probability that the character effect is performed is 156/256. For this reason, the “red medal holding effect” corresponds to an effect capable of having a strong sense of expectation that the character effect will be performed.

  It is preferable that the character to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 by the character effect is the same as the character used in the notification that suggests that a benefit such as a bonus is obtained by some other effect. By doing so, in spite of the fact that the medal holding effect in the present modification is not linked to the lottery flag such as the internal winning combination, the player is notified that the red medal holding effect is given by the medal holding effect. And, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if it is a chance, although it is not actually a chance that the character production is executed following the “red medal holding effect”. .

<Description of operation of sub control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142, the contents of various processing executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using a program will be described.

(Main board communication task)
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task in the sixth modification.

  Compared to the main board communication task (FIG. 100) described in the present embodiment, the present modification 6 specifically describes the processing mode when receiving a medal insertion command and when receiving a start command. Different (S1211 to S1214).

(Process when receiving medal insertion command)
FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating a medal insertion command reception process executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the operation is a medal credit operation (storage operation) (S1231). If the sub CPU 102 determines that it is a credit operation (retention operation) of medals, it shifts the process to S1232. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation is not the medal credit operation (storage operation), that is, it is the medal insertion operation for performing the latest unit game, the process proceeds to S1235.

  In S1232, the sub CPU 102 refers to the medal holding effect lottery table (FIG. 137), and determines the content of the medal holding effect.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the determined production number is any one of “1” to “3” (S1233). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the determined effect number is one of “1” to “3”, the process proceeds to S1234. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determined production number is not any of “1” to “3” (“0”), the process proceeds to S1235.

  In S1234, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data in a predetermined area of the medal holding effect information storage area (FIG. 138).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes another process when the medal insertion command is received (S1235), and ends the medal insertion command reception process.

(Process when receiving start command)
FIG. 142 is a flowchart of a start command reception process executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the first area of the medal holding effect information storage area is "with holding effect" (S1251). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines that the data stored in the first area of the medal holding effect information storage area is any of "blue medal holding effect", "yellow medal holding effect", and "red medal holding effect". It is determined whether or not there is. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the first area is “with hold effect”, the process proceeds to S1252. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the first area is not “with hold effect”, the process proceeds to S1255.

  In S1252, the sub CPU 102 refers to the character lottery table (FIG. 139) and determines the presence / absence of the character effect according to the content of the reserved medal effect. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 registers effect data according to the determination result (S1253).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates information in the medal suspension effect information storage area (FIG. 138) (S1254). In this process, the sub CPU 102 transfers information stored in the second area to the fourth area from the first area to the third area, respectively. Then, the sub CPU 102 clears the information stored in the fourth area. Thereby, it is possible to continue storing information relating to the mode of medals displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in accordance with the medal insertion operation.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes another process when a start command is received (S1255), and ends the process when a start command is received.

<An example of medal holding effect>
Next, with reference to FIG. 143, an example of the medal suspension effect in the present modification will be described.

  When the player performs a medal credit operation (storage operation), the sub CPU 102 refers to the medal hold effect lottery table (FIG. 137) in the medal insertion command reception process (FIG. 141) and displays the content of the medal hold effect. Determine (S1232). If the result is the effect number “1” (blue medal holding effect), the sub CPU 102 sets “blue” as medal holding effect data for the first game in the first area of the medal holding effect information storage area (FIG. 138). The information on the medal holding effect is registered (S1234). Then, when the sub CPU 102 registers the effect, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 65L and 65R, various LEDs, and the like to execute the registered effect.

  Then, by repeatedly performing the credit operation (storage operation) of the medal, the sub CPU 102 at a certain timing makes the “blue medal hold effect” as the medal hold effect data of the second game in the second area of the storage area. Information is registered, and information of "red medal hold effect" is registered in the third area of the storage area as medal hold effect data of the third game. Similarly, when the sub CPU 102 registers an effect, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 65L and 65R, various LEDs, and the like to execute the registered effect.

  FIG. 143 (A) shows a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time. The liquid crystal display device 11 displays the words "Reserve medals and hold them!", Which indicates that medals can be held. Then, under the character, from left to right, a pattern in which the blue glowing medal is held as the nearest first game, a pattern in which the blue glowing medal as the nearest second game is held, A symbol in which a red shining medal is held as the latest third game is displayed. The symbol as the nearest fourth game is blank.

  Subsequently, when the player operates the start lever 23 and the start switch 79 detects this, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S4 in FIG. 74) or an extra zone lottery in the special chance zone (S151 in FIG. 81). ) Etc. Then, the main CPU 93 transmits a start command to the sub CPU 102. The start command includes information on internal lottery processing.

  Then, when receiving the start command, the sub CPU 102 executes a start command reception process (FIG. 142). In the start command reception process (FIG. 142), the sub CPU 102 executes a process (S1252) for determining the presence / absence of a character effect with reference to the character lottery table (FIG. 139).

  For example, since the content of the reserved medal effect for the most recent first game is “blue medal hold effect”, the sub CPU 102 refers to the character lottery table (FIG. 139) and the content of the medal hold effect is “blue medal hold”. The lottery corresponding to the “effect” is executed, and as a result, the character effect “none” is determined.

  FIG. 143 (B) shows a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time. In the liquid crystal display device 11, no particular effect is made. For this reason, the “blue medal holding effect” corresponds to an effect in which a sense of expectation for performing the character effect is hardly obtained.

  Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 transfers the information stored in the second area to the fourth area of the medal suspension effect information storage area (FIG. 138) to the first area to the third area, respectively. Then, the sub CPU 102 clears the information stored in the fourth area (S1254 in FIG. 142).

  In the subsequent unit game, by repeating the medal credit operation (storage operation), the sub CPU 102 sets the “blue medal holding effect” in the third area of the storage area (FIG. 138) at a certain timing. "Yellow medal holding effect" is set in the fourth area. Then, after the sub CPU 102 executes processing (S1252) for determining the presence or absence of the character effect, etc., the sub CPU 102 stores the information stored in the second area to the fourth area of the medal holding effect information storage area (FIG. 138). And respectively transfer from the first area to the third area. Then, the sub CPU 102 clears the information stored in the fourth area (S1254 in FIG. 142).

  In the subsequent unit game, by repeating the medal credit operation (storage operation), the sub CPU 102 sets “blue medal hold effect” in the fourth area of the storage area (FIG. 138) at a certain timing. .

  FIG. 143C is a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time. On the liquid crystal display device 11, characters “medal hold status” are displayed. Below the letters, in order from the left, as the first game, the medals are shined in red, the second game as the last, the medals are shined in blue, and the last three games are A symbol in which the medal shines in yellow and a symbol in which the medal shines in blue as the latest third game are displayed.

  Since the content of the reserved medal effect for the most recent first game is “red medal hold effect”, the sub CPU 102 refers to the character lottery table (FIG. 139) and the content of the medal hold effect is “red medal hold”. The lottery corresponding to the effect is performed, and as a result, it is determined that the character effect is "present".

  FIG. 143D is a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time. The liquid crystal display device 11 displays a state in which a firework is launched in the sky and the character makes a V sign. For this reason, the “red medal holding effect” corresponds to an effect capable of having a strong sense of expectation that the character effect will be performed.

  According to the pachi-slot machine 1 described in the present modification, the sub CPU 102 generates a plurality of types of medal images imitating medals (blue medal image, yellow medal image, red medal image) according to the credit operation of the medal. The medal image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is determined. Then, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11 to display a medal image of a color according to the result of the determination of the medal image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the credit operation of the medal is detected. An effect following the effect of displaying the medal image is controlled according to the color of the image.

  Until now, even if the credit operation (storage operation) of the medal has been performed, a sound indicating that the medal has been credited (stored) is emitted or the number of credited medals is displayed by numbers I stayed at. According to the pachislot machine 1 described in the present modification, the medal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 regardless of the detection of the operation of the start lever 23 in response to the medal sensor detecting the credit operation of the medal. An effect of displaying a medal image is executed. Then, following the effect of displaying the medal image, an effect corresponding to the color of the medal displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is executed.

  From the player's point of view, even after the medals are credited and the start lever 23 is operated, the medals are not limited to being stored in a predetermined storage area triggered by the credits of the medals. The liquid crystal display device 11 can also be given an impression as if medals are stored. Then, at the stage of storage of medals, since lottery such as determination of a so-called internal winning combination is not performed, although notification of the lottery result can not be performed, following to the effect of displaying the image of medals, Depending on the color of the medal displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 by executing the effect according to the result of the determination of the presence or absence, a chance element that the effect by the specific character can be easily obtained Is granted.

  As a result, according to the pachislot machine 1 described in the present modification, effects relating to the game are executed even between the start of the insertion of the medal and the operation of the start lever 23, and the game characteristic unlike before is achieved. Can provide a gaming machine having

[Modification 7: Production Function by Standby Time]
So far, the lottery of winning combination is mainly triggered by the detection of the start operation by the start switch. In addition, it has also been proposed to provide means for selecting one lottery timing from a plurality of lottery timings set in advance and means for determining an internal state by lottery performed at the selected lottery timing. For example, the control means of the gaming machine performs random number extraction (a) when the wait timer reaches 4.1 seconds, (b) when a medal is inserted, (c) the start lever is valid, and Perform three times when the start lever is operated. Then, the control means selects at which timing the extracted random number is to be used, and determines the internal winning combination using the selected random number.

  By providing a plurality of lottery timings, the timing of performing lottery (determination of a random number value) for determining the internal state becomes unclear, and it is difficult for the player to aim and acquire a random number to be a hit. Become. However, it still cannot be said that the diversity of performances related to games, such as notification of internal winning combinations, has been increased.

  So, in this modification, the game which made the presentation about the decision result of the privilege provision including the notification of an internal winning combination even more various by linking the timing which determines whether a privilege is given and the production about a game. The purpose is to provide a machine.

<Game lock time lottery table>
FIG. 144 shows a game lock time lottery table. This table is provided for each gaming state.

  FIG. 144 is a table used when the gaming state is a normal gaming state or a chance zone. In this table, information of a lottery value for determining the game lock time according to the lottery flag B is defined.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the gaming state is normal ART, and also when the gaming state is the additional zone, the game lock time lottery table is individually provided individually. In these tables, information of lottery values for determining the game lock time according to the lottery flag C is defined.

  In this modification, the game lock time lottery table is configured to be able to determine the game lock time based on the combination (flag for lottery), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the combination (flag for lottery) is The game lock time may be determined randomly without being based. In this case, the lottery value may be weighted for each game lock time, or the lottery value may be set equally without weighting.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU)
First, the procedure of main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 145 and 146 (hereinafter referred to as main flow).

  Compared with the main flow (FIG. 74) described in the present embodiment, in this modification, (1) medal processing and start check processing (S3) are followed by weight processing (S1311) and locking processing at game start (S1312). The reel rotation start process (S11) is executed after the (2) game start lock process (S1312), and (3) the information display process (S1313) is added after the start command generation process (S9), 4) The difference is that the next game game lock time lottery process (S1314) is added after the end state control process (S17).

(Wait processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 147, a wait process by the control of the main CPU 93 will be described.

  In the wait process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the previous unit game (S1331). In this process, when the main CPU 93 determines that 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the previous unit game, the main CPU 93 ends the wait process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that 4.1 seconds have not elapsed from the previous unit game, the processing of S1331 is repeated.

(Lock processing at game start)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 148, a game start time lock process under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described.

  In the game start lock process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the set time of the lock timer has elapsed (S1351). In this process, when the main CPU 93 determines that the set time of the lock timer has elapsed, the main CPU 93 ends the game start lock process. On the other hand, when determining that the set time of the lock timer has not elapsed, the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S1351.

(Information display process)
Next, information display processing under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the information display process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is a normal gaming state or a chance zone (S1371). In this process, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the chance zone, the process proceeds to S1372. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state or the chance zone, the information display process ends.

  In S1372, the main CPU 93 sets a value according to the lottery flag B as the information display data to be displayed on the information display 14, and ends the information display process.

  In S 1373, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the normal ART. In this processing, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is normal ART, the processing is shifted to S1374. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the normal ART, it ends the information display process.

  In S1374, the main CPU 93 sets a value according to the lottery flag C as the information display data to be displayed on the information display 14, and ends the information display process.

  In S1375, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is an extra zone. In this processing, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the additional zone, the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S1376. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the additional zone, the information display processing ends.

  In S1376, the main CPU 93 sets a value corresponding to the lottery flag C as the information display data to be displayed on the information display 14, and ends the information display process.

(Next game game lock time lottery process)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 150, the next game game lock time lottery process will be described.

  In the next game game lock time lottery process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether the game state is the normal game state or the chance zone (S1391). In this process, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the chance zone, the process proceeds to S 1392. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state or the chance zone, the process proceeds to S1397.

  In S1392, the main CPU 93 refers to the gaming lock time lottery table (FIG. 144) for the normal gaming state / chance zone, determines the game lock time according to the lottery flag B, and shifts the processing to S1397.

  In S1393, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the normal ART. In this processing, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is normal ART, the processing is shifted to S1394. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the normal ART, the processing is shifted to S1395.

  In S1394, the main CPU 93 refers to the normal ART game lock time lottery table (not shown), determines the game lock time according to the lottery flag C, and shifts the processing to S1397.

  In S1395, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is an extra zone. In this process, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the added zone, the process proceeds to S1396. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the additional zone, it shifts the process to S1397.

  In S1396, the main CPU 93 refers to an extra zone game lock time lottery table (not shown), determines the game lock time according to the lottery flag C, and moves the process to S1397.

  In S1397, the main CPU 93 sets the lock timer to the game lock time determined in any one of S1392, S1394, and S1396, and ends the next game game lock time lottery process.

  According to the pachislot machine 1 described in the present modification, the main CPU 93 further performs weight processing (S1311 in FIG. 145) and lock processing at the game start (S1312 in FIG. 145) differently from when the start lever 23 is operated. ) And the reel rotation start process (S11 in FIG. 145), the internal lottery process (S4 in FIG. 145) is executed.

  When the timing at which the start lever 23 is operated is a timing before the predetermined time is reached from the timing at which the symbol variation display in the symbol display area 4 is started in the unit game before one unit game, The internal lottery process by the CPU 93 has not been executed yet. Therefore, the internal lottery result cannot be notified on the information display 14. On the other hand, when it is the timing after the timing when the start lever 23 is operated reaches the predetermined time, the internal lottery processing by the main CPU 93 is executed. Therefore, the main CPU 93 can execute notification of the internal lottery result in the information display unit 14 (S1373, S1375, S1377 in FIG. 149).

  For the player, the internal lottery result determined at substantially the same timing as the operation of the start lever 23 by standing by without operating the start lever 23 until the predetermined time elapses. The user operates the start lever 23 between the pattern for immediately receiving the notification and the time until the predetermined time elapses, and after waiting for the predetermined time to elapse after the start lever 23 is operated, the internal lottery result By the operation of the main control circuit 91, it is possible to receive the game characteristics of two patterns with the pattern of receiving the notification in a pseudo manner.

  According to such a pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to determine at the player's discretion whether to wait without operating the start lever 23 or not to wait until the predetermined time elapses. A pattern for immediately receiving notification of the result of the determination by the privilege giving determining means, and a pattern for receiving notification of the result of the determination by the privilege giving determining means after waiting for a predetermined time to elapse after the start operation is performed Can be changed. Therefore, by associating the timing at which the main CPU 93 executes the internal lottery processing with the timing at which the effects relating to the game are executed, the effects relating to the game including the notification of the internal lottery result are further diversified by the operation of the main control circuit 91 It is possible to provide a gaming machine that

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 described in the present modification, the main CPU 93 determines the game lock time, and the predetermined time can be lengthened (FIG. 144). Therefore, although I thought that I was on standby until the above predetermined time has passed, I am not actually waiting, and I can not immediately receive notification of the internal lottery result, or the above predetermined time has passed. Although I could not wait and thought that the predetermined time did not actually pass, it actually waited until the predetermined time passed, and it was decided almost at the same time as operating the start lever 23 It may be possible to immediately receive notification of the internal winning combination. Therefore, more diversity can be added to the game.

  In addition, for the effects different from the notification of the internal lottery result in the information display 14, it is possible to provide a relatively long-time effect or a relatively short-time effect. become.

[Modification 8: Additional batting order change]
Up to now, various ideas have been made for the manner of reporting the number of added games. However, at present, it is difficult to frequently notify the number of unit games far apart from the number actually determined as the number of additional games as the number of additional games for notification, and it is still improved for notification of the number of additional games. There is room for

  For example, a unit game number larger than the actual top game number can be reported as the top game number for notification, and as the game progresses, the difference between the actual top game number and the top game number for notification is lowered. A gaming machine that can be suppressed may be provided.

<Number determination table for additional lottery in this modification>
FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example of an additional lottery number determination table in the present modification. This table corresponds to a modification of the extra lottery number determination table shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery flag C is “2” (pushing order bell), the additional lottery number is determined to be “0” (see the upper lottery number determination table in FIG. 37). In this case, in the case of a lottery that normally refers to the ART in-superposition zone lottery table (FIG. 38), it is “not won”. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the lottery flag C is “2” (push order bell), the number of ART games is not added.

  On the other hand, in this modification, when the lottery flag C is “2” (push order bell), the additional lottery number is determined as “7” (see FIG. 151). In this case, in the lottery which normally refers to the ART in-superimposed zone lottery table (FIG. 38), it may be successful to add the number of ART games.

  In the case where the lottery flag C is “2” (push order bell), this modification differs from the present embodiment in that there is a possibility of winning the game number addition of the ART.

<Number determination table for lottery of number of added games during ART in this modification>
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of the number determination table for number-of-addition game numbers lottery during ART in the present modification. This table corresponds to a modification of the extra lottery number determination table shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery flag C is “2” (pushing order bell), the additional lottery number is determined to be “0” (see the upper lottery number determination table in FIG. 37). In this case, in the lottery in which the number-of-addition-game-number-for-lottery determination table (FIG. 40) is referred to in ART, it is “0 G”. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the lottery flag C is “2” (push order bell), the number of ART games is not added.

  On the other hand, in this modification, when the lottery flag C is “2” (push order bell), the additional lottery number is determined as “7” (see FIG. 152). In this case, in the lottery where the number-of-addition-game-number-to-lottery determination table (FIG. 40) is referred to, the ART period may be won for 20 games, 30 games, 50 games or 100 games.

  In the case where the lottery flag C is “2” (push order bell), this modification differs from the present embodiment in that there is a possibility of winning the game number addition of the ART.

<Additional game number notification determination table in this modification>
FIG. 153 is a notification table for determining the number-of-superimposed-games in this modification. This table is referred to when the gaming state is the additional zone, the lottery flag C is “2” (push order bell), and the number of additional games is 30 or more.

  In this modified example, when the gaming state is the extra zone, the lottery flag C is “2” (push order bell), and the extra game number is 30 or more, the sub CPU 103 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to The left region 11L, the middle region 11C, and the right region 11R are displayed (see the upper diagram in FIG. 156). The numbers displayed in the left region 11L, the middle region 11C, and the right region 11R correspond to three-digit values that suggest the number of additional games. The left area 11L corresponds to the hundredth place of the number of added games, the middle area 11C corresponds to the tenth place of the number of added games, and the right area 11R corresponds to the first place of the number of added games.

  As shown in (1) of FIG. 153, as an initial display, “0” is displayed in the left area 11L, “3” is displayed in the middle area 11C, and “1” is displayed in the right area 11R. The This suggests that the added game number is 30 games.

  Here, the sub CPU 103 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display another region 11D in addition to the left region 11L, the middle region 11C, and the right region 11R (see the upper diagram in FIG. 156). The numbers displayed in the separate area 11D correspond to the numbers for replacing any of the numbers displayed in the left area 11L, the middle area 11C, and the right area 11R.

  In the table of (2) of FIG. 153, information for determining the replacement mode of the numbers displayed in the separate area 11D according to the specific mode of the push order bell is defined.

  In this modification, “1” is displayed in the separate area 11D as the initial display. If the internal winning combination is "F_push order bell 1_1st" or "F_push order bell 1_1st", that is, if the push order that the first stop operation is the left stop button 19L is correct, it is displayed in another area 11D. The number “1” replaces the number “0” in the left region 11L. In this case, the numbers in the left region 11L, the middle region 11C, and the right region 11R are changed from “0”, “3”, and “0” to “1”, “3”, and “0”, respectively. This corresponds to an effect indicating that the number of added games has increased from 30 games to 130 games.

  If the internal winning combination is “F_push order bell 2_1st” or “F_push order bell 2_1st”, that is, if the push order that the first stop operation is the middle stop button 19C is correct, it is displayed in another area 11D. The number “1” replaces the number “3” in the middle region 11c. In this case, the numbers in the left region 11L, the middle region 11C, and the right region 11R are replaced with “0”, “1”, and “0” from “0”, “3”, and “0”, respectively. This corresponds to an effect indicating that the number of added games has decreased from 30 games to 10 games.

  If the internal winning combination is "F_push order bell 3_1st" or "F_push order bell 3_1st", that is, if the push order that the first stop operation is the right stop button 19R is correct, it is displayed in another area 11D. The number “1” replaces the number “0” in the right region 11R. In this case, the numbers in the left region 11L, the middle region 11C, and the right region 11R are changed from “0”, “3”, and “0” to “0”, “3”, and “1”, respectively. This corresponds to an effect indicating that the number of added games has increased from 30 games to 31 games.

<Relationship between initial display and expected number of additional games>
FIG. 154 is a diagram showing the relationship between the initial display and the expected value of the number of added games.

  In this modified example, when any of the pushing orders is determined as the internal winning combination following the determination of the period of the number of added games, the first stop operation among the plurality of areas 11L, 11C, 11R The numbers displayed in the display areas 11L, 11C, 11R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided corresponding to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R for stopping the combination of predetermined symbols in another area 11D It replaces with the predetermined | prescribed number displayed by.

  For example, the areas 11L, 11C, 11R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided corresponding to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R for stopping the combination of predetermined symbols on the effective line in the first stop operation If the area 11L, 11C, 11R displays a number corresponding to a digit larger than the number of digits of the initial value of the notification addition period, it corresponds to a digit greater than the number of digits of the initial value of the notification addition period. The numbers may be replaced with numbers larger than the numbers originally displayed. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that the overtaking period may be greatly extended in response to the decision that the jackpot is decided as the internal winning combination, and in fact, in the areas 11L, 11C, 11R By changing the notification mode, it is possible to receive the impression that the extra period has been greatly extended, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, it is preferable to prevent the number of top games for notification from becoming significantly larger than the actual number of top games.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram showing a relationship between an initial display for preventing the number of additional games for notification from becoming significantly larger than the actual number of additional games and the expected value of the number of additional games.

  As an example, a case where the number of added games is 30 or more as shown in FIG. 153 will be described. In this case, as the initial display, “0”, “3”, and “0” are displayed in the left region 11L, the middle region 11C, and the right region 11R, respectively.

  When the number displayed in the separate area 11D is “1” and the number in the left area 11L is replaced, the display mode of the added game number is changed from “030” to “130”. Similarly, when the number in the middle area 11C is replaced, the display mode of the number of added games changes from "030" to "010", and when the number in the right area 11R is replaced, the display mode of the number of added games is " It changes from "030" to "031".

  In this case, the expected value of the change amount (increase / decrease amount) of the display mode by the left region 11L, the middle region 11C, and the right region 11R is 100 × 1/3 + (− 20) × 1/3 + 1 × 1/3 = about 27. Yes, less than the actual increase of 30. Therefore, even if the numbers (the number of added games) displayed by the left area 11L, the middle area 11C and the right area 11R increase significantly from "030" to "130", the actual added game count and It can be prevented that the number of games added for notification greatly deviates.

  FIG. 154 shows expected values for the actual number of additional games. If the actual number of added games is 10 games or more or 20 games or more and less than 30 games, it is expected in any display mode in the left area 11L, middle area 11C, right area 11R, and another area 11D. Deviations from the value can occur. Therefore, it shows the expected value. It is not preferable to apply this modification when the actual number of added games is 10 games or more or 20 games or more and less than 30 games.

  When the actual number of added games is 30 or more, “0”, “3”, “0” are displayed on the left area 11L, the middle area 11C and the right area 11R, and “1” is displayed on the other area 11D. can do.

  When the actual number of added games is 40 games or more, “0”, “4”, “0” are displayed on the left area 11L, the middle area 11C and the right area 11R, and “1” is displayed on the other area 11D. can do.

  When the actual number of added games is 50 or more, “0”, “5”, “0” are displayed on the left area 11L, the middle area 11C and the right area 11R, and “1” is displayed on the other area 11D. can do.

  When the actual number of added games is 60 or more, “0”, “6”, and “0” are displayed in the left area 11L, the middle area 11C, and the right area 11R, respectively, and “1” or “ 2 "can be displayed.

  When the actual number of added games is 70 games or more, "0", "7" and "0" are displayed in the left area 11L, the middle area 11C and the right area 11R, respectively, and "1" or "1" is displayed in the other area 11D. 2 "can be displayed.

  When the actual number of added games is 80 games or more, “0”, “8” and “0” are displayed on the left area 11L, the middle area 11C and the right area 11R, respectively, and “1” or “1” is displayed on the other area 11D. 2 "can be displayed.

  If the actual number of added games is 90 games or more, "0", "9" and "0" are displayed in the left area 11L, the middle area 11C and the right area 11R, respectively, and "1" from "1" in the other area 11D. It can be displayed as either "3."

  In the present modification, an initial value of a notification overlay period in which the sub CPU 102 notifies a period equal to or less than the actual number of additional games determined by the main CPU 93 with the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like while referring to the table shown in FIG. It is preferable to determine as (numerical value of initial display). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the number of additional games for notification from becoming significantly larger than the actual number of additional games.

<Description of operation of sub control circuit>
Next, contents of various processing executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156.

(Main board communication task)
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task in the eighth modification.

  Compared with the main board communication task (FIG. 100) described in the present embodiment, the modification 7 is different in that the mode of processing when a start command is received is specifically described (S1311, S1312).

(Process when receiving start command)
FIG. 156 is a flowchart of a start command reception process executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state is in the additional zone (S1331). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is in the additional zone, it shifts the processing to S1332. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is not in the additional zone, it shifts the processing to S1334.

  In S1332, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the number of games to be added is 30 or more. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of games to be added is 30 or more, it moves the process to S1333. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of games to be added is not 30 or more, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1334.

  In S 1333, the sub CPU 102 refers to the added game number notification determination table (FIG. 153), and registers the initial display and replacement display effect data according to the internal winning combination.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes another process at the time of receiving the start command (S1334), and ends the process at the time of receiving the start command.

<Example of production in the extra zone according to this modification>
Next, with reference to FIG. 157, an example of effects in the additional zone in the present modification will be described.

  The main CPU 93 determines whether to execute ART. Then, the main CPU 93 determines the number-for-addition-lottery determination table (FIG. 151), the normal ART middle-of-the-lot zone lottery table (FIG. 38), the number-of-ART-over-game number lottery table (FIG. 152), and the number-of-over-games lottery table With reference to FIG. 40) and the like, an additional period indicating the degree of extension of the period during which ART is provided is determined (S215 to S218 in FIG. 64). Then, the sub CPU 102 refers to the additional game number informing determination table (FIG. 153) and determines an initial value of an informing informing period to be notified by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like based on the additional period determined by the main CPU 93 S1333 of FIG. 156).

  FIG. 157 shows a display example on the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time. The upper row is a display example when the start lever 23 is operated. When the determination of the overlay period is performed, a plurality of display areas (left area 11L, middle area 11C, and right area 11R in which numbers can be displayed corresponding to each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the liquid crystal display device 11 etc. ), Initial values determined by the sub CPU 102 (for example, “0”, “3”, “0”) are displayed in the order of the left region 11L, the middle region 11C, and the right region 11R. A plurality of display areas (left area 11L, middle area 11C and right) are displayed in separate display areas (another area 11D) capable of displaying numbers separately from the display areas (left area 11L, middle area 11C and right area 11R). A number displayed in a display area (left area 11L) displaying a number corresponding to a digit (third digit) larger than the number of digits (two digits) of the initial value "30" of the notification superimposing period in the region 11R) Displayed in a display area (middle area 11C) that displays a number larger than (“0”) and that corresponds to the same digit (second digit) as the number of digits (two digits) of the initial value “30” of the notification superimposing period A number ("1") smaller than the number to be displayed ("3") is displayed.

  When the main CPU 93 determines the lottery flag C as “2” (push order bell) as the internal winning combination subsequent to the determination of the overlay period by the main CPU 93, the first stop operation among the plurality of display areas , Stop buttons 19L and 19C for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the correct answer of the pressing order bell on the active line (the symbol combination corresponding to “bell” in the symbol combination table (FIGS. 10 to 12)). , 19R, the numerals displayed in the display areas 11L, 11C, 11R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are replaced with the numerals displayed in the separate area 11D.

  FIG. 157 (A) corresponds to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided corresponding to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R for stopping the combination of predetermined symbols on the effective line in the first stop operation An example in case a display field is a display field (left field 11L) which displays a number equivalent to a digit (3rd digit) larger than the number of digits (two digits) of an initial value of a notice superimposing period is shown. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays the indication “press left” and a number (“0”) originally displayed corresponding to a digit larger than the initial digit number of the notification superimposing period. ) And a larger number (“1”). Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that the overtaking period may be greatly extended in response to the decision that the pressing bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, and in fact, the notification mode in the notification means is By changing, it is possible to receive an impression that the overlay period has greatly increased, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

  On the other hand, FIG. 157 (B) shows reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided corresponding to stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R for stopping combination of predetermined symbols on the effective line in the first stop operation. An example is shown in the case where the display area corresponding to is a display area (middle area 11C) displaying a number corresponding to the same digit (second digit) as the number of digits (second digit) of the initial value of the notification addition period. . In this case, the liquid crystal display device 11 originally displays a number (“3”) corresponding to the same digit number as the initial value of the notification superimposing period, as well as the indication “press inside”. It is replaced with a number smaller than the number (“1”). Therefore, as the game progresses, the difference between the actual number of additional games and the number of additional games for notification can be reduced.

  In addition, since the effect of extending the superimposing period in the liquid crystal display device 11 is made by changing a number corresponding to a digit that is larger than the initial digit number of the notification superimposing period, the player can see that the superimposing period is longer. I can receive the impression that it has greatly extended. On the other hand, the effect that the superimposing period is shortened in the liquid crystal display device 11 is achieved by changing a number corresponding to the same digit number as the initial value of the notification superimposing period. The impression that it is smaller than the extent of the extra period is smaller than the extension of.

  (C) in FIG. 157 shows the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided corresponding to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R for stopping the combination of predetermined symbols on the effective line in the first stop operation. An example in which the corresponding display area is a display area (right area 11C) displaying a number corresponding to a digit (first digit) smaller than the number of digits (two digits) of the initial value of the notification addition period is shown. . In this case, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays the indication “press right” and a number (“0”) originally displayed that is equivalent to a digit smaller than the initial digit number of the notification superimposing period. ) And a larger number (“1”). Then, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays a message "Tohoho. It was only one game."

[Variation 9: Status confirmation function]
When the game store is closed, if the game status stored in the game store is not updated at all, the game status at that stage is carried over to the next business day. For example, it is assumed that the game situation stored inside is a game situation advantageous to the player, such as during a so-called bonus flag, during a sign, during a chance zone rush, during a high probability of winning a specific internal winning combination internally. The player who plays immediately after the opening of the next business day will be given an advantageous situation. For game stores, it is desirable to avoid the appearance of many players who enjoy the above-mentioned advantageous situation in store operations.

  When the pachislot machine 1 recovers from power interruption for a predetermined time or more (for example, at the time of opening of a game shop) in order to prevent the occurrence of a stationary state of game information (the number of digested games, etc.) at the time of opening the game shop. It has been proposed to automatically perform the same initialization process as the initialization process performed when the setting change command is received, when the power is turned on.

  However, in consideration of the management aspect of the store, it is desirable to give the player the merit of playing immediately after the store opening and to operate the store at a high operation rate immediately after the store opening. In that sense, it is preferable not to initialize all the gaming machines uniformly, but to leave a manual element that allows the gaming shop side to select a gaming machine to be initialized and a gaming machine not to be initialized.

  However, the initialization process is a burdensome task for game arcade staff, and it is desirable to reduce the burden of the initialization process as much as possible.

  Therefore, when a specific operation including the operation of a door key provided on an openable door is performed, a bonus flag, a sign, a chance zone, a high probability medium, etc. When the game information is not the initial value, a notification unit that notifies the fact may be provided.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Initialization process at power-on)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 158, initialization processing at the time of power on in the present modification will be described. This process corresponds to S1 in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal (S1411). In this determination process, the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal by performing error detection using the checksum value.

  For example, when the power is off, the preset value of the pachislot machine 1 (the value set in one of the six predetermined stages of withdrawal rate) and the checksum value calculated from the preset value serve as backup data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95 Stored in In the process of S1411, the main CPU 93 reads out the set value and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 95. Next, the main CPU 93 compares the checksum value calculated from the read setting value with the checksum value backed up. Then, if the two sum values match, the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S1411 that the backup is not normal (when the determination in S1411 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S1413 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S1411 that the backup is normal (when the determination in S1411 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the backed-up setting value in a predetermined area in the main RAM 95 (S1412). Thereby, when the backup is normal, the setting value before the power-off is set to the main RAM 95.

  After the processing of S1412 or when S1411 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether the setting change switch (not shown) is in the on state (S1413). In S1413, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is not in the on state (when S1413 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S1418 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S1413 that the setting change switch is in the on state (when the determination in S1413 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs predetermined initialization processing at the time of setting change (S1414). In this process, for example, the main CPU 93 clears the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area and the display winning combination storing area of the main RAM 95 and also clears the set value.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs initialization command generation / storage processing (S1415). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of an initialization command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the initialization command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The initialization command data includes the presence or absence of setting value change, setting value information, and the like.

  After the process of S1415, the main CPU 93 executes a set value change process (S1416). In this process, the main CPU 93 selects a set value from predetermined 1 to 6 according to the operation result of the reset switch, and sets the set value based on the operation result of the start lever 23 that is operated thereafter. Determine the

  After the process of S1416, the main CPU 93 turns off the setting change switch (S1417) and ends the initialization process when the power is turned on.

  In S1418, the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal (S1418). When the main CPU 93 determines in S1418 that the backup is normal (when the determination in S1418 is YES), the main CPU 93 restores the setting value to the state before power interruption based on the backup data (S1419). Then, after the processing of S1419, the main CPU 93 ends the power-on processing.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S1418 that the backup is not normal (when the determination in S1418 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs power-on error processing (S1420). In this process, the main CPU 93 displays an error display or the like indicating that the backup is not normal.

  In the present modification, an error (backup error) that occurs when the backup is not normal is canceled by a new setting change or the like.

(Medal reception / start check process)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 159, the medal reception / start check process in the present modification will be described. This process corresponds to S3 in FIG.

  If medal reception / start check processing in this modification and medal reception / start check processing explained in Drawing 123 are contrasted, in medal reception / start check processing in this modification, specific operation detection processing after processing of S1015 The difference is that (S1431) is executed.

(Specific operation detection process)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 160, specific operation detection processing in the present modification will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a specific operation has been performed (S1451). In the present modification, the specific operation is described as an operation of twisting the door key while pressing the MAX bet button 21. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The specific operation may be any operation as long as the operation can not be touched by the player (operation of twisting the door key). Further, instead of the operation of pressing the MAX bet button 21, the operation of pressing the operation button 22 (corresponding to the effect button), the operation of the start lever 23, or the like may be performed.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the specific operation has been performed, the main CPU 93 executes a specific operation command generation and storage process (S1452), and ends the specific operation detection process. When the main CPU 93 determines that the specific operation has not been performed, the main CPU 93 ends the specific operation detection process.

<Description of operation of sub control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162, the contents of various processing executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using a program will be described.

(Main board communication task)
FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task in the ninth modification.

  Compared with the main board communication task (FIG. 100) described in the present embodiment, the present modification 9 differs in that the process at the time of reception of the specific operation command is specifically described (S1471 to S1473). .

(Processing when a specific operation command is received)
FIG. 162 is a flowchart of a specific operation command reception process executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state is any of a chance zone, an ART gaming state, and a bonus state (S1491). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is any of the chance zone, the ART gaming state, and the bonus state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1494. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is not any of the chance zone, the ART gaming state, and the bonus state, the process proceeds to S1492.

  In S1492, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the table mode is high speed short or high speed long. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the table mode is either high speed short or high speed long, the process proceeds to S1494. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the table mode is neither high-speed short nor high-speed long, the process proceeds to S1493.

  In step S1493, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the reverse mode is any one of lottery small, lottery, lottery large, and special. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the back mode is any of the lottery small, lottery in progress, lottery large, and special, the process proceeds to S1494. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the back mode is neither lottery small, lottery middle, lottery large, nor special, it ends the processing upon reception of the specific operation command.

  In S1494, the sub CPU 102 registers the setting change indication effect data, and ends the processing when the specific operation command is received.

  According to the pachi-slot machine 1 described in the present modification, in the liquid crystal display device 11 and the speaker groups 65L, 65R, etc., predetermined game information is given when a specific operation (operation of twisting the door key while pressing the MAX bet button 21) is performed. When it is not the initial value (when the gaming state is any of the chance zone, ART gaming state, bonus state, when the front mode is either high speed short or high speed long, or the back mode is lottery small, during lottery, In the case of lottery large or special), notification according to the setting change indication effect data is executed.

  The specific operation includes an operation of a door key provided on a door that can be opened and closed. Since the player can not operate the door key, the player can not perform the specific operation and can not receive notification according to the setting change suggestion effect data. Thereby, it can prevent that a specific player becomes advantageous.

  In addition, the store clerk at the game arcade basically performs the setting value change operation for the pachislot machine 1 notified of by the liquid crystal display device 11 and the speaker groups 65L and 65R, etc., and the game information stored in the main RAM 95 Since it is not necessary to initialize the game information for all the pachislot machines 1 as long as it is initialized to an initial value, it is possible to reduce the burden of the initialization.

  In addition, the game information is not initialized uniformly to all the pachislot machines 1 notified by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the speaker group 65L, 65R, etc. The pachislot machine 1 to be initialized and the pachislot machines not to be initialized The manual element which can select the machine 1 with the game store side is left. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the merit of playing immediately after the store opening, and it is possible to increase the operation rate of the store immediately after the store opening.

[Modification 10: Initial ART Game Number Hidden Function]
Until now, various devices have been made to the notification mode of the number of ART-added games. For example, in the ART mode, there is an effect method for giving a notice effect of the number of games added for each opportunity to increase the number of games, and not for notifying the number of games added for each time the number of games added, but at the end of the ART mode. It has been proposed to provide an effect method for notification and to allow the player to arbitrarily select these effect methods.

  Also, for example, in a unit game in a special gaming state, whether or not to execute a privilege granting effect that grants a privilege when the timing of the stop operation for the variable display of symbols in the display sequence is within a corresponding predetermined time range. While deciding, as a bonus, the bonus giving effect determining means capable of deciding the predetermined adding unit game number of the notification game, and the predetermined adding unit number of games determined by the benefit giving effect determining means is equal to or less than the prescribed adding unit game number. In some cases, it does not notify specific information that suggests a predetermined addition unit game number, and suggests a predetermined addition unit game number if the predetermined addition unit game number is greater than a prescribed addition unit game number A gaming machine has been proposed that includes addition number suggestion effect execution means for notifying specific information.

  However, when the "prescribed addition unit game number" which is the reference of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is large, the notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is hardly performed, and therefore the interest of the game can be enhanced I can't say that. On the other hand, in order to increase the frequency of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means, the notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is made by decreasing the “prescribed addition unit game number” as the reference of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means. The value of the game will be reduced, and this also cannot enhance the fun of gaming. Therefore, a game machine capable of performing notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means at a high frequency even after increasing the "prescribed addition unit game number" which is the reference of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means Is required.

  In order to solve this problem, while the addition period determined by the addition determination means is added as a period of the benefit state and stored in the period storage means for the first addition period determination section, the notification means is added as an addition period. Informing a period shorter than the additional period determined by the additional determining means, and subtracting the period notified as the additional period by the informing means from the additional period actually determined by the additional period determining means to the unannounced period storage means The difference may be stored as an unreported extra period.

  Then, for the second and subsequent additional period determination sections, the additional period determined by the additional determination means is added as a benefit state period and stored in the period storage means, while in a predetermined case, determined by the additional determination means The added period may be stored in the non-notification period storage unit as the non-notification addition period without being notified by the notification unit.

  In this case, when the non-notification addition period stored in the non-notification period storage unit becomes a predetermined period, the notification unit notifies that the predetermined period has been added for the period of the privilege state.

  Hereinafter, a specific aspect of this modification will be described in more detail.

<Game flow in the extra zone 3 in this modification>
The flow of the game in the additional zone 3 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  In this modification, when the additional zone 3 is disclosed, “50” is added as the number of additional games for the normal ART.

  Further, a description will be given on the assumption that the number of additional games is determined by lottery according to the lottery flag C.

  Others are the same as the addition zone 3 described in the present embodiment.

<Example of the flow of notification of the number of added games in this modification>
In addition, an example of the flow of notification of the number of added games in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG.

(At the beginning of the first extra zone 3)
First, when the first addition zone 3 is started, it is notified that the normal ART is added 50 games regardless of the lottery result.

  The number of additional games exceeding 50 games is hidden without notification.

(During the first addition zone 3)
In the course of the first additional zone 3, notification of the number of added games is not given even if the number of ART games is normally added. The fact that the number of games has been added is hidden.

(Following during regular ART)
When the number of games is added during the subsequent normal ART, the number of added games is notified.

(Additional zones 1 to 3 after the second)
When the second and subsequent addition zones 1 to 3 are executed, notification of the number of added games is not made even if the number of ART game numbers is normally added. The fact that the number of games has been added is hidden.

(Notice that 100 games have been added)
Through these, when the total number of hidden games has reached 100 games, it is generally notified that ART has been loaded on 100 games.

  According to such a pachislot machine 1, it is possible to reliably store, as the unannounced addition period, the number of added games exceeding 50 games at least at the first time of determining the addition of ART. Therefore, even if the number of added games serving as a reference for the notification is set to a relatively large number ("100" in this modification), the unreported added period is reliably stored at the first time of determining the addition of ART. Compared to the conventional pachislot machine 1 which can not be said, the frequency of the unannounced additional period becoming 100 games increases. As a result, even if the number of added games serving as a reference for the notification is set to a relatively large number ("100" in this modification), notification of the fact that the ART is added for 100 games is frequently performed. It is possible to increase the interest of the game.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165.

(Addition zone 3 processing)
First, with reference to FIG. 164, the additional zone 3 process in the present modification will be described. This process corresponds to FIG.

  Comparing the additional zone 3 processing in the present modification and the additional zone 3 processing described in FIG. 88, in the additional zone 3 processing in the present modification, the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S1511 to S1513 prior to the processing of S291. It differs in that it performs. Below, the process of S1511-S1513 is demonstrated.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the additional zone 3 already operated flag is off (S1511). If the main CPU 93 determines that the overlay zone 3 already-actuated flag is off, the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S1512. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the overlay zone 3 already-actuated flag is not off (is on), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S291.

  In S1512, the main CPU 93 adds “50” as the number of ART games. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 turns on the overlay zone 3 operated flag (S1513), and shifts the processing to S291.

  The processes after S291 are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 88 in the present embodiment.

(RT operation check process)
First, RT operation check processing in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. This process corresponds to FIG.

  Comparing the RT operation check process in the present modification with the RT operation check process described in FIG. 94, in the RT operation check process in the present modification, the main CPU 93 performs the additional zone 3 operated flag after the processing of S423. The difference is that the process of turning off (S1531) is executed.

<Description of operation of sub control circuit>
Next, contents of various processing executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Main board communication task)
FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task in the tenth modification.

  Compared with the main board communication task (FIG. 100) described in the present embodiment, in the present modification 10, the mode of the process at the time of reception of the start command and the mode of the process at the time of reception of the unit game end command are specific. (S1551-S1554).

(Process when receiving start command)
FIG. 167 is a flowchart of a start command reception process executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state is the ART gaming state (S 1571). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is the ART gaming state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S 1572. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is not the ART gaming state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1573.

  In step S1572, the sub CPU 102 executes ART processing (sub) described with reference to FIG. 168, and the process proceeds to step S1573.

  In S1573, the sub CPU 102 executes another process when receiving the start command, and ends the process when receiving the start command.

(Processing during ART (sub))
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the ART processing (sub) performed by the sub CPU 102.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state is in the normal ART (S1591). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is the normal ART, the sub CPU 102 executes the normal ART process (sub) (S1592), and moves the process to S1597.

  On the other hand, when determining that the gaming state is not in the normal ART, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the additional zones 1 and 2 (S1593). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is in the additional zones 1 and 2, it executes the additional zones 1 and 2 processing (sub) described later with reference to FIG. 169 (S1594), and shifts the processing to S1595 .

  On the other hand, when determining that the gaming state is not in the extra zones 1 and 2, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the extra zone 3 (S1595). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is in the additional zone 3, the sub CPU 102 executes an additional zone 3 process (sub) described later with reference to FIG. 170 (S1596), and shifts the process to S1597.

  In S1597, the sub CPU 102 executes other processing and ends the processing (sub) during ART.

(Add-on zone 1, 2 processing (sub))
FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing an additional zone 1, 2 process (sub) executed by the sub CPU 102.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the addition of the number of games has been won (S1611). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the game number addition has been won, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1612. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the game number addition has not been won, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1619.

  In S1612, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of randomly selected additional games to the ART game number counter. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the additional game number special notification flag is on (S1613). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional game number special notification flag is on, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1614. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional game number special notification flag is not on (is off), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1618.

  In S1614, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of randomly selected additional games to the ART game number unannounced counter. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value of the ART game number unannounced counter is 100 or more (S1615). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number non-notification counter is 100 or more, it moves the process to S1616. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number unannounced counter is not 100 or more (it is 99 or less), it moves the process to S1619.

  In S1616, the sub CPU 102 registers the extra game number special notification effect data. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 subtracts “100” from the ART game number non-notification counter (S1617), and moves the process to S1619.

  In step S <b> 1618, the sub CPU 102 registers notification effect data of the number of added games that have been lottery. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes other processing (S1619), and finishes the additional zone 1 and 2 processing (sub).

(Addition zone 3 processing (sub))
FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the extra zone 3 process (sub) executed by the sub CPU 102.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the extra game number special notification flag is off (S1631). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional game number special notification flag is off, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1632. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional game number special notification flag is not off (is on), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1635.

  In S1632, the sub CPU 102 adds “50” to the ART game number counter. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 turns on the extra game number special notification flag (S1633). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 registers notification effect data for adding 50 games (S1634).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the game number is won (S1635). If the sub CPU 102 determines that it has won the number of games, it moves the process to S1636. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the game number addition has not been won, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1641.

  In step S <b> 1636, the sub CPU 102 adds the lottery added game number to the ART game number counter. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 adds the lottery number of added games to the ART game number unannounced counter (S1637).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number unannounced counter is 100 or more (S1638). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number unannounced counter is 100 or more, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1639. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number unannounced counter is not 100 or more (it is 99 or less), it moves the process to S1641.

  In S1639, the sub CPU 102 registers the extra game number special notification effect data. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 subtracts “100” from the ART game number unannounced counter (S1640), and shifts the processing to S1641.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes other processing (S1641), and ends the additional zone 3 processing (sub).

(Process when receiving unit game end command)
FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the unit game end command reception process executed by the sub CPU 102.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART has ended (S1651). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART has ended, it moves the process to S1652. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART has not ended, it moves the process to S1656.

  In S1652, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the additional game number special notification flag is on. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional game number special notification flag is on, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1653. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional game number special notification flag is not on (is off), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1655.

  In S1653, the sub CPU 102 clears the ART game number non-notification counter. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 turns off the extra game number special notification flag (S1654).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 clears the ART game number non-notification counter. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 turns off the extra game number special notification flag (S1654).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes ART termination processing (sub) (S1655). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes another process when the unit game end command is received (S1656), and ends the unit game end command reception process.

  According to the pachislot machine 1 described in the present modification, the main CPU 93 determines whether to apply the ART, and when it is determined, can shift to the ART gaming state where the ART can be applied. Then, in the ART gaming state, additional periods indicating the degree of extension of the ART period are determined, and when determined, additional zones 1 to 3 are provided to extend the period of the ART.

  Here, for the first addition zone 3, the addition period determined by the main CPU 93 (50 games added by the process of S1512 in FIG. 164 and the number of addition games determined by the lottery of S291) is added to the game While being added as a number and stored in an ART game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 103, the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like has an additional period of 50 games, which is shorter than the additional period determined by the main CPU 93. An effect corresponding to the additional notification effect data is executed (S1634 in FIG. 170), and the ART game number non-notification counter provided in the sub RAM 103 is displayed in the liquid crystal display device 11 from the additional period actually determined by the main CPU 93. For example, the period notified as the extra period (such as “5 The difference obtained by subtracting the game ") is stored as the non-alarm plus period.

  Also, for the second and subsequent additional zones, regardless of the type of the additional zone, the additional period determined by the main CPU 93 is added and stored in the ART game number counter provided in the sub RAM 103, while the number of additional games is added. When the special notification flag is on, the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like does not notify the additional period determined by the main CPU 93, and is stored in the ART game number unannounced counter as an unannounced additional period (S1614 in FIG. 169). S1637 in FIG. 170).

  Then, the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like notifies that 100 games have been added for the ART period when the unreported addition period stored in the ART game number non-notification counter becomes 100 games or more (FIG. 169). S1616, S1639 of FIG. 170).

  According to such a pachislot machine 1, it is possible to reliably store the unannounced addition period in the ART game number unannounced counter at least for the first time when the addition zone starts. For this reason, even if the reference period for the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like is set to a relatively long period of 100 games, the unreported extra period is set in the ART game number non-notification counter at the first time of the extra zone. Compared to the conventional pachislot machine which can not be reliably stored, the frequency of the unannounced additional period becoming 100 games increases. Even if the reference period of information in the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like is set to a relatively long period, notification that the ART period has been added can be performed at a high frequency, and the interest of the game is enhanced. Is possible.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 described in the present modification, for the first additional period zone 3, the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like has a minimum period (50 games in this modification) determined at least by the CPU 93 as the additional period. Inform. The ART game number non-notification counter is based on the extra period actually determined by the main CPU 93 (“50” game added by the process of S1512 in FIG. 164 and the extra game number determined by the lottery in S291). The difference obtained by subtracting the minimum period is preferably stored as an unreported extra period.

  According to such a pachislot machine 1, at the first time when it becomes the additional zone 3, the ART game number non-notification counter is at least determined by the main CPU 93 from the additional period actually determined by the main CPU 93 as the unreported additional period. The difference obtained by subtracting the minimum time period (the number of added games substantially determined by the lottery of S291 in FIG. 164) is stored. Therefore, in the first time when it becomes the extra zone 3, the unreported extra period stored in the ART game number unreported counter can be further increased, and as a result, the frequency of the unreported extra period being 100 games or more is further increased. Increase.

  On the other hand, the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like notifies the minimum period ("50" game in this modification) determined at least by the main CPU 93 as the additional period, so that the player can reliably add the minimum period. It is possible to advance the game while having a sense of security of being aware.

  According to such a pachislot machine 1, even if the reference period in the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like is set to a relatively long period of 100 games or the like, the ART period has been added. Notification can be performed with high frequency, and it becomes possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

[Modification 11: A game after the end of ART]
With regard to the gaming machine having the ART function, the mode selection lottery means uses the mode selection lottery table constituted of the same kind of data at the time of setting change and at the end of ART gaming by the limiter It has been proposed to select a mode. According to such a pachislot machine, the AT transition lottery mode is selected in the same process as the setting change after the state advantageous to the player of AT game ending by the limiter occurs, so for example, at the setting change A more advantageous ART transition lottery mode is selected at the end of AT game, and after the ART game is over, the player has an excessive expectation that the ART game right is re-granted by the notification lottery means in a short period of time It is possible to prevent the rise.

  However, in such a pachislot machine, there is a possibility that the interest of the game after the ART game is diminished.

  Therefore, in this modification, the interest of the game is maintained even after the game to which the privilege is granted, while preventing the player from being given an excessive expectation that the privilege will be granted again in a short period of time. The purpose is to provide a pachislot machine that can continue.

<Exclusive table mode transition lottery number determination table at limiter operation>
FIG. 172 is a limiter activation dedicated table mode transition lottery number determination table.

  When determining the table mode transition lottery number, in this embodiment, it is determined with reference to the table shown in FIG. FIG. 172 is a table referred to only at the time of limiter operation, and when it is not at the time of limiter operation, the table shown in FIG. 21 is referred to as in the present embodiment.

  The table shown in FIG. 21 is defined such that different lottery numbers are determined according to the type of the lottery flag B and the current table mode (low probability, high probability short, high probability long).

  On the other hand, the table shown in FIG. 172 is defined such that the same lottery number "9" is determined regardless of the type of the lottery flag B.

  Then, when “9” is determined as the lottery number, in the following table mode transition lottery, “high-precision short” is won at the rate of 64/256 and “high-precision long” is won at the rate of 192/256. (See FIG. 22A). In the front mode transfer lottery, there is no chance of winning “low accuracy”.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Table mode transition process)
First, with reference to FIG. 173, table mode transition processing in the present modification will be described. This process corresponds to a modification of FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the limiter operation flag is on (S1711). When determining that the limiter operation flag is on, the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S1712. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the limiter operation flag is not on (is off), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S1714.

  In S1712, the main CPU 93 determines a table mode transition lottery number from the lottery flag B with reference to the limiter activation special table mode transition lottery number determination table (FIG. 172). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the limiter operation flag to OFF (S1713), and proceeds to S52.

  In S1714, the main CPU 93 refers to the table mode transition lottery number determination table (FIG. 21), determines the table mode transition lottery number from the lottery flag B and the current table mode, and proceeds to S52.

  Subsequently, in S52, the table mode transition lottery table (FIG. 22) is referred to, the table mode of the transition destination is determined and set based on the table mode transition lottery number, and the table mode transition processing is ended.

(Prize distinction medal payout process)
Next, with reference to FIG. 174, a winning determination medal payout process in the present modification will be described. This process corresponds to S13 in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 applies a profit according to the combination of the symbols based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the effective line (S1731).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the ART gaming state (S1732). When the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the ART gaming state, the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S1733. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the ART gaming state, the main CPU 93 ends the winning determination medal payout processing.

  In S1733, the main CPU 93 adds the amount of profits granted to the ART profit granting counter. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the ART profit granting counter is 3000 or more (S1734). When determining that the value of the ART profit granting counter is 3000 or more, the main CPU 93 sets the limiter operation flag to ON (S1735) and ends the winning determination medal payout process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the ART profit provision counter is not 3000 or more, the winning combination medal payout process ends.

(End-by-state control processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the end-at-end state control process in the present modification will be described. This process corresponds to a modification of FIG.

  The end-state-specific control processing in this modification is different in that processing of S1751 to S1753 is added subsequent to the processing of S440 of FIG. Below, the process of S1751-S1753 is demonstrated.

  In S1751, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the limiter operation flag is on. If the main CPU 93 determines that the limiter operation flag is on, the main CPU 93 advances the process to step S1752. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the limiter operation flag is not on (is off), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S441.

  At S1752, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at the time of limiter operation. In this processing, the main CPU 93 updates the gaming state from the ART gaming state to the normal gaming state, and updates the mode information to the “low probability” mode in which the degree of expectation for transition to ART is the lowest.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 clears the ART profit granting counter (S1753), and moves the process to S441. Note that the processing after S441 is the same as that described with reference to FIG.

  According to the pachislot machine 1 described in the present modification, a plurality of modes (low accuracy, high accuracy short, high accuracy long) having different degrees of expected transition to ART are provided. When the value of the value is 3000 or more (YES in the process of S1734 in FIG. 174), the limiter operation flag is set to ON (S1735 in FIG. 174), and the mode information has the lowest expected transition to ART. The mode is updated to the “low probability” mode (S1752 in FIG. 175). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of anticipation to shift to ART again in a short period of time in the game after the profit awarded in ART reaches 3000 medals.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the table mode transition lottery number determination table (FIGS. 21 and 172) and the table mode transition lottery table (FIG. 22) to change from the current mode (low accuracy mode) to another mode ( Determine whether to update to high probability short or high probability long). At that time, the table mode transition lottery number determination table (FIG. 172) referred to when the limiter is operated is different from the other table mode transition lottery number determination table (FIG. 21). 9 "is selected. And in the table mode transition lottery table (FIG. 22), the table mode transition lottery number "9" is another table mode transition lottery number "0" to "2", "5" to "8", Compared to “10” and “11”, the update expectation level for updating to an expectation mode (high-accuracy short, high-accuracy long) with a high transition expectation from the normal gaming state to the ART gaming state is set. Therefore, the main CPU 93 determines to update from the low probability mode with low update expectation to the high mode (expected mode: high probability short, high probability long) with high frequency. If the mode is updated to the expectation mode, the transition expectation degree in which the gaming state shifts to the ART gaming state is increased, and as a result, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even after the end of awarding of the benefit by ART. It becomes.

  Therefore, according to such a pachislot machine 1, even after the end of the game to which the privilege is given, while preventing the player from being given an excessive expectation that the privilege will be granted again in a short period of time, It is possible to provide a pachislot machine 1 that can maintain the interest of

  In this modification, when the value of the ART profit granting counter becomes 3000 or more, the limiter operation flag is set to ON, and the mode information is updated to the “low probability” mode with the lowest expected transition to ART. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an upper limit is set for the number of unit games that can be executed continuously, and the mode information is also displayed when the ART section reaches the upper limit. It is also possible to update to the “low accuracy” mode with the lowest expected transition to ART.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 described in the present modification, the main CPU 93 performs a predetermined operation including an operation of a door key provided on the door that can be opened and closed (initialization operation for setting change, see S1413 to S1417 in FIG. 158). ), It is preferable that the mode information can be updated to the lowest mode (low accuracy mode). In this case, the table mode transition lottery number determination table is referred to the one described in FIG. 21 (S1714 in FIG. 173). In FIG. 21, when the table mode is “low certainty”, the table mode transition lottery number is one of “2”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “10”, and “11”. is there. Then, as described above, in the table mode transition lottery table (FIG. 22), the value of the ART profit grant counter reaches “3000”, and as a result, the table mode is selected when the “low probability” mode is set. Table mode transition lottery number “9” is selected as the table mode transition lottery number “2”, “2”, which is selected when the table mode becomes “low probability” mode as a result of the initialization operation for setting change. Compared to 5 ”,“ 6 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 10 ”,“ 11 ”, update to the expected mode (high-precision short, high-precision long) with a higher expected transition from the normal gaming state to the ART gaming state The update expectation is set high.

  According to such a pachislot machine 1, it is an excessive expectation that the benefit will be re-improved in a short period of time to the player who is going to play the game after the benefit granted in the ART reaches a predetermined amount. It is possible to keep maintaining the interest of the game even after the end of the game for which the benefit is given, while preventing the feeling of feeling from being given to the player. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where an excessively great bonus is given to a player who plays immediately after the opening of the store on the next business day.

  It should be noted that mode information is the lowest mode (low accuracy) by performing a predetermined operation including an operation of a door key provided on the door that can be opened and closed (refer to S1413 to S1417 in FIG. 159). When the mode is updated, a dedicated table mode transition lottery number determination table may be referred to. In this case, the table mode transition lottery number determination table corresponding to the low-accuracy mode is referred to when the value of the ART profit granting counter is 3000 or more, or when the number of ARTs reaches the upper limit. And the second table to be referred to when the initialization operation for changing the setting is performed, and the lowest mode (low probability mode) is generated between the first table and the second table. ) To the expected mode (high accuracy short, high accuracy long), it is desirable that the update expectation is different.

[Modification 12: Other Modification]
Although the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment has a pullback zone as one aspect of the ART state, the present invention is not limited to this. The pullback zone may not be the ART state (advantage zone).

  Moreover, in the pachislot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when one cycle of a game is performed during the normal state, the state shifts to a precursor state (various gauze precursors or various precursors), After the end of the sign, the gaming state is shifted to the corresponding gaming state. Here, in the pachislot machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game in the precursor state is included in the normal state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game in the precursor state may be an advantageous section. For example, it has an advantageous section A which continues for a period corresponding to the number of progamed games and an advantageous section B which continues beyond a period corresponding to the number of progamed games. While in the advantageous section B, perform one navigation to the player during a period corresponding to the number of prognostic games (for example, notify once of the mode of stop operation advantageous to the player), When the period exceeds the period, all navigation is performed (for example, all aspects of the stop operation advantageous to the player are notified). As an example, if the period corresponding to the number of prognostic games is 15 games, and the period exceeding the period is 50 games, the main control circuit 91 shifts to the advantageous section A, and then between 15 games One navigation is performed, and the advantageous section A is ended when 15 games have passed. On the other hand, when the main control circuit 91 shifts to the advantageous section B, one navigation is performed during 15 games, and when 15 games have elapsed, all navigation is performed during the subsequent 50 games. By doing this, it is possible to realize the game during the pre-maze by the advantageous section A, and to achieve the game from the precursor to the ART state by the advantageous section B.

  Moreover, the playability of each gaming state of the pachislot machine 1 of the above embodiment is applicable to other gaming states. For example, the playability in the chance zone can be diverted to the addition to the ART state, the chance zone in the normal state or the transition to the ART state, and the playability in the ART state can be converted to the ART in the chance zone. It can be diverted to a lottery or a transition to a chance zone during normal state or ART state.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, various benefits are given, but the benefits given to the player are optional. For example, not only the benefits related to the play given to the player (for example, the transition to the ART state, the addition of the duration of the ART state, the transition to the CZ, the addition of the duration of the CZ), the benefits other than the appearance (For example, release of privilege video, custom release of pachislot machine 1, custom release of premier production (lottery probability, stage, character, etc.), interlocking function with mobile terminal (right to obtain images and game information on mobile terminal) Etc.).

  Moreover, the content of the notification performed during the ART state is not limited to the example described above, and is arbitrary. For example, the order (pushing order) of stop operation in which a special symbol combination that is advantageous to the player is displayed may be notified, or the timing of the stop operation necessary for the symbol combination to be displayed ( You may make it alert | report the symbol which should aim.

  As an advantageous state for the player, the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the re-game does not change (or changes within a range not affecting the game performance), but the mode of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is It may be a gaming state in which the function to notify, that is, the AT function is activated. Further, as a state advantageous to the player, a re-game high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to re-game is activated, and a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. It may be a gaming state in which the function is activated, that is, the ART function is activated.

Moreover, the management method of the duration of ART state is also arbitrary. For example, the duration may be managed by the number of games, the duration may be managed by the number of sets, and the duration is managed by the number of medals paid out or the number of differences during the ART state. In addition, the duration may be managed based on the number of times of notification (the number of navigations) that affects the payout of medals during the ART state, and the continuation performed at an arbitrary timing during the ART state. The duration may be managed by the determination, or the ART state may be terminated when a specific symbol combination is displayed during the ART state.
In this case, the addition target is appropriately adjusted according to the management method of the duration of the ART state, such as the number of games, the number of sets, the number of times of navigation, the number of differences, and the like.

Also, management of the duration of CZ is optional. The duration may be managed according to the number of games, or the duration may be managed according to the number of sets, or the duration may be managed according to a continuation determination performed at an arbitrary timing during CZ. Also, when a specific symbol combination is displayed in CZ, CZ may be terminated, or the duration may be managed according to the number of ART lotteries performed during CZ. The duration may be managed by the number of transitions to the ART state.
In this case, the addition target is appropriately adjusted according to the CZ duration management method, such as the number of games, the number of sets, the number of lotteries, and the like.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the notification (ART) function is operated under the control of the main (main control board 71) side, but the present invention is not limited to this. The notification (ART) function may be activated by control on the control board 72) side.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, transition to the CZ or ART state is made by winning the transition lottery performed in the normal state. Here, in the pachislot machine 1 of the above embodiment, although there may be a setting difference with respect to this transition lottery, it is also possible to carry out this transition lottery based on “information having no difference in setting value”. . Note that “information with no difference in setting values” means that all the setting values in the internal lottery process are determined as internal winning combinations with the same probability (setting unquestioned roles), and all settings when all reels are stopped. It includes at least symbol combinations (symbol combinations without setting difference) that are to be displayed with the same probability in the value.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the modification, when the setting non-questioning role is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition lottery to the CZ or ART state is performed, and the winning combination with the setting difference (setting difference) is determined as the internal winning combination. If it is, it will not shift to CZ or ART status and will not carry out lottery. Moreover, in the pachislot machine 1, when the symbol combination with no setting difference is displayed when stopping all reels, the transition lottery to the CZ or ART state is performed, and when the symbol combination with the setting difference is displayed, No transition to CZ or ART status.
In this specification, not performing lottery includes not only performing lottery itself, but also means that although lottery is performed, it is always non-winning.

Further, the transition lottery to the CZ or ART state may be performed based on the complete probability which is predetermined and does not change at all. The “predetermined complete probability that does not vary” means a probability that does not vary based on at least the set value (that is, a probability that the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value).
It should be noted that the “previously determined complete probability that does not change at all” may further include that the probability is uniquely defined for “information having no difference in setting value”. In recent gaming machines, there are cases in which there is a state in which it is easy to win transitional lottery and a state in which it is difficult to win. In such a case, when a transition lottery is performed with a “probability uniquely determined for information that does not have a difference in setting values”, for example, in any game state at the time of winning a setting unquestioned role It will carry out the transition lottery that wins with the same probability. On the other hand, when a transfer lottery is performed with a “probability that is not uniquely determined for information that does not have a difference in setting values (that is, a probability that fluctuates)”, for example, Transition lottery winning at a probability according to the current gaming state, that is, when the current gaming state is a high probability state, performing a transition lottery winning at a high probability, the current gaming state is a low probability state In the case, it will be a transition lottery that wins with low probability.

  In this way, the transition lottery performed based on the “information having no difference in the set value” is performed with the same probability of winning regardless of the set value, so that in the modified pachislot machine 1, the CZ or ART state is entered. It is possible to make the expectation for the transition of the same for each setting value, and to suppress the difference in the out-of-the-box performance to the winning probability of the setting difference with the setting difference.

  The lottery for shifting to the CZ or ART state includes (1) an internal lottery for determining an internal winning combination, (2) a transition lottery for determining whether or not to perform transition, and (3) transition for transition. Three lotterys of the advantageous section type lottery for deciding ahead are considered. In the pachislot machine 1, these three lottery may be performed using individual random number values, or all lottery may be performed using a common random value, and two lotterys may be performed. A common random number may be used, and one remaining lottery may be performed using individual random numbers. Note that using a common random value means, for example, (1) When a predetermined unquestioned role is determined in a random number range of “0 to 128” in the internal lottery, (2) “0 to 64” is transferred. Random number range not winning for lottery, “65 to 128” is the random number range for winning lottery, and (3) “65 to 83” is the random number range where the migration destination is CZ1, and “83 to 99” The destination is CZ2 random number range, “99 to 115” is the transition destination CZ3 random number range, and “115 to 128” is the transition destination ART state random number range. In other words, the lottery result of another lottery is assigned to a part of the random number range won in one lottery.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment and various modifications, the pachislot was mentioned as an example as a game machine, However, This invention is not limited to this. Features other than the features peculiar to the pachislot machine 1, such as features relating to reel control and features relating to setting changes and confirmation according to the present invention, can also be applied to a gaming machine called “pachinko”, and similar effects can be obtained. . For example, checksum generation and determination processing, various processing using an instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 93 (address designation processing using a Q register, soft timer update processing, 7 segment LED drive processing, communication data generation and storage processing, etc. The features of various processes using the non-specified ROM area and the non-specified RAM area are also applicable to "pachinko".

  Further, the set value may be only one stage. At this time, the setting change process may be left or eliminated. In the case of leaving the setting change process, only the same setting can be retouched, so the process is substantially to clear the RAM. Even when the set value is set to only one step, a mode is provided for lottery (such as first hit and / or addition) in an advantageous state (such as ART state), and the number of times that a predetermined combination is won with a predetermined probability is counted By switching this mode when the number of times reaches a specified value, it is possible to cause unevenness in the balls.

  In this case, a value obtained by multiplying the denominator with a predetermined probability by the specified value is one wave of the ball. If the value is defined so as to be switched by the number of games corresponding to one day, even if the setting value is one step, it can be regarded as comparable with a plurality of gaming machines provided. For example, assuming that the working time of one day is 11 hours, 11h = 39600 sec. Therefore, assuming that the minimum time taken for one game is 4.1 seconds in accordance with the rule, the maximum number of games per day is 39600/4. 1 = about 9659 times. In addition, since it is not realistic not to have a break (meal or toilet) at all, I think that the number of games per day is about 8,000 times. Since the predetermined probability is set to 1/32 and the specified value is set to 256, 32 × 256 = 8192 is obtained, so that it is possible to switch the wave of the ball out in about one day.

  Furthermore, it is possible to stabilize the earnings in a two-day cycle by alternately switching between the mode advantageous to the player and the mode disadvantageous to the player every time the number of times that the predetermined combination has been won reaches a prescribed value. It can contribute to the sales of the store. In addition, although the case where setting value was made into 1 step was demonstrated, it is not restricted to 1 step and diversion is possible. More specifically, if employed without changing the number of setting values, it is possible to make the wave of the outgoing ball more complicated without increasing the number of setting values. In addition, if the number of set values is reduced, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the set values and becoming monotonous.

  If the number of set values can be reduced, the data capacity can be reduced accordingly. If it is possible to set the six levels of setting values to one level of setting values, data can be reduced to 1/6. In addition, the development cost for designing the desired payout ratio at each stage is also 1/6. Furthermore, although only game machines that are suitable for the test are permitted to be used for sales, it is possible to shorten the time required for the test.

[Scalability of gaming machine according to the other embodiment]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player's medal insertion operation (i.e., an operation of inserting a hand-held medal into the medal insertion slot 20, or a credited medal is the MAX bet button 15a or 1 bet button). When the game is started by the operation of inserting 15b and the game is started, and there is a payout of the medal when the game is finished, the hopper device 51 is driven and the medal is paid out from the medal payout port 24, or Although the crediting form has been described, the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, the game medium necessary for the game is inserted by the player, the game is performed based thereon, and the present invention is applied to all the modes in which a privilege is given (for example, medals are paid out) based on the result of the game. be able to. That is, not only the form in which the game medium is inserted (hanged) by a physical player's operation and the game medium is paid out, but the main control circuit 91 (main control board 71) itself is a game medium owned by the player The game may be managed electromagnetically to enable a game without medals. In addition, the game media management apparatus that manages the game media that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit 91 (main control board 71) may electromagnetically manage the game media held by the player. .

  In this case, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is bidirectionally communicated with an external game medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. It is possible to be connected, and the lending operation of gaming media (that is, the operation of providing the necessary gaming media when the player performs the operation of inserting the gaming media) or the prize for winning the role related to the payout of gaming media ( The game media payout operation when the role is established (that is, the operation of acquiring the necessary game media when the player is paid out the game media), or the game media to be used for the game It may be possible to perform an electromagnetic recording operation. In addition, the gaming media management device displays the number of gaming media held on the front of the pachislot machine 1 based on not only the management of the actual number of gaming media but also, for example, the management result of the number of gaming media. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the owned game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the gaming media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of gaming media that the player can use for gaming by an electromagnetic method.

  Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to direct operation, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the game media handling device and an external device. It is desirable that the player can not transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game media without using the external connection terminal board.

  In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operation means that can be operated by the player, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a portable terminal, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, etc., a game medium handling device side external connection terminal board It may be provided (both not shown).

  As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits the valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the lending operation means. The game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and when the game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is ended, the game media management device transmits the number of game media to the game media handling device by operating any of the return operation means. The medium handling device ejects a recording medium recording the number of game media. The gaming media management device clears the number of gaming media stored by itself when transmitting the number of gaming media. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the gaming table to play a game based on the gaming medium recorded on another table.

  In the above example, all gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling apparatus, but the gaming machine or gaming media handling apparatus transmits only the number of gaming media desired by the player and the gaming media possessed by the player It may be divided and processed. In addition to discharging the recording medium, cash or cash equivalents may be discharged, or may be stored in a portable terminal or the like. Further, the gaming medium handling device may insert a member recording medium of the game arcade, and store the member recording medium in the member recording medium so as to be able to play again later.

  In addition, in the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, it is possible to execute a lock operation for locking the game medium or the valuable data communication with respect to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown). It is also good. In this case, information that can only be known by the player, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be stored by an imaging means provided in the gaming machine or the game medium handling device.

  In addition, as described above, this gaming media management device may be capable of playing a game only without medals, or gaming media may be inserted (hanged) by the action of a physical player. It may be possible to play the game in a form in which money is paid out, and a form in which the game can be made without medals, or in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device can adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 66 and the hopper device 51 described above, and these are controlled by the main control circuit 91 (main control board 71). Adopting a method that enables control to perform control to record and display the total number of game media that the player can use for gaming based on the transmission of the control result by an electromagnetic method. You can also.

  In the above, the case of applying the gaming media management device to the pachislot machine 1 has been described, but the gaming media management device is similarly provided in the slot machine and the enclosed type gaming machine using the gaming balls described above, It is also possible for the player's game media to be managed.

  As described above, by providing the above-described game medium management device, it is possible to reduce the number of selectors 66, hopper devices 51, and the like inside the game machine as compared to the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game. In addition to reducing the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine, it is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the game medium, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the number of devices. It will also reduce the power consumption. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the insertion slot and the payout opening of the game media and the game media. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

[Effect of pachislot machine]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachislot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

<A game in the additional zone 1>
In the additional zone, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) selects one event space from among a plurality of event spaces that are associated with different rewards, for five games from the current game to the game four games ahead If it sets to each of a game and satisfy | fills provision conditions in the game in which this event mass is set, the reward according to the event mass set with respect to the said game will be provided. For example, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) adds the duration of the normal ART when a bell or more is won in a game in which the event mass "blue 1" is set.

  Further, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) subtracts 1 from the life when the replay lower is won in the game in which the event space "red" is set, and ends the additional zone 1 when the life becomes 0 by this subtraction. . At this time, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) gives the guaranteed number of games for five games at the start of the extra zone 1, and the event mass “red” is set while the number of guaranteed games remains. Even if Replay or less wins in the game being played, the additional zone 1 is continued without subtracting 1 life.

  Further, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) adds 1 to the revival stock when the bell or more is won in the game in which the event mass "character 4" is set. In the situation where this revival stock is applied, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) resumes the additional zone 1 even if the life becomes 0 and the additional zone 1 is ended with the event mass "red". Do.

  In addition, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) gives the right to shift from the additional zone 1 to the additional zone 2 when the bell or more is won in the game in which the event mass "back" is set, and the main control substrate When the right to shift to the additional zone 2 is granted, 71 (main CPU 93) shifts the gaming state from the additional zone 1 to the additional zone 2 from the gaming state.

  Further, when the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) wins the bell or more in the game in which the event mass "battle" is set, the number of back mass conversions set for the event mass "battle" in the next game or later The event space set for the game of the minute is rewritten to the event space "back". The main control board 71 (main CPU 93) periodically sets (every 20 games) this event mass "battle" in the additional zone 1.

(Show / hide event space)
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention, the event squares set for each of the five games are displayed in a predetermined manner. Specifically, the ROM cartridge substrate 86 is provided with display squares "treasure box", "enemy", etc. provided in correspondence with each of the event squares, and a display square "unknown" provided in common to all the event squares. And the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102), when the event mass is set on the main side, an image (display mass "treasure box" ) Or an image (display mass “unknown”) provided in common for all event masses is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Specifically, when a predetermined operation is not performed, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102) displays an image unique to the event mass set on the main side on the liquid crystal display device 11, and performs the predetermined operation. In the case where is performed, the common image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 regardless of the event space set on the main side.

  By making it possible to switch the display / non-display of the event mass (reward) set in this way in accordance with the player's operation, the gameability can be changed according to the player's preference. That is, for example, in a situation where an event space which is not very desirable for the player is set internally (main side), some players may not want to display the event space. Even in such a case, if the player has selected to hide the event mass, the contents of the set event mass (reward) will not be understood, so the player must Playing games with expectations.

  The sub-control board 72 (sub-CPU 102) may hide all of the five game squares (display square “unknown”), or may hide some squares and display some squares. A square may be displayed. For example, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU102) displays a display cell “unknown” for the game after the next game, and displays an image associated with each event cell for the current game. In this case, the sub-control board 72 (sub-CPU 102), when the display cell “unknown” displayed for the next game slides as the game progresses and corresponds to the current game, this display cell “ “Unknown” is switched to the image associated with the current game, and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Note that the timing for switching the display is arbitrary. For example, the sub-control board 72 (sub-CPU 102) is configured to stop the previous game, start the current game, or stop the current game (first to third stops). The display of the liquid crystal display device 11 is switched to any one of the operations).

  By doing this, the player can understand the content of the reward set for the current game, although the player does not know the content of the reward set for the next and subsequent games. Therefore, the player has a strong interest in the current game and plays the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

(Continuation / non-continuation of extra zone 1)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention, the additional zone 1 is ended when the life becomes 0 along with the event mass “red”, but while the number of guaranteed games remains, the life is not subtracted, As a result, the additional zone 1 does not end while the number of guaranteed games remains. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, even if a large number of event spaces which are disadvantageous to the player are set, the additional zone 1 is immediately completed because the additional zone 1 is not completed while the number of guaranteed games remains. A certain interest is secured without being finished. Even after the guaranteed number of games has been exhausted, if the player has the resurrection stock, the extra zone 1 is resumed at the end, so that the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) sets the additional zone level at the start of the additional zone 1. The additional zone level is a mode in which the selection expectations of the event mass are different from each other. For example, in the additional zone level 3, the probability of selecting the event mass “red” is higher than when the additional zone level 1 is set. Low. The main control board 71 (main CPU 93) randomly selects the additional zone level at a predetermined probability at the start of the normal additional zone 1, and always restarts the additional zone 1 by the resurrection stock, the additional zone level 3 Decide. As a result, if the resurrection stock has been awarded, the added zone 1 will not only be resumed at the end of the added zone 1, but it will be difficult for the added zone 1 itself to end, so the fun of the game can be further enhanced. It can be enhanced.

(Transfer from zone 1 to zone 2)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, when a bell or more is won in a game in which the event mass “rear” is set, the game moves to the more advantageous addition zone 2. Here, since the event mass "back" is set by the number of back mass conversions when the bell or more is won in the game in which the event mass "battle" is set, the event mass "battle" is set In such a case, the transition expectation to the more advantageous additional zone 2 in the subsequent game will be increased. Thus, for example, even if the event mass set for the next and subsequent games is disadvantageous for the player, if the event mass “battle” is set in the current game, Since a disadvantageous situation can be avoided by obtaining a reward corresponding to the mass “battle”, the interest of the game is secured. At this time, in order to obtain a reward according to the event mass "back" and "battle", since it is necessary to win more than the bell, the frequency of rewriting may be increased compared to the case where the reward can always be obtained. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the event mass “battle” is set at regular intervals in the extra zone 1, so the opportunity to rewrite the event mass “back” regularly comes. If it is possible to obtain a reward according to the event mass "battle" at this regular chance, the degree of expectation for transition to the more advantageous additional zone 2 increases in the subsequent game, so the interest of the game is further enhanced. It can be enhanced.

<Game of additional zone 2>
In the additional zone 2, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) performs the addition of the number of ART games every game. Specifically, in the additional zone 2, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) always performs the addition of the number of ART games when the bell or more where the payout of medals is won is won, and the replay following no payout of medals is When winning, the number of ART games is increased unless it is ended at the end lottery of the additional zone 2 (see “Back” column in FIG. 47 and FIG. 40). Further, when the bonus state starts in the additional zone 2, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) continues without ending the additional zone 2.

  Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 (the main control board 71, the sub control board 72), when the bonus state starts in the additional zone 2, the special BB having continuity with the additional zone 2 with game characteristics and effects is provided. Start. More specifically, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) performs addition of the number of ART games during the special BB, and a winning combination of medals during the special BB is won (in the special BB). In order to achieve continuity in terms of playability between the additional zone 2 and the special BB, the player must always add the number of ART games (see FIG. 57) whenever a player is paid out a medal and a winning combination is made. . In addition, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102) realizes the game effect from the effect side by displaying the same effect screen in the special BB as in the additional zone 2.

  Thus, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention, even if the bonus state is started in the additional zone 2, the additional zone 2 is continued without ending. Here, in the bonus state (special BB), since the replay and subsequent units do not win, the end lottery itself is not performed and the additional zone 2 is not ended. In addition, during the bonus state, the winning combination of the medals is always won, so it is easy to add the number of ART games, which is more advantageous than the additional zone 2. Thus, by making the bonus state in the additional zone 2 more advantageous, unlike the conventional pachislot machine that ends the additional zone due to the bonus in the additional zone, the interest in the additional zone 2 is further enhanced be able to.

  In addition, during the special BB, while making effect continuous with the additional zone 2, not the number of medals that can be paid out, but the number of remaining games for which the medals corresponding to the number of payoutable sheets will be paid out is displayed. From the player's point of view, the continuity from the gaming aspect and the presentation aspect is secured, so that the gaming nature as if the additional zone 2 continues can be provided to the player. Also, by replacing the end timing of the bonus state with the intuitively understandable display of the number of remaining games, it is possible for the player to have a feeling as if the additional zone 2 was guaranteed for 30 games. The fun of gaming can be enhanced.

<Back mode effect>
Further, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) accumulates the reverse mode when the game result is disadvantageous for the player, and when the accumulated reverse mode becomes 50 or more, the ART gaming state at the time of bonus winning (See FIG. 54). The pachi-slot machine 1 executes the back mode absorption effect that suggests that the back mode is accumulated, and when the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) accumulates the back mode, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102) However, partly overlaps and partly differs from the opportunity to execute the back mode absorption effect.

  In this way, the timing for performing the back mode absorption effect can be executed at a timing different from the timing for accumulating the back mode, so that the effect is executed at various timings different from the timing at which the back mode is actually accumulated. It is possible to have a variety of effects. In addition, since it is possible to increase the opportunity to perform the production while suppressing the opportunity to accumulate the back mode, it is possible to increase the variety of opportunities while suppressing the capacity on the main side (the opportunity to accumulate the back mode) to perform management related to the appearance. Effects can be executed, and the effects can be varied.

  Further, since the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102) performs the back mode absorption effect based on the back mode (the value of the main back mode counter−the value of the sub back mode counter) accumulated from the previous execution of the effect, The suggested back mode can be suggested appropriately.

<Character customization>
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention, the character used for the production can be customized. Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, in addition to the selection of the character, the character costume, the character accessory, and the character pose can be selected as the display mode of the character.

  In the pachislot machine 1, a range that can be combined for each of the costume, accessory, and pose is defined (see FIG. 64), and the character can be customized only within the defined range. When the player selects a part for which only one combination is specified as a combination that can be combined, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102) automatically selects the combination that can be combined with the part. decide. For example, when an accessory which can be combined with only a specific costume is selected, the specific costume is automatically selected and the selection of other costumes is prohibited.

  As a result, combinations that may damage the image of the gaming machine or the character can be made non-selectable, and the character can be customized without compromising the unique image. In addition, since the parts that can be combined are automatically determined, it is possible to customize the character without losing the unique image without requiring the player to spend time.

<Touch operation mode and button operation mode>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, by providing the touch sensor 111 on the liquid crystal display device 11, the entire surface of the liquid crystal display device 11 is used as a touch panel, and the input regarding the display of the pachi-slot machine 1 is made via the touch panel The touch operation mode and the button operation mode via the operation button 22 are received.

  The touch operation mode and the button operation mode can be switched only by the player performing the corresponding operation. For example, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102) switches from the touch operation mode to the button operation mode when the operation button 22 is operated in the touch operation mode, and from the button operation mode when the touch panel is operated in the button operation mode. Switch to touch operation mode. Thus, the player can freely select the operation mode he / she prefers, and can switch to the operation mode he / she desires in a simple manner.

(Difference between touch operation mode and button operation mode (unopened icon))
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, in the touch operation mode, it is clarified that an unopened icon cannot be determined from a plurality of icons by making it impossible to select an unopened icon (does not react even if touched). be able to. Also, in the button operation mode, by making an unopened icon selectable with the selection cursor, it becomes clear that this unopened icon cannot be determined at present but can be determined by being released in the future.

(Difference between touch operation mode and button operation mode (display under selection))
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the display mode of the icon being selected is made different between the touch operation mode and the button operation mode. Specifically, in the touch operation mode, the icon being selected is displayed with a touch on effect, and in the button operation mode, the icon being selected is displayed with a selection cursor to make the difference between the two operations clear. be able to.

<Easy start history display>
In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, for the player who did a formal login, the registration was performed by taking the formal steps by displaying the second page of the game history including the number of wins of the rare role. It is possible to give the player a bonus (display of the number of wins of the rare combination) that does not directly affect the game. As a result, it is possible to urge the player who wants to display the number of wins of the rare role to use the formal registration, and as a result, it is possible to give attachment to the gaming machine and raise the operation of the gaming machine.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 does not display the second page of the game history including the number of rare roles won for a player who has logged in by a simple procedure. It is possible to prevent the act of stealing the result of the other person's game after the other person has played the game.

<Insurance handling at the time of navigation error>
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, when the information received from the main side includes the information of the main navigation, the sub side determines whether or not the determined effect corresponds to the main navigation. If it is not a corresponding effect, the effect determined by lottery is forcibly rewritten to an effect corresponding to the main navigation. As a result, even if the effect suitable for the main navigation is not extracted for some reason, the effect on the sub can be rewritten to the effect suitable for the main navigation and executed. In both cases, the notification can be surely performed, and as a result, the player can surely receive the notification.

<Reel production using medal input>
In recent years, in order to prevent the game operation from the insertion of medals to the operation of the stop button as a series of flow tasks and becoming office-like, when the medals are inserted into the gaming machine, the symbol for effect of the sub reel When the start lever is operated and the start operation of the unit game is detected, a gaming machine is proposed that stops the rotation of the effect symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means. There is. However, there is a need to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented gaming properties that allows symbols to be rotated and stopped by operations other than the player's operations to make the winning combination predictable. .

  Therefore, the main control circuit 91 controls the effects using the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R. When the medals are stored (credited) in the credit number counter, the main CPU 93 controls the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Control the specific effect of stopping the symbols in at least one of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by a specific amount, and stopping it, and the result of the presence or absence of the privilege grant determined by the main control circuit 91 by the symbols that are changed by the specific amount Suggest.

  By doing so, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having an unprecedented game characteristic of rotating and stopping symbols and making it possible to predict a winning combination triggered by a storage operation (credit operation) of medals. it can.

Providing an Opportunity to De-Attend the Voice of a Favorite Character Using Uni-Memo
In recent years, a service that links the mobile phone and the dedicated site on the Internet to each other and provides the player with the game content (game history) from the start of the game to a certain point by the dedicated site ") Is known. Using this service, for example, the sub CPU 102 creates a game record QR code when an intermediate progress acquisition operation is performed, a recording end operation is performed, and the like, and the player uses a mobile phone to play a game By reading the recorded QR code and inputting the read information to a dedicated site on the Internet, it becomes possible to manage the game history of the player at the dedicated site.

  By the way, even if the effect on the gaming machine is switched to the next effect based on a predetermined trigger such as medal bet operation, start lever operation, or third stop operation, the speech of the character is in the middle of the line. May be forcibly terminated. As for vocal sounds and music sounds, the meaning of sound effects and BGM for displaying images is large and it takes a relatively long time, so there is no way to force it to end in the middle of vocal sounds or music sounds. There is also. On the other hand, the line sound of the character is relatively short, and if it is forcibly terminated despite being in the middle of the line, the line sound is cut off in the middle of the line to the player. It gives the impression that it has

  Therefore, a character selection operation is performed during a predetermined time after the unimemo menu is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 (S831, S832 in FIG. 116), and if the special password is correctly input within the predetermined time. (S833, S834 in FIG. 116), the special effect flag is set on (S835 in FIG. 116). Then, when a new effect is registered (S851 in FIG. 117), the effect update flag is set on (S852 in FIG. 117), and the sound data set process is executed (S872 in FIG. 118). In the sound data set process, the sub CPU 102 silences the sound that is different from the sound of the target character related to the selection operation (S895 in FIG. 119, S902 in FIG. 120). On the other hand, at least with regard to the effect of emitting the sound of the target character, the sub CPU 102 continues to emit sound without muting even if a new effect is registered (S895 in FIG. 119, S902 in FIG. 120). You may do it.

  As a result, for the voice of the character that the player likes, even if the effect on the pachislot machine 1 is switched to the next effect by registering a new effect, Sound is emitted. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachislot machine 1 in which the interest of the game is further enhanced.

<Direction effect by medal insertion>
Until now, a gaming machine has been proposed that can grasp that the player has shifted to the ART state by repeatedly hitting the player's own bet button. However, no gaming machine has been proposed in which a so-called continuous hit effect can be executed not only by a physical button operation but also by another operation, leading to an advantageous state for the player.

  Therefore, when the main control circuit 91 detects a medal storage signal while executing a predetermined effect, the sub control circuit 101 responds to the detected storage signal to produce a notification effect regarding provision of a benefit on the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like. You may enable it to control. For example, while the continuous hit effect flag is set to ON (S1056 in FIG. 125), the medal sensor (not shown) detects the credit operation of the medal (S1017 in FIG. 123) while the battle effect is being executed (S1017 in FIG. 123) When the CPU 102 receives the medal insertion command (YES in S1035 in FIG. 124), the sub CPU 102 controls the effect of notification regarding the provision of ART in the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like (S1095 in FIG. 127, etc.). ). Therefore, not only physical button operations but also other operations such as medal credit operations enable so-called continuous hit effects to be performed, leading to a state advantageous to the player, It is possible to provide a pachislot machine 1 having no new game characteristics.

<New relief function>
Until now, a gaming machine having a relief function for forcibly shifting to an advantageous state when the advantageous state is not performed for a long period of time is known. However, the device related to the relief function so far is relief by shifting the game state from the normal state to the advantageous state when the normal state that is not the advantageous state continues for a long time. Therefore, it is required to provide a new remedy means and to provide a variation in the treatment for preventing the player from receiving a great disadvantage.

  Therefore, a new relief means may be provided, and variations may be given to the relief function for preventing the player from receiving a large disadvantage.

  For example, in the normal gaming state (non-ART), the main CPU 93 sets the normal gaming state (non-ART) for each unit game in the normal gaming state (non-ART) regardless of the type of internal winning combination (flag A for lottery). It may be determined whether to shift to the first normal ART. Thereby, the transition from the normal gaming state (non-ART) to the first normal ART can be executed with a relatively small number of unit games.

  Then, in the first normal ART, when the internal winning combination (flag A for lottery) is a cherry (one of weak cherry, strong cherry, and determined cherry), the main CPU 93 executes the first normal ART to the second normal ART. You may decide to move to the normal ART of. Since the main CPU 93 makes the determination when the internal winning combination (flag A for lottery) is cherries, it is relatively rare that the main CPU 93 decides to shift from the first normal ART to the second normal ART. It is. Then, when the first normal ART is shifted to the second normal ART, the number of notification patterns A decreases from 1000 times to 32 times less, and if the unit pattern of notification pattern A is played 32 times, notification The unit game of the notification pattern B having a larger privilege than the pattern A can be executed. Thereby, when it is determined to shift to the second normal ART in the first normal ART, the number of games of the notification pattern A may be reduced to execute the unit game of the notification pattern B having a larger privilege. It will be possible.

  On the other hand, it is relatively rare for the main CPU 93 to decide to shift from the first normal ART to the second normal ART, and therefore, it is the first until the number of unit games of the notification pattern A reaches 1000 times. It may not be determined to move from one normal ART to the second normal ART. Even at such times, if the number of unit games of the notification pattern A reaches 1000, then the unit game of the notification pattern B having a larger bonus than the unit game of the notification pattern A is executed . Thereby, when the unit game of the notification pattern B is not executed for a long time, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if it is a relief function for forcibly executing the unit game having a privilege.

<Link of medal input and effects>
In recent years, in order to prevent the game operation from the insertion of medals to the operation of the stop button as a series of flow tasks and becoming office-like, when the medals are inserted into the gaming machine, the symbol for effect of the sub reel When the start lever is operated and the start operation of the unit game is detected, a gaming machine is proposed that stops the rotation of the effect symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means. There is.

  According to this configuration, in the sub reel, the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means is notified at the timing when the gaming operation is conventionally performed without any effect being performed. As a result, it is possible to notify the winning combination with impact, and the player can enjoy the performance on the sub reel with an unprecedented interest.

  However, there is no effect during the period from the insertion of the medal to the operation of the start lever, and even during such a period, some effect relating to the game is executed, and the unprecedented gameplay It is required to provide a gaming machine that is possessed.

  Therefore, even during the period from the insertion of the medal to the operation of the start lever, some effects relating to the game may be executable.

  For example, when a credit operation of medals is performed and the start lever 23 is operated, the sub CPU 102 starts from a plurality of types of medal images imitating medals (blue medal image, yellow medal image, red medal image) The medal image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 may be determined. Then, when the sub CPU 102 detects a medal credit operation, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11 to display a medal image of a color corresponding to the result of determination of the medal image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the medal. Depending on the color of the image, an effect following the effect of displaying the medal image may be controlled.

  Until now, even if the credit operation (storage operation) of the medal has been performed, a sound indicating that the medal has been credited (stored) is emitted or the number of credited medals is displayed by numbers I stayed at. According to the pachislot machine 1 described in the present modification, the medal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 regardless of the detection of the operation of the start lever 23 in response to the medal sensor detecting the credit operation of the medal. An effect of displaying a medal image is executed. Then, following the effect of displaying the medal image, an effect corresponding to the color of the medal displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is executed.

  From the player's point of view, even after the medals are credited and the start lever 23 is operated, the medals are not limited to being stored in a predetermined storage area triggered by the credits of the medals. The liquid crystal display device 11 can also be given an impression as if medals are stored. Then, at the stage of storage of medals, since lottery such as determination of a so-called internal winning combination is not performed, although notification of the lottery result can not be performed, following to the effect of displaying the image of medals, Depending on the color of the medal displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 by executing the effect according to the result of the determination of the presence or absence, a chance element that the effect by the specific character can be easily obtained Is granted.

  As a result, according to the pachislot machine 1 described in the present modification, effects relating to the game are executed even between the start of the insertion of the medal and the operation of the start lever 23, and the game characteristic unlike before is achieved. Can provide a gaming machine having

<Demonstration function by waiting time>
So far, the lottery of winning combination is mainly triggered by the detection of the start operation by the start switch. In addition, it has also been proposed to provide means for selecting one lottery timing from a plurality of lottery timings set in advance and means for determining an internal state by lottery performed at the selected lottery timing. For example, the control means of the gaming machine performs random number extraction (a) when the wait timer reaches 4.1 seconds, (b) when a medal is inserted, (c) the start lever is valid, and Perform three times when the start lever is operated. Then, the control means selects at which timing the extracted random number is to be used, and determines the internal winning combination using the selected random number.

  By providing a plurality of lottery timings, the timing of performing lottery (determination of a random number value) for determining the internal state becomes unclear, and it is difficult for the player to aim and acquire a random number to be a hit. Become. However, it still cannot be said that the diversity of performances related to games, such as notification of internal winning combinations, has been increased.

  Therefore, by linking the timing to decide whether to award the benefit and the effect on the game, a gaming machine can be provided which has more various effects on the decision result of the benefit grant including the notification of the internal winning combination. It is also good.

  For example, unlike the case where the start lever 23 is operated, the main CPU 93 further performs weight processing (S1311 in FIG. 145), lock processing at game start (S1312 in FIG. 145), and reel rotation start processing (FIG. 145). After S11) is executed, an internal lottery process (S4 in FIG. 145) is performed.

  When the timing at which the start lever 23 is operated is a timing before the predetermined time is reached from the timing at which the symbol variation display in the symbol display area 4 is started in the unit game before one unit game, The internal lottery process by the CPU 93 has not been executed yet. When the timing at which the start lever 23 is operated is a timing before the predetermined time is reached from the timing at which the symbol variation display in the symbol display area 4 is started in the unit game before one unit game, The internal lottery process by the CPU 93 has not been executed yet. Therefore, the internal lottery result cannot be notified on the information display 14. On the other hand, when it is the timing after the timing when the start lever 23 is operated reaches the predetermined time, the internal lottery processing by the main CPU 93 is executed. Therefore, the main CPU 93 can execute notification of the internal lottery result in the information display unit 14 (S1373, S1375, S1377 in FIG. 149).

  For the player, the internal lottery result determined approximately at the same time as the operation of the start lever 23 by waiting without operating the start lever 23 until the predetermined time elapses. The user operates the start lever 23 between the pattern for immediately receiving the notification and the time until the predetermined time elapses, and after waiting for the predetermined time to elapse after the start lever 23 is operated, the internal lottery result It becomes possible to receive two patterns of playability with the pattern of receiving notification of.

  According to such a pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to determine at the player's discretion whether to wait without operating the start lever 23 or not to wait until the predetermined time elapses. A pattern for immediately receiving notification of the result of the determination by the privilege giving determining means, and a pattern for receiving notification of the result of the determination by the privilege giving determining means after waiting for a predetermined time to elapse after the start operation is performed Can be changed. Therefore, by associating the timing at which the main CPU 93 executes the internal lottery process with the timing at which the effect relating to the game is executed, a gaming machine is provided in which the effects relating to the game including the notification of the internal lottery result are further diversified. be able to.

  In addition, the main CPU 93 may determine the game lock time, and may make the predetermined time longer or shorter (FIG. 144). Then, although I thought that I was on standby until the above predetermined time had elapsed, I did not actually stand by and could not immediately receive notification of the internal lottery result, or that the above predetermined time had elapsed. Although I could not wait and thought that the predetermined time did not actually pass, it actually waited until the predetermined time passed, and it was decided almost at the same time as operating the start lever 23 It may be possible to immediately receive notification of the internal winning combination that has been made. Therefore, more diversity can be added to the game.

  In addition, for the effects different from the notification of the internal lottery result in the information display 14, it is possible to provide a relatively long-time effect or a relatively short-time effect. become.

<Additional batting order change>
Up to now, various ideas have been made for the manner of reporting the number of added games. However, at present, it is difficult to frequently notify the number of unit games far apart from the number actually determined as the number of additional games as the number of additional games for notification, and it is still improved for notification of the number of additional games. There is room for

  For example, a unit game number larger than the actual top game number can be reported as the top game number for notification, and as the game progresses, the difference between the actual top game number and the top game number for notification is lowered. A gaming machine that can be suppressed may be provided.

  For example, the main CPU 93 determines whether to execute an ART. Then, the main CPU 93 determines the number-for-addition-lottery determination table (FIG. 151), the normal ART middle-of-the-lot zone lottery table (FIG. 38), the number-of-ART-over-game number lottery table (FIG. 152), and the number-of-over-games lottery table With reference to FIG. 40) and the like, an additional period indicating the degree of extension of the period during which ART is provided is determined (S215 to S218 in FIG. 64). Then, the sub CPU 102 refers to the additional game number informing determination table (FIG. 153) and determines an initial value of an informing informing period to be notified by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like based on the additional period determined by the main CPU 93 S1333 of FIG. 156).

  As shown in FIG. 157, when the extra period is determined, a plurality of display areas (left area 11L, left display area) on the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like that can display numbers corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, respectively. In the middle area 11C and the right area 11R), initial values determined by the sub CPU 102 (for example, “0”, “3”, “0”) are displayed in the order of the left area 11L, the middle area 11C, and the right area 11R. Ru. A plurality of display areas (left area 11L, middle area 11C and right) are displayed in separate display areas (another area 11D) capable of displaying numbers separately from the display areas (left area 11L, middle area 11C and right area 11R). A number displayed in a display area (left area 11L) displaying a number corresponding to a digit (third digit) larger than the number of digits (two digits) of the initial value "30" of the notification superimposing period in the region 11R) Displayed in a display area (middle area 11C) that displays a number larger than (“0”) and that corresponds to the same digit (second digit) as the number of digits (two digits) of the initial value “30” of the notification superimposing period A number ("1") smaller than the number to be displayed ("3") is displayed.

  When the main CPU 93 determines the lottery flag C as “2” (push order bell) as the internal winning combination subsequent to the determination of the overlay period by the main CPU 93, the first stop operation among the plurality of display areas , Stop buttons 19L and 19C for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the correct answer of the pressing order bell on the active line (the symbol combination corresponding to “bell” in the symbol combination table (FIGS. 10 to 12)). , 19R, the numerals displayed in the display areas 11L, 11C, 11R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are replaced with the numerals displayed in the separate area 11D.

  The display area corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided corresponding to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R for stopping the combination of predetermined symbols on the effective line in the first stop operation is the notification overlay period If the display area (left area 11L) displays a digit corresponding to a digit (third digit) larger than the initial value digit number (2 digits), it is larger than the initial value digit number of the extra period for notification. The number corresponding to the digit is replaced with a number ("1") that is larger than the originally displayed number ("0"). Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that the overtaking period may be greatly extended in response to the decision that the pressing bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, and in fact, the notification mode in the notification means is By changing, it is possible to receive an impression that the overlay period has greatly increased, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

  On the other hand, the display areas corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided corresponding to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R for stopping a predetermined symbol combination on the active line in the first stop operation are informed. When the display area (middle area 11C) displays a number corresponding to the same number of digits (second digit) as the initial number of digits for the extra period (second digit), the liquid crystal display device 11 indicates “ Along with the display of “press”, the number (“3”) corresponding to the same digit number as the initial value of the notification addition period is replaced with a number (“1”) smaller than the originally displayed number. Therefore, as the game progresses, the difference between the actual number of additional games and the number of additional games for notification can be reduced.

  In addition, since the effect of extending the superimposing period in the liquid crystal display device 11 is made by changing a number corresponding to a digit that is larger than the initial digit number of the notification superimposing period, the player can see that the superimposing period is longer. I can receive the impression that it has greatly extended. On the other hand, the effect that the superimposing period is shortened in the liquid crystal display device 11 is achieved by changing a number corresponding to the same digit number as the initial value of the notification superimposing period. The impression that it is smaller than the extent of the extra period is smaller than the extension of.

<Status confirmation function>
When the game store is closed, if the game status stored in the game store is not updated at all, the game status at that stage is carried over to the next business day. For example, it is assumed that the game situation stored inside is a game situation advantageous to the player, such as during a so-called bonus flag, during a sign, during a chance zone rush, during a high probability of winning a specific internal winning combination internally. The player who plays immediately after the opening of the next business day will be given an advantageous situation. For game stores, it is desirable to avoid the appearance of many players who enjoy the above-mentioned advantageous situation in store operations.

  When the pachislot machine 1 recovers from power interruption for a predetermined time or more (for example, at the time of opening of a game shop) in order to prevent the occurrence of a stationary state of game information (the number of digested games, etc.) at the time of opening the game shop. It has been proposed to automatically perform the same initialization process as the initialization process performed when the setting change command is received, when the power is turned on.

  However, in consideration of the management aspect of the store, it is desirable to give the player the merit of playing immediately after the store opening and to operate the store at a high operation rate immediately after the store opening. In that sense, it is preferable not to initialize all the gaming machines uniformly, but to leave a manual element that allows the gaming shop side to select a gaming machine to be initialized and a gaming machine not to be initialized.

  However, the initialization process is a burdensome task for game arcade staff, and it is desirable to reduce the burden of the initialization process as much as possible.

  Therefore, when a specific operation including the operation of a door key provided on an openable door is performed, a bonus flag, a sign, a chance zone, a high probability medium, etc. When the game information is not the initial value, a notification unit that notifies the fact may be provided.

  For example, in the liquid crystal display device 11 or the speaker group 65L, 65R, etc., when the specific operation (operation of twisting the door key while pressing the MAX bet button 21) is performed, the predetermined game information is not the initial value (the game state is the chance zone , ART gaming state, when either of the bonus state, when the front mode is either high-speed short, high-speed long, or when the back mode is a lottery small, during lottery, lottery large, special The notification according to the setting change suggestion effect data is executed (see FIG. 162).

  The specific operation includes the operation of a door key provided on the openable door (see FIG. 160). Since the player can not operate the door key, the player can not perform the specific operation and can not receive notification according to the setting change suggestion effect data. Thereby, it can prevent that a specific player becomes advantageous.

  In addition, the store clerk at the game arcade basically performs the setting value change operation for the pachislot machine 1 notified of by the liquid crystal display device 11 and the speaker groups 65L and 65R, etc., and the game information stored in the main RAM 95 Since it is not necessary to initialize the game information for all the pachislot machines 1 as long as it is initialized to an initial value, it is possible to reduce the burden of the initialization.

  In addition, the game information is not initialized uniformly to all the pachislot machines 1 notified by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the speaker group 65L, 65R, etc. The pachislot machine 1 to be initialized and the pachislot machines not to be initialized The manual element which can select the machine 1 with the game store side is left. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the merit of playing immediately after the store opening, and it is possible to increase the operation rate of the store immediately after the store opening.

<Initial ART game number hidden function>
Until now, various devices have been made to the notification mode of the number of ART-added games. For example, in the ART mode, there is an effect method for giving a notice effect of the number of games added for each opportunity to increase the number of games, and not for notifying the number of games added for each time the number of games added, but at the end of the ART mode. It has been proposed to provide an effect method for notification and to allow the player to arbitrarily select these effect methods.

  Also, for example, in a unit game in a special gaming state, whether or not to execute a privilege granting effect that grants a privilege when the timing of the stop operation for the variable display of symbols in the display sequence is within a corresponding predetermined time range. While deciding, as a bonus, the bonus giving effect determining means capable of deciding the predetermined adding unit game number of the notification game, and the predetermined adding unit number of games determined by the benefit giving effect determining means is equal to or less than the prescribed adding unit game number. In some cases, it does not notify specific information that suggests a predetermined addition unit game number, and suggests a predetermined addition unit game number if the predetermined addition unit game number is greater than a prescribed addition unit game number A gaming machine has been proposed that includes addition number suggestion effect execution means for notifying specific information.

  However, when the "prescribed addition unit game number" which is the reference of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is large, the notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is hardly performed, and therefore the interest of the game can be enhanced I can't say that. On the other hand, in order to increase the frequency of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means, the notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is made by decreasing the “prescribed addition unit game number” as the reference of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means. The value of the game will be reduced, and this also cannot enhance the fun of gaming. Therefore, a game machine capable of performing notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means at a high frequency even after increasing the "prescribed addition unit game number" which is the reference of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means Is required.

  In order to solve this problem, the main CPU 93 of the pachislot machine 1 determines whether to apply ART, and when it is determined, enables transition to an ART gaming state in which ART can be applied. Then, in the ART gaming state, additional periods indicating the degree of extension of the ART period are determined, and when determined, additional zones 1 to 3 are provided to extend the period of the ART.

  Here, for the first addition zone 3, the addition period determined by the main CPU 93 (50 games added by the process of S1512 in FIG. 164 and the number of addition games determined by lottery of S291) is added While being added as a number and stored in an ART game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 103, the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like has an additional period of 50 games, which is shorter than the additional period determined by the main CPU 93. The effect according to the informing effect data of the addition is executed (S1634 in FIG. 170), and the ART game number unannounced counter provided in the sub RAM 103 is the liquid crystal display device 11 from the addition period actually determined by the main CPU 93. Period reported as an additional period in 0 Game ") is the difference obtained by subtracting the stored as non-alarm plus period.

  Also, for the second and subsequent additional zones, regardless of the type of the additional zone, the additional period determined by the main CPU 93 is added and stored in the ART game number counter provided in the sub RAM 103, while the number of additional games is added. When the special notification flag is on, the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like does not notify the additional period determined by the main CPU 93, and is stored in the ART game number unannounced counter as an unannounced additional period (S1614 in FIG. 169). S1637 in FIG. 170).

  Then, the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like notifies that 100 games have been added for the ART period when the unreported addition period stored in the ART game number non-notification counter becomes 100 games or more (FIG. 169). S1616, S1639 of FIG. 170).

  According to such a pachislot machine 1, it is possible to reliably store the unannounced addition period in the ART game number unannounced counter at least for the first time when the addition zone starts. For this reason, even if the reference period for the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like is set to a relatively long period of 100 games, the unreported extra period is set in the ART game number non-notification counter at the first time of the extra zone. Compared to the conventional pachislot machine which can not be reliably stored, the frequency of the unannounced additional period becoming 100 games increases. Even if the reference period of information in the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like is set to a relatively long period, notification that the ART period has been added can be performed at a high frequency, and the interest of the game is enhanced. Is possible.

<Game after the end of ART>
With regard to the gaming machine having the ART function, the mode selection lottery means uses the mode selection lottery table constituted of the same kind of data at the time of setting change and at the end of ART gaming by the limiter It has been proposed to select a mode. According to such a pachislot machine, the AT transition lottery mode is selected in the same process as the setting change after the state advantageous to the player of AT game ending by the limiter occurs, so for example, at the setting change A more advantageous ART transition lottery mode is selected at the end of AT game, and after the ART game is over, the player has an excessive expectation that the ART game right is re-granted by the notification lottery means in a short period of time It is possible to prevent the rise.

  However, in such a pachislot machine, there is a possibility that the interest of the game after the ART game is diminished.

  Therefore, a plurality of modes (low accuracy, high accuracy short, high accuracy long) with different expected transition degrees to ART are provided, and the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the ART profit granting counter is 3000 or more (S1734 in FIG. 174). In the case of YES in this process, the limiter operation flag is set to ON (S1735 in FIG. 174), and the mode information is updated to the “low probability” mode having the lowest expected transition to ART (S1752 in FIG. 175). . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of anticipation to shift to ART again in a short period of time in the game after the profit awarded in ART reaches 3000 medals.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the table mode transition lottery number determination table (FIGS. 21 and 172) and the table mode transition lottery table (FIG. 22) to change from the current mode (low accuracy mode) to another mode ( Determine whether to update to high probability short or high probability long). At that time, the table mode transition lottery number determination table (FIG. 172) referred to when the limiter is operated is different from the other table mode transition lottery number determination table (FIG. 21). 9 "is selected. And in the table mode transition lottery table (FIG. 22), the table mode transition lottery number "9" is another table mode transition lottery number "0" to "2", "5" to "8", Compared to “10” and “11”, the update expectation level for updating to an expectation mode (high-accuracy short, high-accuracy long) with a high transition expectation from the normal gaming state to the ART gaming state is set. Therefore, the main CPU 93 determines to update from the low probability mode with low update expectation to the high mode (expected mode: high probability short, high probability long) with high frequency. If the mode is updated to the expectation mode, the transition expectation degree in which the gaming state shifts to the ART gaming state is increased, and as a result, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even after the end of awarding of the benefit by ART. It becomes.

  Therefore, according to such a pachislot machine 1, even after the end of the game to which the privilege is given, while preventing the player from being given an excessive expectation that the privilege will be granted again in a short period of time, It is possible to provide a pachislot machine 1 that can maintain the interest of

[Supplementary Note 1]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 1 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in JP 2009-178510, in recent years, a plurality of cells are provided, and a predetermined effect is given to each of the plurality of cells, and an image according to the effect given to the cells There is known a gaming machine that has a game like Sugoroku by displaying the symbol on the square.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to imagine the subsequent development of the game from the image displayed on the square, so that the interest of the game can be improved, but the displayed image is not suitable for the player. If it is profitable, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be reduced, and further improvement has been demanded.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having game characteristics that do not impair the interest of the game.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). The reel display window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 79) for detecting a start operation by the player, and detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) that changes the symbol by rotating and the start operation detection means, the internal winning symbol is selected from a plurality of roles with a predetermined probability. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining a combination and a stop operation for stopping each reel provided for the plurality of reels. Based on the stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, stop switch board 80) to be performed, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. The reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the reel stop control means Whether or not the internal symbol combination determined by the internal symbol combination determination unit wins based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol display unit when the variation of the symbol is stopped A prize determination unit (for example, the main control circuit 91) that determines a plurality of reward information (for Remuneration information setting means (for example, main control circuit 91) for setting one piece of reward information from among the current game and a predetermined number of games ahead of the game, and reward information When grant conditions are satisfied in the set game, reward granting means (for example, main control circuit 91) for granting a reward according to the reward information set for the game, and each of the plurality of reward information A plurality of images including an individual image (for example, display cell “enemy”) provided in association with each other and a common image (for example, display cell “unknown”) provided in common for all of the plurality of reward information. Display means for storing a predetermined image based on a plurality of reward information set for the plurality of games by the storage means (for example, the ROM cartridge substrate 86) and the reward information setting means. Means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, the sub-control circuit 101) and operation receiving means (for example, the operation button 22) for receiving a predetermined operation, and the display means is configured to perform the predetermined operation by the operation receiving means. Is not received, an individual image corresponding to the reward information set by the reward information setting unit is displayed in association with each of the plurality of games, and the predetermined operation is performed by the operation receiving unit. If accepted, the common image is displayed in association with each of the plurality of games regardless of the reward information set by the reward information setting means.

  According to such a gaming machine, when reward information is set for a plurality of games by the reward information setting means, basically, an individual image corresponding to the set reward is displayed. Displaying such individual images is preferable because the player can imagine the development of the subsequent game. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a predetermined operation is received, not the individual image corresponding to the reward to be provided, but a common image common to all regardless of the reward is displayed. Thereby, even if it is a case where the reward information which is not advantageous for the player with respect to the subsequent game is set, the player cannot imagine the subsequent game from the displayed common image. . As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the reward information is set, it is possible to switch between an individual image for which the set reward can be easily grasped and a common image for which the set reward is difficult to grasp. The display can be made in accordance with the preference of the player, and it is possible to realize the playability without impairing the interest of the game.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the predetermined operation is accepted by the operation accepting means, the display means is displayed in association with the current game among the plurality of games. The common image is switched to an individual image corresponding to reward information set for the current game and displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, for a game after the current game, it is difficult to grasp the reward given by displaying the common image, while for the current game, the common image to the individual image By switching to and displaying, it is easy to grasp the reward given. As described above, by concealing the content of the reward by the common image until immediately before, and making it possible to grasp the content of the reward by the individual image immediately before, it is possible to enhance the playability of the current game. As a result, even if it is not preferable for the player to develop the subsequent game, it is possible to enhance the overall gameplay without the player being aware of the development of the subsequent game.

[Supplementary Note 2]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in JP 2009-178510, in recent years, a plurality of cells are provided, and a predetermined effect is given to each of the plurality of cells, and an image according to the effect given to the cells There is known a gaming machine that has a game like Sugoroku by displaying the symbol on the square.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to imagine the subsequent development of the game from the image displayed on the square, so that the interest of the game can be improved, but the displayed image is not suitable for the player. If it is profitable, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be reduced, and further improvement has been demanded.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having game characteristics that do not impair the interest of the game.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. And a plurality of reels (eg, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (eg, a reel display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 79) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the reel by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. Among the plurality of combinations, based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means and the pattern change means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) which changes the design An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability, and a stopping operation provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stopping operation for stopping each reel The detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stop switch board 80), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) for stopping change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping rotation of the reel, and change of the symbol by the reel stop control means The internal winning combination is determined based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line provided in the symbol display means when the symbol is stopped. A prize determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that determines whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the means has been won, and a reward game (remuneration) that rewards when the predetermined start condition is satisfied in the advantageous state For example, game control information (e.g., event) including a reward game start means (e.g., the main control circuit 91) for starting the additional zone 1) and a plurality of reward information items corresponding to different rewards during the reward game. Setting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for setting one game control information from among the plurality of games from the current game to a predetermined number of games ahead, and the game control information is set Reward game control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) which controls the game based on the game control information set for the game when the award condition is satisfied in the played game In the game in which the reward game control means is set to the first game control information (for example, the event space "red"), a specific number of times (for example, the number of guarantee games) from the start of the reward game When a predetermined combination (for example, a replay or less win) is determined to be an internal winning combination after the game is played, the reward game is ended, while a specific number of games are played after the reward game starts. Even if a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination before, it continues without ending the corresponding reward game, and the first reward information (for example, event mass "blue 1", etc.) is granted conditions in the game in which the setting is For example, if the player wins the bell or more, the duration of the ongoing advantageous state is extended, and the second reward information (for example, the event space "Chara 4") is set in the game provided with conditions (for example, bell or later If the winning game is satisfied, the reward game re-setting right (for example, resurrection stock) is granted, and the reward game start means is in the situation where the re-setting right is granted, the first game control information reward information The reward game is resumed when the reward game is terminated based on the above.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the game control information is set for a plurality of games during the reward game, the player can imagine the development of the game thereafter, which is preferable. In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, even if the first game control information is set as an end timing of the reward game, until a specific number of games are performed after the reward game is started. The reward game continues without ending. Thereby, even if the disadvantageous game control information (first game control information) is set, the reward game will continue during the specified number of games (ie, the guarantee period), Even in a situation where the later game becomes unfavorable development, unfavorable development can be avoided during the guarantee period, and a certain interest can be secured. In addition, even after the guarantee period has passed, if the user is given the right to re-set, which is a reward according to the second reward information, the reward game is resumed at the end of the game, so the interest of the game can be reduced. It can be further increased.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, at the start of the reward game, a plurality of mode information (for example, additional zone level) having different selection expectation degrees of the game control information set for each of the plurality of games. The system further comprises mode setting means for setting one of the mode information, and the reward information setting means is configured to set the second mode information (eg, if the first mode information (eg, the additional zone level 3) is set). The first game control information is selected as the one game control information with a lower probability than when the extra zone level 1) is set, and the mode setting means is configured to select the reward game based on the reset right. In the case of resuming the first mode information as the one mode information with a higher probability than starting the reward game based on the predetermined start condition Characterized in that it constant.

  According to such a gaming machine, when resuming a reward game based on the re-set right, the first mode information is set with a higher probability than when starting a reward game based on a predetermined start condition. Since this first mode information is mode information that has a low probability of selecting the first game control information that triggers the end of the reward game, when the reward game is restarted based on the reset right, the predetermined start condition is satisfied. The reward game is harder to finish (easier to continue) than when starting the reward game based on that. As a result, not only the reward game is resumed at the end but also the resume game itself is more likely to continue than usual when it has been granted the re-set right, further enhancing the interest of the game. Can.

[Supplementary Note 3]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in JP 2009-178510, in recent years, a plurality of cells are provided, and a predetermined effect is given to each of the plurality of cells, and an image according to the effect given to the cells There is known a gaming machine that has a game like Sugoroku by displaying the symbol on the square.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to imagine the subsequent development of the game from the image displayed on the square, so that the interest of the game can be improved, but the displayed image is not suitable for the player. If it is profitable, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be reduced, and further improvement has been demanded.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having game characteristics that do not impair the interest of the game.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. And a plurality of reels (eg, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (eg, a reel display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 79) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the reel by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. Among the plurality of combinations, based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means and the pattern change means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) which changes the design An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability, and a stopping operation provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stopping operation for stopping each reel The detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stop switch board 80), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) for stopping change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping rotation of the reel, and change of the symbol by the reel stop control means The internal winning combination is determined based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line provided in the symbol display means when the symbol is stopped. When the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the means has been won and the first start condition (for example, the stock of the extra zone 1) is satisfied, the reward is When the first reward game starting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for starting the first reward game to be granted (for example, the additional zone 1) and the second start condition (for example, the stock of the additional zone 2) are satisfied, A second reward game starting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for starting a second reward game (for example, the extra zone 2) that gives more rewards than the first reward game, and the first reward game or During the second reward game, one reward information from among a plurality of reward information (event mass) with different associated rewards, and each of a plurality of games from the current game to the first game ahead. Against If the reward information setting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the reward information are set in the game for which the reward information is set, the reward corresponding to the reward information set for the game is granted. Reward giving means (for example, main control circuit 91), and the reward giving means is a predetermined role (for example, bell) in a game in which first reward information (for example, event mass “back”) is set. If the above is determined as an internal winning combination, a right to transfer from the first reward game to the second reward game (for example, stock in the extra zone 2) is granted, and second reward information is set. When a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the game being played, the right to rewrite the set reward information to the first reward information (for example, rewrite to the back cell by the number of back cell conversions) And the reward information setting means rewrites the reward information set for the game for the second number of times after the next game to the first reward information when the rewrite right is granted. The second reward game starting means starts the second reward game when the transfer right is granted.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the reward information is set for a plurality of games during the reward game, the player can imagine the development of the subsequent game, which is preferable. Here, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the grant condition is satisfied in the game in which the second reward information is set, the reward information set for the game for the second number of times thereafter is the first reward information. If the grant condition is satisfied in the game in which the first reward information is set, the second reward game in which more rewards can be expected is started. Therefore, when it is possible to obtain a reward according to the second reward information, in the subsequent second number of games, the transition expectation to the second reward game where more reward can be expected is increased. Become. As a result, even if the subsequent development of the game is unfavorable for the player, it is possible to avoid the unfavorable situation by obtaining the remuneration according to the second remuneration information. Be done. At this time, the condition for granting the reward according to the reward information is that the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and therefore, compared to the case where the reward according to the reward information can be obtained without fail. The frequency of rewriting (the frequency of appearance of the second reward information) can be increased, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the reward information setting means sets the second reward information for every third number of games in the first notification game.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the second reward information is set at a predetermined interval (every third count) during the first notification game, during the first notification game, the first reward information is periodically made. The chance of rewriting will come. If a reward corresponding to the second reward information can be obtained at this regular opportunity, the degree of expectation of transition to the second reward game in which more rewards can be expected in the subsequent games will increase. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

[Appendix 4]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 4 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine that notifies information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss an internal winning combination. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this way is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, the period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine. With regard to such AT machines (ART machines), Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-050611 discloses a gaming machine provided with an additional specialization zone in which the continuation period of AT is added.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In gaming machines equipped with such an extra special zone, the duration of the AT can be extended during the extra special zone, so that the interest during the AT can be improved. When another advantageous state such as a bonus starts, the special additional zone may be interrupted, and there is a problem that water is added to a situation in which the interest is improved.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not impair the interests of extra games.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a notification gaming state (for example, ART gaming state) for notifying information of stop operation advantageous for the player as a state for playing a game and a normal state (for example, normal gaming state) for not notifying. A gaming machine having a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels) Reel display window 4), start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 79) for detecting start operation by the player, and rotating the reel based on detection of start operation by the start operation detection means Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means and the pattern change means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) which changes the symbol by An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of winning combinations, and provided for each of the plurality of reels, for stopping each reel A stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stop switch board 80) for detecting the stop operation, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means, and the stop operation detection means Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) for stopping fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping rotation of the reel based on timing and the reel stop Based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line provided on the symbol display means when the variation of the symbol is stopped by the control means A prize determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that determines whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means has been won, and a predetermined combination (for example, a winning combination for bonus) by the prize determination means If it is determined that the player has won a prize, bonus start means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for starting the bonus state, and if the number of gaming media exceeding the specified number is granted during the bonus state, When the bonus ending means (for example, the main control circuit 91) to be ended and a predetermined start condition (for example, stock of the additional zone 2) are satisfied, the continuation state of the notification game state is extended (for example, the additional zone 2) ) To start the addition state (for example, the main control circuit 91), and when the bonus state is started during the addition state, the addition state is terminated. If the additional control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) to be continued and the medal giving combination to which the game medium is provided during the additional state is determined as the internal winning combination, the duration of the notification game state is extended. Addition control means (for example, main control circuit 91) and display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 11, sub-control circuit 101) for displaying an effect screen according to the current state, the internal winning combination determining means During the bonus state, the medal awarding party is determined as the internal winning combination with a high probability compared to the state other than the bonus state, and the display means is in the bonus state started in the state other than the additional state. A bonus effect screen according to a bonus state, the bonus effect screen displaying a remaining number of payouts obtained by subtracting the number of game media provided during the bonus state from the prescribed number. In the additional state, the additional effect screen according to the additional state is displayed, and in the bonus state started during the additional state, the additional effect screen displayed in the additional state is maintained, It is characterized by displaying the number of games required to be provided with the specified number of game media.

According to such a gaming machine, even if the bonus state is started during the added state, the added state is continued without ending. Here, in the bonus state, since the medal granting party serving as an opportunity to extend the duration is determined as the internal winning combination with a high probability during the added state, the bonus state started during the added state is more than the normal added state. Also, it can be used as a special added state in which the duration is easily extended. As a result, the bonus state in the added state can be made more advantageous, so that the situation in the added state can be further enhanced without putting water into the situation as in the prior art.
Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, during the bonus state started in a state other than the additional state, while displaying the bonus effect screen unique to the bonus state, while in the bonus state started in the additional state, In order to maintain the additional effect screen according to the added state, it is possible to grasp at a glance that the added state continues. At this time, while the bonus effect screen displays the remaining number of payouts up to the specified number serving as an end trigger of the bonus state, the additional effect screen displays the number of games required to be provided with the specified number of game media. indicate. Thus, not only the effect screen is different between the bonus effect screen and the additional effect screen, but also the display of the end condition of the bonus state is different from the normal bonus state, the bonus in the normal bonus state and the additional state. The display can be differentiated from the state, and a special game characteristic can be given to the bonus state in the added state. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, in a state other than the additional state, the progress of the game is temporarily stopped at the start and end of the bonus state, while the bonus state is started in the additional state. And a game control means (for example, main control circuit 91) that does not stop the progress of the game at the end.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the progress of the game is temporarily stopped at the start and end of the bonus state in the state other than the additional state, it is possible to provide a period for the start effect and the end effect of the bonus state, Diversity of production can be ensured. On the other hand, since the progress of the game is not stopped at the start and end of the bonus state in the additional state, the continuity of the additional state before and after the bonus state can be secured. By controlling the progress of the game in accordance with the situation where the bonus state starts, various game characteristics can be realized.

[Appendix 5]
The pachislot machine 1 of appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  Further, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-261547 discloses a gaming machine provided with a plurality of continuous effects for notifying whether transition to a state advantageous to a player or provision of an advantage advantageous to a player is performed or not. It is done. In such a gaming machine, a ratio to be selected for a plurality of continuous effects is determined in advance, and based on this ratio, a continuous effect with high expectation and a continuous effect with low expectation can be provided, It is expected to improve the fun of gaming.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in such a gaming machine, it is possible to discriminate to some extent between a continuous production with a high degree of expectation and a continuous production with a low degree of expectation, from the tendency that a continuous production is performed as the gaming experience increases. Therefore, when a low-expected continuous performance is executed, the player not only plays a game without any expectation, but also when a high-expected continuous performance is executed, When an advantageous privilege is not given against the degree of expectation, there is a problem that the interest of the game is greatly reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a decrease in interest when a player is at a disadvantage.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). The reel display window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 79) for detecting a start operation by the player, and detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) that changes the symbol by rotating and the start operation detection means, the internal winning symbol is selected from a plurality of roles with a predetermined probability. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining a combination and a stop operation for stopping each reel provided for the plurality of reels. Based on the stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, stop switch board 80) to be performed, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. The reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the reel stop control means Whether or not the internal symbol combination determined by the internal symbol combination determination unit wins based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol display unit when the variation of the symbol is stopped Winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) which determines the game result, and the result of the game becomes an adverse outcome for the player. When the point accumulation means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for accumulating points (for example, the back mode) and the internal points accumulated in the point accumulation means reach a predetermined value, a privilege advantageous for the player (for example, a bonus) A bonus granting unit (for example, main control circuit 91) that grants an ART lottery at the time of winning a prize and an effect suggesting that internal points have been accumulated in the point accumulating unit (eg, back mode absorption effect) are executed. Effect execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, the sub-control circuit 101), wherein the effect execution means includes a result of the game that triggers the point accumulation means to accumulate internal points. The effect can be executed triggered by at least a partial result, and the result of the game is that the point storage means accumulates internal points It is characterized in that the effect can be executed at an opportunity (for example, at the time of a continuous effect failure) to become a result different from the effect which is an opportunity.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the internal points accumulated when the result is unfavorable for the player reaches a predetermined value, a privilege advantageous to the player is given. At this time, when internal points are accumulated, effects are produced to indicate that effect, so even if the adverse results are continuous, depending on the accumulated amount of internal points suggested from the effects, It is possible to have a sense of expectation for the game, and it is possible to reduce a decrease in the interest of the game due to an adverse result. In particular, by performing an effect that suggests that an internal point has been accumulated with an opportunity different from an opportunity to accumulate an internal point, an effect is performed at various timings different from the timing when an internal point is actually accumulated. It can be done, and it can give variety to the production. This point can be particularly expected in recent gaming machines in which the main side must strictly manage the game. That is, in order to provide a benefit advantageous to the player when the internal points reach a predetermined value, the storage of the internal points is related to the balls being dispensed, and the main side has to be managed, but the capacity on the main side is limited. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress the opportunity to accumulate internal points. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the effect can be executed with a trigger different from the trigger for accumulating the internal points, the main side capacity (that is, the trigger for accumulating the internal points) is suppressed. The presentation can be performed with various occasions, and the presentation can be diversified.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the point accumulating unit accumulates the internal points and the production executing unit does not produce the production, the accumulated internal points are accumulated and calculated as a difference point. A difference calculating means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101), and the effect executing means is based on the difference point calculated by the difference calculating means when the result of the game is a trigger that can execute the effect. The effect is executed, and the difference calculating means clears the difference point when the effect is executed by the effect executing means.

  In such a gaming machine, since the internal points are accumulated when the effect is not executed even though the internal points are accumulated, the internal points accumulated between the effects can be calculated as the difference points. . As described above, when the performance is performed at a different timing from the opportunity to accumulate the internal points, the internal points of the previous game and the internal points of the current game are compared. Cannot suggest properly. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the production suggesting that the internal points have been accumulated is executed based on the cumulative number of internal points accumulated since the previous production execution. Appropriate internal points can be suggested.

[Appendix 6]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 6 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  Also, in recent years, a game machine has also been proposed in which the player selects a character appearing in the effect from among a plurality of characters, and performs the effect using the selected character, as disclosed in JP-A 2014-207997. A gaming machine is disclosed in which a character or a costume or the like of the character can be selected in accordance with the operation of the player.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, since the appearing characters can be set (customized) according to the player's preference, the interest of the game can be improved and the game can be made less tired. However, if the player can freely select the character's costume, etc., there may be a setting that does not match the specifications of the gaming machine or the motif of the character, which may damage the image of the gaming machine or the character. .

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of customizing a character without losing a unique image.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a symbol display means (for example, a reel display window 4) for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols, and a symbol change means (for example, main control) for changing the symbol based on establishment of a start condition. Circuit 91, stepping motor), internal lottery means (for example, main control circuit 91) for performing internal lottery based on the establishment of the start condition, and stopping the variation of the symbol based on the lottery result of the internal lottery means When the change of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) to be stopped and the stop control means, based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means A game control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for controlling the progression, and a character determination means (for example, the sub control circuit 1) for determining one character out of a plurality of types of characters 1) and first display mode determination means (for example, for example) for determining one piece of first display mode information out of a plurality of first display mode information (for example, accessories) according to the display mode of the character The sub-control circuit 101) and the plurality of second display mode information (for example, costumes) different from the first display mode information relating to the display mode of the character are used to select one second display mode information based on a selection operation Second display mode determination means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) to determine automatically or automatically and characters determined by the character determination means are determined by the first display mode determination means and the second display mode determination means Display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11 and the sub control circuit 101) for displaying in a mode according to the combination of the first display mode information and the second display mode information, and the first display mode A combination defining unit (for example, a sub control circuit 101) for defining the type of second display mode information that can be selected in combination with the first display mode information with respect to the information; The second display mode determination means defines only the specific second display mode information in the second display mode information as the second display mode information that can be combined with the specific first display mode information, When the specific first display mode information is determined by the first display mode determining means, the specific second display mode information is automatically determined as the one second display mode information. .

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can select a combination of the first display mode information (accessory) and the second display mode information (costume) with respect to the character display mode. It can be customized according to the player's preference. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, second display mode information that can be combined with the first display mode information is defined in advance, and only specific second display mode information is defined as information that can be combined. When the first display mode information (specific first display mode information) is selected by the player, the specific second display mode information that can be combined only is automatically determined. As a result, combinations that may damage the image of the gaming machine or the character can be made non-selectable, and the character can be customized without compromising the unique image. Also, when the specific first display mode information is selected by the player, the unique second display mode information that can be combined is automatically determined, so that the player does not have to take time and effort. You can customize the character without losing its image.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second display mode determination means is a second display mode in which the predetermined second display mode information different from the specific second display mode information is based on the selection operation. When the first display mode determination means determines the first display mode information, the second display mode information is automatically selected as the second display mode information. It is characterized by determining automatically.

  According to such a gaming machine, even if the second display mode information has already been determined by the player, the first display mode information (specific first display mode information) is then selected by the player. In the case where it is determined, only the specific second display mode information that can be combined is automatically determined. As described above, even when the player's selection is accepted, the character is automatically customized without changing the player's image, because the display mode information can be automatically switched to the only combination, and the customization of the character does not impair the unique image. Becomes possible.

[Appendix 7]
The pachislot machine 1 of appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  Also, in recent years, a game machine has also been proposed in which the player selects a character appearing in the effect from among a plurality of characters, and performs the effect using the selected character, as disclosed in JP-A 2014-207997. A gaming machine is disclosed in which a character or a costume or the like of the character can be selected in accordance with the operation of the player. According to such a gaming machine, the appearing character can be set (customized) according to the preference of the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved and the game can be made less likely to get bored.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in order to further enhance the effect of customization, it is preferable to provide more options, such as increasing selectable items or increasing types that can be selected in each item. In this respect, in the above-described gaming machine, the player's selection operation is accepted through the operation button such as the cross key or the determination button, but in the gaming machine, the cross key or the determination button is an additional operation unit Basically, there is a problem that the operability is poor and the selection operation becomes troublesome as the number of options increases.

  In recent years, in order to enable intuitive operation, a touch panel capable of touch operation may be provided in a gaming machine, but a player does not like such intuitive operation. There are also many people who are intuitive, and when it is not possible to intuitively understand the operation method, there is a problem that it is difficult to convey the operation method by means of a video or the like.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a selection operation by a method suitable for a player.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a symbol display means (for example, the reel display window 4) for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols, and a symbol variation means (for example, main control) for varying the symbol based on the establishment of the start condition. Circuit 91, stepping motor), internal lottery means (for example, main control circuit 91) which performs internal lottery based on satisfaction of the start condition, and stop the fluctuation of the symbol based on the lottery result of the internal lottery means Stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91, stepping motor), and when the change of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, based on the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means, the game Game control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress, and a touch panel (for example, liquid crystal display device 11, touch sensor 1) that accepts touch operations on icons. 1) and an operation button (e.g., operation button 22) for receiving a move operation for the selection cursor and a determination operation for determining an icon selected by the selection cursor, and a plurality of icons in the operation via the touch panel The open icon can not be selected while the unopened icon can not be selected, and in the operation via the operation button, the open cursor and the unopened selection cursor move based on the move operation Both icons can be selected.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the selection operation can be performed by both the operation through the touch panel and the operation through the operation button, the player performs the selection operation according to the method he / she prefers. be able to. In addition, in the operation via the touch panel, it is possible to make it clear that the unopened icon can not be determined from the plurality of icons by not selecting the unopened icon, that is, not responding even when touched. it can. In addition, in the operation via the selection button, the unopened icon can also be selected by the selection cursor, that is, the unopened icon can not be determined currently but is released in the future by allowing the selection cursor to be aligned. It becomes clear that it can be determined.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game machine moves based on a touch operation mode for determining one icon selected by a touch operation via the touch panel from among a plurality of icons, and a movement operation via the operation button. In a situation where the selection cursor selects one icon, one operation mode is determined from a button operation mode for determining the one icon among a plurality of icons based on the determination operation via the operation button An operation mode determining unit (for example, the sub control circuit 101) is further provided, and the operation mode determining unit performs the moving operation or the determination operation via the operation button in a situation where the touch operation mode is determined as the operation mode. When accepted, the operation mode is switched from the touch operation mode to the button operation mode, and as the operation mode In situations which determines the serial button operation mode, when receiving a touch operation through the touch panel, and switches the operation mode from the button operation mode to the touch operation mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, the operation mode includes a touch operation mode in which one icon is determined by a touch operation on an icon, and a button operation mode in which one icon is determined by moving a selection cursor. These operation modes are automatically switched by accepting an operation corresponding to each operation mode (specifically, when a touch operation is accepted in the button operation mode, the button operation mode is switched to the touch operation mode, and the touch operation mode When a button operation is accepted from time to time, the operation mode is switched easily from the touch operation mode to the button operation mode), and the player can freely select the operation mode he / she prefers.

[Appendix 8]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 8 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  Also, in recent years, a game machine has also been proposed in which the player selects a character appearing in the effect from among a plurality of characters, and performs the effect using the selected character, as disclosed in JP-A 2014-207997. A gaming machine is disclosed in which a character or a costume or the like of the character can be selected in accordance with the operation of the player. According to such a gaming machine, the appearing character can be set (customized) according to the preference of the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved and the game can be made less likely to get bored.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in order to further enhance the effect of customization, it is preferable to provide more options, such as increasing selectable items or increasing types that can be selected in each item. In this respect, in the above-described gaming machine, the player's selection operation is accepted through the operation button such as the cross key or the determination button, but in the gaming machine, the cross key or the determination button is an additional operation unit Basically, there is a problem that the operability is poor and the selection operation becomes troublesome as the number of options increases.

  In recent years, in order to enable intuitive operation, a touch panel capable of touch operation may be provided in a gaming machine, but a player does not like such intuitive operation. There are also many people who are intuitive, and when it is not possible to intuitively understand the operation method, there is a problem that it is difficult to convey the operation method by means of a video or the like.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a selection operation by a method suitable for a player.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a symbol display means (for example, the reel display window 4) for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols, and a symbol variation means (for example, main control) for varying the symbol based on the establishment of the start condition. Circuit 91, stepping motor), internal lottery means (for example, main control circuit 91) which performs internal lottery based on satisfaction of the start condition, and stop the fluctuation of the symbol based on the lottery result of the internal lottery means Stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91, stepping motor), and when the change of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, based on the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means, the game Game control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress, and a touch panel (for example, liquid crystal display device 11, touch sensor 1) that accepts touch operations on icons. 1), an operation button (for example, the operation button 22) for receiving a movement operation for the selection cursor and a determination operation for determining an icon to be selected by the selection cursor, and an icon being selected by a touch operation via the touch panel. Display control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) that displays in one mode and displays an icon being selected by a selection cursor in a second mode different from the first mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the selection operation can be performed by both the operation through the touch panel and the operation through the operation button, the player performs the selection operation according to the method he / she prefers. be able to. In addition, by making the display mode of the icon being selected differ between the touch operation and the button operation, specifically, the icon being selected is the first mode (for example, with a touch ON effect) at the touch operation. In the button operation mode, by displaying the icon being selected in the second mode (with a selection cursor, for example), the difference between the two operations can be made clear.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game machine moves based on a touch operation mode for determining one icon selected by a touch operation via the touch panel from among a plurality of icons, and a movement operation via the operation button. In a situation where the selection cursor selects one icon, one operation mode is determined from a button operation mode for determining the one icon among a plurality of icons based on the determination operation via the operation button An operation mode determining unit (for example, the sub control circuit 101) is further provided, and the operation mode determining unit performs the moving operation or the determination operation via the operation button in a situation where the touch operation mode is determined as the operation mode. When accepted, the operation mode is switched from the touch operation mode to the button operation mode, and as the operation mode In situations which determines the serial button operation mode, when receiving a touch operation through the touch panel, and switches the operation mode from the button operation mode to the touch operation mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, the operation mode includes a touch operation mode in which one icon is determined by a touch operation on an icon, and a button operation mode in which one icon is determined by moving a selection cursor. These operation modes are automatically switched by accepting an operation corresponding to each operation mode (specifically, when a touch operation is accepted in the button operation mode, the button operation mode is switched to the touch operation mode, and the touch operation mode When a button operation is accepted from time to time, the operation mode is switched easily from the touch operation mode to the button operation mode), and the player can freely select the operation mode he / she prefers.

[Supplementary Note 9]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 9 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  Also, in recent years, as shown in JP-A-2014-207997, a gaming machine that cooperates with a mobile phone or a smartphone owned by a player is also known. In such a gaming machine, when the result of a game is coded and displayed, and the code is read by a mobile phone or the like, the read result of the game is stored in the server via the mobile phone. Then, when the next game is performed, a password corresponding to the accumulated game result is issued from the server, and the password is input to the gaming machine, so that information such as the previous game effect history is restored and continued. You can play games from.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some players are not interested in taking over the production history from the previous game, and may be interested only in the results of the game in the current game. Such a player does not need to take over. It feels bothersome to ask for password issuance and input for purposeful production history. Therefore, in recent years, without taking over the production history from the previous game, for players who are only interested in accumulating the results of the current game, the password entry is omitted and the accumulation of the game results is started. There has also been proposed a gaming machine having a function of easy start.

  However, if the password is omitted, authentication at the server is not necessary, and anyone can perform a simple start, which may lead to an undesirable situation. Specifically, it is possible to set a simple start for a gaming machine that does not play a game, and after another person plays a game on the gaming machine, the history of the game can be seen from behind. There was a need for further improvements regarding easy start.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an act of stealing the history of a game played by another person.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a symbol display means (for example, a reel display window 4) for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols, and a symbol change means (for example, main control) for changing the symbol based on establishment of a start condition. Circuit 91, stepping motor), internal lottery means (for example, main control circuit 91) for performing internal lottery based on the establishment of the start condition, and stopping the variation of the symbol based on the lottery result of the internal lottery means When the change of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) to be stopped and the stop control means, based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means Game control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress, history management means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for managing a game history indicating the result of the game, and the history management means A first history screen (for example, the first page of the game history) that displays a first game history that is a part of the game history managed by the first game history and a second game history that is different from the first game history. Display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) that displays a plurality of display screens including two history screens (for example, the second page of the game history), and display control means (for example, sub-control) that controls the display of the display means Circuit 101) and a first registration procedure (for example, a formal registration procedure) or a game in which a game is played by a second registration procedure (for example, a simple registration procedure) that is simpler than the first registration procedure. Registration receiving means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for accepting the registration of the person, and when the display control means accepts registration by the first registration procedure, the first game history and the Second game history While the display of the display means is controlled to be able to display the direction, when the registration is accepted by the second registration procedure, the first game history can be displayed and the second game history is displayed. The display of the display means is controlled impossible.

  According to such a gaming machine, in order to accept registration of a player who performs a game through a first registration procedure and a second registration procedure that is simpler than the first registration procedure, the player is officially following the procedure. Registration and simple registration requiring only a simple procedure. In this case, when the registration is accepted in the first registration procedure, both the first game history and the second game history can be displayed while the registration is accepted in the second registration procedure. Although the first game history can be displayed, the second game history can not be displayed. As a result, when using simple registration, only a part of the game history can be viewed, so it is possible to prevent an act of stealing the game result of another person using the simple registration. In addition, for players who have bothered to register officially, a privilege (displaying the second game history) that does not directly affect the game is given to promote the use of official registration. As a result, attachment to the gaming machine can be given, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

[Supplementary Note 10]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 10 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057332, information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss the winning combination determined in recent years. There is known a gaming machine which reports to a player. In addition, informing the information that the player is advantageous in this way is generally referred to as navigation (performing navigation) or the like, the period in which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, the superiority or inferiority of the game occurs with or without the navigation, so that it is possible to realize the gameability that cannot be obtained only by the simple role lottery, but as a premise to adopt the AT function, It is necessary to design to ensure navigation enjoyment. However, there are cases where proper navigation cannot be performed when some kind of error occurs, and countermeasures for such cases are required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which a player can surely enjoy navigation.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). Reel display window 4), a main control unit (for example, main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of the game, a sub-control unit (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the game-related effects, and a game-related effect. Production execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) to be executed, and the main control unit, start operation detection means (for example, the main control circuit 91, start switch 79) for detecting the start operation by the player, On the basis of detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, symbol changing means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) for changing the symbol by rotating the reel, Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, a plurality of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be stopped and displayed according to the order of the stop operation when determined as an internal winning combination. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including a pressing order combination, and provided for each of the reels. Stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, stop switch board 80) for detecting a stop operation for stopping the operation, internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and stopping by the stop operation detecting means Based on the timing at which the operation is detected, the reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel. (For example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) and a combination of symbols stopped on an effective line provided in the symbol display means when the variation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means. The winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won, and the internal winning combination determining means determines that the push winning combination is an internal winning combination. When it is determined as a combination, instruction information determination for determining instruction information (for example, contents of the main-side navigation) uniquely indicating the order of the stop operation for stopping and displaying the first symbol combination on the effective line. Means (for example, main control circuit 91), instruction information notifying means (for example, information display 14) for notifying instruction information determined by the instruction information determining means, and the sub-control unit When the game information is related to the progress of the game and the instruction information is determined by the instruction information determination means, notification means (for example, main control circuit 91) for notifying game information including the instruction information; The sub-control unit includes, based on the game information acquired from the main control unit, effect determination means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that determines an effect to be executed by the effect execution means by lottery. When the instruction information is acquired from an effect control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) that executes the effect determined by the effect execution means by the effect execution means and the main control unit, the effect determination is performed. Determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for determining whether or not the effect determined by the means is an effect corresponding to the instruction information acquired from the main control unit; The effect determining means, when the determining means determines that the effect is not an effect corresponding to the instruction information, notifies the determined operation of the stop operation order that the instruction information uniquely indicates the determined effect. It is characterized by rewriting the production to be performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when notifying the order of the stop operation on the main (main control unit) side, the main control unit includes instruction information in the game information to be notified to the sub side (sub control unit) To notify the game information. In order to determine the effect to be executed based on the game information acquired from the main side by lottery in the sub control unit, basically when the instruction information is included in the game information, it was basically in accordance with the notification on the main side Although the effect is to be determined, there may be a case where the effect that matches the notification on the main side can not be determined due to some error. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, if the game information received from the main side includes instruction information (information content of the main side), is the determined effect an effect corresponding to the instruction information? If it is not a corresponding effect, the effect determined by lottery is forcibly rewritten to an effect corresponding to the instruction information. As a result, even if the effect that matches the notification on the main side has not been extracted for some reason, the effect on the sub side can be rewritten to the effect that matches the notification on the main side and executed. Notification can be performed reliably in both subs, and as a result, the player can reliably receive the notification.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the pressing order includes a first pressing order and a second pressing order, and the effect corresponding to the instruction information is uniquely indicated by the instruction information. It is an effect of informing the order of the stop operation in a color according to the type of the pressing order, and the effect determining means of the sub control unit is not an effect whose effect corresponds to the instruction information by the determining means If it is determined that the effect is determined, the order of the stop operation in which the instruction information uniquely indicates the order of the stop operation, the first color according to the first push order and the second push order It is rewritten with the effect notified with the third color different from any of the second colors according to the above.

  According to such a gaming machine, when an effect suitable for the notification on the main side is lottery, on the sub side, the order of the stop operation uniquely indicated by the instruction information is set according to the type of the push forward role. However, if for some reason an effect that matches the notification on the main side is not randomized, the order of the stop operations that the instruction information uniquely indicates corresponds to any of the push forwards. Notification with no color (third color). In this way, it is possible to prevent erroneous notification of the type of pressing order when an error occurs (when the effect matching the notification on the main side is not extracted for some reason).

[Supplementary Note 11]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 11 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2009-153759, in recent years, the game operation from the insertion of medals to the operation of the stop button is performed as a series of flow operations, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming administrative When a medal is inserted into the machine, the sub-reel effect symbol starts rotating, the start lever is operated, and when the start operation of the unit game is detected, based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means A gaming machine has been proposed which stops the rotation of the effect symbol. In the sub reel, the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means is notified at the timing when the game operation is conventionally performed officearily without performing any effect.

  According to this configuration, in the sub reel, the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means is notified at the timing when the gaming operation is conventionally performed without any effect being performed. As a result, it is possible to notify the winning combination with impact, and the player can enjoy the performance on the sub reel with an unprecedented interest.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In the configuration described in JP 2009-153759 A, after the start of the rotation of the effect symbol on the sub reel, the effect symbol to be rotated is stopped at once by the operation of the start lever. Therefore, this is an unprecedented game in which the symbol is rotated and stopped every time some operation is performed by the player during the game, not just at the timing at which the start lever is operated, so that the winning combination can be predicted successively. It is required to provide a gaming machine having a character.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having new game characteristics.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Bet means capable of betting the gaming value in response to detection of a betting signal of gaming value (eg, main control circuit 91, BET switch);
A plurality of symbol display sections capable of variably displaying and stopping displaying a plurality of symbols (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, reel display window 4),
Symbol variation means for variably displaying the symbols when a first number of gaming values are bet by the bet means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 79);
Privilege giving determination means for determining whether to give a privilege (for example, main control circuit 91);
Rendering means which is provided on the same body as or separately from the symbol display portion and capable of performing rendering according to the result of the determination by the privilege giving means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and reel display window 4, liquid crystal display device 11),
Production control means for controlling the production by the production means (for example, main control circuit 91, sub-control circuit 101),
Storage means capable of storing the game value in response to detection of the storage signal of the game value (eg, main control circuit 91, credit number counter);
With
When the game value of the second quantity is stored in the storage unit, the effect control unit causes the symbols in at least one of the plurality of symbol display units to change by a specific amount and stop the symbols. Control the specific production,
According to the design in which the specific amount is changed, the result of determination by the privilege grant determination means is suggested.
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the effect control means for controlling the effect by the effect means is at least one of the plurality of symbol display units when the second quantity of game value is stored in the storage means. The control of the specific effect of stopping the symbol in the symbol display portion by a specific amount is controlled, and the result of the determination by the privilege giving determining means is suggested by the symbol whose specific amount is changed.

  This provides a gaming machine with an unprecedented gaming property that allows a design value to be rotated and stopped by using a game value storage operation as a trigger, and that the result of the determination by the privilege grant determination means can be predicted. Can.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
In the specific effect, the game value of the second quantity is stored in the storage unit until the symbol indicating the result of determination by the privilege grant determination unit is stopped and displayed in the plurality of symbol display units. Is executed every time
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, as an effect to be executed by the effect means, among the plurality of symbol display units, first, a game value is stored for an operation of changing and stopping a symbol on at least one display unit by a specific amount. Every time the game is performed, it is performed until the symbol indicating the result of the determination by the privilege giving determination means is stopped and displayed, and thereafter, the game value stores the operation of changing the symbol in the other display unit by a specific amount and stopping it. Every time it is done, it is carried out until the symbol indicating the result of the determination by the award determination means is stopped and displayed. Therefore, with the game value storage operation as a trigger, the design is rotated and stopped in multiple times, and the result of determination by the privilege granting means can be predicted step by step, which has an unprecedented gameability Can be provided.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
Bet means capable of betting the gaming value in response to detection of a betting signal of gaming value (eg, main control circuit 91, BET switch);
A plurality of symbol display sections capable of variably displaying and stopping displaying a plurality of symbols (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, reel display window 4),
Symbol changing means for variably displaying the symbols when a predetermined operation including betting of the first quantity of game value is performed by the betting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 79) ,
Privilege giving determination means for determining whether to give a privilege (for example, main control circuit 91);
Rendering means which is provided on the same body as or separately from the symbol display portion and capable of performing rendering according to the result of the determination by the privilege giving means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and reel display window 4, liquid crystal display device 11),
Production control means for controlling the production by the production means (for example, main control circuit 91, sub-control circuit 101),
Storage means capable of storing the game value in response to detection of the storage signal of the game value (eg, main control circuit 91, credit number counter);
With
The effect control means performs control of a specific effect according to a result of the determination by the privilege grant determination means when the game value of the second quantity is stored in the storage means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the effect control means for controlling the effect by the effect means responds to the result of the determination by the privilege grant determining means when the second value of the game value is stored in the storing means. Control specific effects.

  As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having an unprecedented game characteristic that makes it possible to predict the result of the determination by the privilege giving determination means, triggered by the storage operation of the game value.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having an unprecedented game characteristic in which it is possible to predict the result of the determination by the privilege giving determination means, triggered by the storage operation of the game value.

[Supplementary Note 12]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 12 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  Also, as disclosed in JP-A-2016-047152, in recent years, in a informable game, a music sound output that causes a music output unit to output a music sound composed of vocal sound and accompaniment sound that are sung voices And a line sound output means for outputting a line sound, which is a sound containing the character's line, from the sound output means in a game within a predetermined period that allows notification by the notification means. ing. In this gaming machine, the sound output control means outputs the vocal sound, the accompaniment sound and the speech sound to the sound output means through separate channels when the output of the music sound and the output of the speech sound are simultaneously performed. And, the volume of the vocal sound is set smaller than the volume when the output of the music sound and the output of the dialog sound are not simultaneously performed.

  In this gaming machine, for example, since the volume of the navigation voice sound output from the upper left speaker and the upper right speaker is set to be lower than the predetermined volume, the volume of the navigation voice sound is set to the predetermined volume In comparison, music sounds are easier to hear. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the production by sound and enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, localization of the sound can be made different from that in the case where the volume of the navigation voice output from the left speaker and the upper right speaker is set to a predetermined volume. Therefore, it is possible to easily listen to both the navigation voice sound output from the lower left speaker and the lower right speaker and the music sound output from each speaker.

  Also, for example, the sound of a vocal sound, an accompaniment sound, a speech sound, an SE sound (Sound Effect sound, sound effect sound that is appropriately output in a game effect) included in sound data acquired in a specific simulated bonus Data is input to separate channels, and vocal sounds, accompaniment sounds, dialogue sounds, and SE sounds are set to be output from separate speakers.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In the configuration described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-047152, it is possible to prevent the sound of music and speech from being difficult to hear due to vocal sounds, and to enhance the effects of the sound and enhance the interest of the game Can. However, if the effect on the gaming machine is switched to the next effect based on a predetermined trigger such as a so-called medal bet operation, start lever operation, or third stop operation, the character's line sound is in the middle of the line. It may be forcibly terminated regardless of this.

  As for vocal sounds and music sounds, the meaning of sound effects and BGM for displaying images is large and it takes a relatively long time, so there is no way to force it to end in the middle of vocal sounds or music sounds. There is also. On the other hand, the line sound of the character is relatively short, and if it is forcibly terminated despite being in the middle of the line, the line sound is cut off in the middle of the line to the player. It gives the impression that it has Therefore, further improvement has been demanded for the speech sound of the character when the effect on the gaming machine is switched to the next effect based on a predetermined opportunity.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is desirable to avoid cutting off the speech of the character of the character when switching the effect on the gaming machine to the next effect based on a predetermined opportunity. Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of gaming is further enhanced.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising: a plurality of symbol variation means capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols; and a game control means for controlling the progress of a game using the symbol variation means,
Effect means for executing effects during a game (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, the speaker group 65L, 65R),
Production control means for controlling the production by the production means (for example, the sub CPU 102),
Selected character information storage means capable of storing information of at least one target character selected from a plurality of types of characters used in the effect (for example, the sub RAM 103);
With
The effect control means is
When a predetermined opportunity is reached, with regard to an effect different from the effect of the object character and an effect of displaying the image of the object character, while controlling the effect means to end,
At least for the effect of outputting the voice of the target character, the effect means is controlled to continue to be executed even when the predetermined trigger occurs.
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the effect control means for controlling the effect in the effect means, when the predetermined trigger occurs, an effect different from the effect of at least one target character selected from the plurality of types of characters, And for the effect of displaying the image of the target character, the effect means is controlled to end. On the other hand, the effect control means controls the effect means so as to continue executing at least the effect of emitting the sound of the target character even when the predetermined trigger occurs.

  As a result, with regard to the voice of the character preferred by the player, even if the effect on the gaming machine is switched to the next effect based on the predetermined opportunity, the sound is output to the end without ending halfway. Ru. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of gaming is further enhanced.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The predetermined opportunity includes a case where a second effect start command signal for instructing start of a second effect following the first effect being executed by the effect means is detected,
Based on the predetermined timing, the effect control means
Controlling the effect means to start the execution of the second effect,
At least for the effect of outputting the voice of the target character, even if the execution of the second effect is started, the effect means is controlled to be continuously executed.
It is characterized by that.

  If voices of all characters are allowed to be output according to a predetermined opportunity, various sounds (not only voices of characters but all sounds including vocal sounds and music sounds) in the next effect starting with the opportunity can be output. ), And the voice may not be identified. According to such a gaming machine, since the voice that continues to perform the production is narrowed down to the voice of the favorite character selected by the player even when a predetermined opportunity occurs, various voices are confused with each voice. It is possible to prevent the situation that can not be identified.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The production means includes sound output means (for example, speaker groups 65L and 65R) for outputting sound,
The production control means has a plurality of channels for outputting sound signals to the sound output means (for example, sound data sending channel A, sound data sending channel B),
A plurality of the plurality of channels are provided for each of the first character, the second character, and the music different from the voice of the character (for example, a plurality of types of channels provided in sound data transmission channel A, sound data transmission channel B) Provided multiple channels),
The predetermined opportunity includes a case where a second effect start command signal for instructing start of a second effect following the first effect being executed by the effect means is detected,
In the first effect, the effect control means outputs the sound signal of the first character, the second character, and the first effect of the music to the sound output means via separate first channels. And
Based on the predetermined timing, the effect control means
Stopping the output of the sound signal of the characters other than the target character and the first effect of the music,
Continuing to output the sound signal of the target character in the first effect to the sound output means via the first channel provided for the target character;
Starting output of the first character, the second character, and the sound signal of the music in the second effect to the sound output means via separate second channels;
It is characterized by that.

  If voices of all characters are allowed to be output according to a predetermined opportunity, various sounds (not only voices of characters but all sounds including vocal sounds and music sounds) in the next effect starting with the opportunity can be output. ), And the voice may not be identified. According to such a gaming machine, since the channel that continues to output the voice even when a predetermined opportunity occurs, the channel for outputting the voice of the favorite character selected by the player is narrowed down. It is possible to prevent the situation where the voices are mixed up and the voices can not be identified.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, when the effect on the gaming machine is switched to the next effect based on a predetermined opportunity, it is possible to avoid the character's dialogue sound being cut off in the middle, and as a result, the interest of the game is further enhanced. Can be provided.

[Supplementary Note 13]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 13 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  Also, as shown in JP-A-2014-028193, in recent years, when transition to the ART gaming state is determined, the liquid crystal display device prompts the player to continuously hit the bet button for a predetermined time. When a display is performed and the number of consecutive bet buttons by the player is 20 or more, a special identification signal indicating transition to the ART state is output to the outside through the external terminal board while the player It has been proposed that the output of the special identification signal is not performed if the number of consecutive bet buttons is less than 20.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to grasp that the player has shifted to the ART state by repeatedly hitting the player's own bet button, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, no gaming machine has been proposed which enables so-called double hit effects to be executed by operations in other forms as well as physical button operations, leading to an advantageous state for the player.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and enables so-called continuous hit effects to be executed not only by physical button operations but also by operations in other forms, which is advantageous for the player. It is an object to provide a gaming machine having a new playability of connecting.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of executing a game when a predetermined number of game values are bet,
Privilege grant determining means for determining whether to grant a privilege (for example, main control circuit 91 capable of granting ART),
Production means capable of performing production (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11);
Production control means for controlling the production of the production means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101),
Storage means capable of storing the game value in response to detection of the storage signal of the game value (for example, a credit number counter);
With
If the storage control means detects the storage signal while executing a predetermined performance, the performance control means controls the rendering of notification regarding the provision of the benefit in the performance means according to the storage signal detected.
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the storage means detects a game value storage signal during execution of the predetermined effect, the effect control means notifies the user about the provision of the privilege in the effect means according to the detected storage signal. Control the production. Therefore, not only physical button operation, but also the operation in other forms, such as storage in the storage means of game value, it is possible to perform so-called repeated hitting effects, leading to a state advantageous to the player, It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new game characteristics which have never been seen before.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The effect control means controls an effect of notification regarding provision of the benefit in the effect means according to the number of times the storage signal is detected during execution of the predetermined effect.
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, not only physical button operations, but also continuous storage in other forms, such as continuous storage in gaming value storage means, so-called continuous hitting effects can be performed, A gaming machine with newer gaming characteristics can be provided in that it leads to an advantageous state for the player.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The predetermined effect is a repetitive striking effect that prompts a user to continuously perform a predetermined operation (for example, physical button operation) within a predetermined time.
The production control unit controls the production of the notification related to the provision of the privilege in the production unit according to the number of times the storage signal is detected during execution of the continuous hit production.
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player himself or herself can perform continuous operation in another form such as continuous storage of gaming value in storage means as well as physical button operation. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with newer gaming characteristics in that it leads to an advantageous state.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming characteristics that can be connected to an advantageous state for a player through not only physical button operations but also operations in other forms.

[Appendix 14]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of appendix 14 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  By the way, if the advantageous state advantageous to the player is not performed for a long period of time, the disadvantage that the player receives will be significantly increased. Therefore, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rescue function that forcibly shifts to an advantageous state if the advantageous state is not performed for a long period of time.

  Several contrivances have been made for the relief function. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113195, when winning a transition lottery performed when the state of playing a game is ART non-winning, in a gaming machine which shifts the state during ART non-winning to ART winning. When determining the winning probability indicating the probability of winning in the transition lottery, the value indicated by the RT game number counter, which counts the number of unit games from the non-ART winning to the ART winning, is subtracted from the predetermined number It has been proposed to determine the reciprocal of the remaining number as the winning probability.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the device related to the relief function so far is relief by shifting the game state from the normal state to the advantageous state when the normal state that is not the advantageous state continues for a long time. Therefore, it is required to provide a new remedy means and to provide a variation in the treatment for preventing the player from receiving a great disadvantage.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and provides a new remedy and a gaming machine having variations in the relief function for preventing the player from receiving a large disadvantage. The purpose is

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is
The first gaming state (for example, normal gaming state (non-ART)), the second gaming state (for example, first normal ART) and the third gaming state (for example, second normal ART) A gaming machine having
A plurality of symbol display sections capable of variably displaying and stopping displaying a plurality of symbols (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, reel display window 4),
An internal winning combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations (for example, the main control circuit 91),
Symbol variation means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) for fluctuating display of the above symbols;
A plurality of stop operation means provided corresponding to the plurality of symbol display portions and receiving a stop operation for stopping the fluctuation display of the symbols (for example, stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R);
Stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display section in accordance with the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the main control circuit 91 , Stepping motor),
Privilege giving means (eg, main control circuit 91) for giving a privilege according to the display mode of the symbols to be stopped and displayed by the stop control means;
In the first gaming state, first transition determining means for determining whether to shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state and (for example, refer to the ART lottery number determination table and the ART lottery table according to the modification) The main control circuit 91) for lottery or non-winning of the ART.
Second transition determining means for determining whether to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state in the second gaming state (for example, by winning the cherries from the first normal ART to the second normal ART Transitioning main control circuit 91),
With
In the second gaming state, a predetermined unit game (for example, the notification pattern A) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times), and then the bonus for receiving the privilege is compared with the predetermined unit game. It is in a state where a notification game (for example, notification pattern B) with a high probability of notifying the operation sequence or operation timing of a plurality of stop operation means is performed,
The third gaming state is a state in which the predetermined unit game is performed a specific number of times (for example, 32 times) smaller than the predetermined number of times, and then the notification game is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the first gaming state, the first transition determining means determines whether to shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

  Then, in the second gaming state, the second transition determining means determines whether to transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state. When the second gaming state is shifted to the third gaming state, the number of predetermined unit games decreases from the predetermined number of times to a smaller specific number of times, and the predetermined number of unit games is performed the specific number of times, the predetermined unit game As compared with the above, it is possible to execute a notification game having a high probability of notifying the operation order and the like of the plurality of stop operation means for receiving the award of the benefit. Thereby, in the second gaming state, when it is determined to shift to the third gaming state, it is possible to reduce the number of times of the predetermined unit game and execute a unit game having a larger bonus.

  On the other hand, it may not be determined to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state until the number of predetermined unit games reaches the predetermined number. Even at such time, if the number of predetermined unit games reaches a predetermined number, then the above-described notification game is executed. As a result, when the notification game is not executed for a long time, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if it is a rescue function that forcibly executes the notification game.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The first transition determining means determines, for each unit game in the first gaming state, whether to transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state regardless of the type of the internal winning combination,
The second transition determining means determines whether to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state when the internal winning combination is a predetermined internal winning combination.
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the first gaming state, the first transition determining means determines from the first gaming state to the second gaming state regardless of the type of the internal winning combination for each unit game in the first gaming state. Decide what to move to Thereby, the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state can be executed with a relatively small number of unit games.

  Then, in the second gaming state, the second transition determining means determines whether to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state when the internal winning combination is a predetermined internal winning combination. Since the second transition determining means performs lottery when the internal winning combination is a predetermined internal winning combination, it is relatively rare to determine that the second transition determining means transitions to the third gaming state. When the second gaming state is shifted to the third gaming state, the number of predetermined unit games decreases from the predetermined number of times to a smaller specific number of times, and the predetermined number of unit games is performed the specific number of times, the predetermined unit game As compared with the above, it is possible to execute a notification game having a high probability of notifying the operation order and the like of the plurality of stop operation means for receiving the award of the benefit. Thereby, in the second gaming state, when it is determined to shift to the third gaming state, it is possible to reduce the number of times of the predetermined unit game and execute a unit game having a larger bonus.

  On the other hand, since it is relatively rare to determine that the second transition determination is to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state, the second gaming state is performed until the predetermined number of unit games reaches the predetermined number. It may not be determined that the game state is shifted to the third gaming state. Even at such time, if the number of predetermined unit games reaches a predetermined number, then the above-described notification game is executed. As a result, when the notification game is not executed for a long time, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if it is a rescue function that forcibly executes the notification game.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a new relief means is provided and the relief function for preventing the player from receiving a great disadvantage is provided with variations.

[Supplementary Note 15]
The pachislot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 15 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2009-153759, in recent years, the game operation from the insertion of medals to the operation of the stop button is performed as a series of flow operations, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming administrative When a medal is inserted into the machine, the sub-reel effect symbol starts rotating, the start lever is operated, and when the start operation of the unit game is detected, based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means A gaming machine has been proposed which stops the rotation of the effect symbol. In the sub reel, the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means is notified at the timing when the game operation is conventionally performed officearily without performing any effect.

  According to this configuration, in the sub reel, the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means is notified at the timing when the gaming operation is conventionally performed without any effect being performed. As a result, it is possible to notify the winning combination with impact, and the player can enjoy the performance on the sub reel with an unprecedented interest.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In the configuration described in JP 2009-153759 A, after the start of the rotation of the effect symbol on the sub reel, the effect symbol to be rotated is stopped at once by the operation of the start lever. However, there is no effect during the period from the insertion of the medal to the operation of the start lever, and even during such a period, some effect relating to the game is executed, and the unprecedented gameplay There is a need to provide a gaming machine that has it.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and even during the period from when a medal is inserted until the start lever is operated, some effects relating to the game are executed, and unprecedented game performance is achieved. The purpose is to provide a game machine with it.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of executing a game when a predetermined number of game values are bet,
Bet means capable of betting the gaming value in response to detection of a betting signal of gaming value (eg, BET switch 77);
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by a player (for example, start switch 79);
Production means capable of performing production (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11);
Production control means for controlling the production of the production means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101),
Game value image determining means for determining a game value image to be displayed on the effect means from a plurality of types of game value images representing the game value (for example, the sub control circuit 101);
Storage means capable of storing the game value in response to detection of the storage signal of the game value (for example, a credit number counter);
With
The effect control means is
Controlling the effect means to display a game value image according to the result of the determination by the game value image determining means when the storage signal is detected;
According to the result of the determination by the game value image determining means, controlling the effect by the effect means following the effect of displaying the game value image,
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game value image determining means determines a game value image to be displayed on the effecting means from a plurality of types of game value images representing the game value. Then, the effect control means controls the effect means to display the game value image according to the result of the determination by the game value image determining means when the storage signal is detected, and the result of the determination by the game value image determining means In response, the effect by the effect means following the effect of displaying the game value image is controlled.

  Until now, even if the game value is stored, a sound indicating that the game value has been stored is emitted, or the number of stored game values is only displayed in numbers. According to the gaming machine of the present invention, in response to the detection of the game value storage signal, an effect is displayed that causes the effect means to display a game value image representing the game value regardless of the detection of the start operation. Be done. Then, following the effect of displaying the image of the game value, the effect corresponding to the result of the determination by the game value image determining means is executed.

  From the player's point of view, even after the storage of the gaming value is performed until the start operation is detected by the start operation detection means, the game value is stored in the storage means triggered by the storage of the game value. In addition to this, it is possible to give an impression as if the game value is stored in the production means. And, at the stage of storage of the game value, since the lottery such as the determination of the so-called internal winning combination is not performed, although it is not possible to notify the lottery result, following the effect of displaying the image of the game value By executing the effect according to the result of the determination by the value image determining means, depending on the result of the determination by the game value image determining means, there is provided a chance element that the specific effect which can not be obtained easily can be executed. Be done.

  As a result, according to the present invention, even after the storage of the game value is performed until the start operation is detected by the start operation detection means, any effect relating to the game is executed, and a game which has not been made so far It is possible to provide a gaming machine having sex.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, even when the game value is bet on the betting means and the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means, the effect relating to the game is executed, and unprecedented game characteristics It is possible to provide a gaming machine having

[Appendix 16]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 16 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, random values are extracted based on a predetermined opportunity and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and drive control of the stepping motor is carried out to carry out a plurality of operations. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, drive control of the stepping motor is performed, and control of stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels is performed based on the internal winning combination.

  So far, the lottery of winning combination is mainly triggered by the detection of the start operation by the start switch. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-236051, means for selecting one lottery timing from a plurality of preset lottery timings, and means for determining an internal state by lottery performed at the selected lottery timings It has also been proposed to provide Specifically, the control means of the gaming machine performs random number extraction, (A) when the wait timer reaches 4.1 seconds, (A) when a medal is inserted, (C) the start lever is effective, And it is performed three times when the start lever is operated. Then, the control means selects at which timing the extracted random number is to be used, and determines the internal winning combination using the selected random number.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In the configuration described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-236051, it is unclear which of the plurality of lottery timings will be used for lottery (determination of a random number value) for determining the internal state. It becomes difficult for the player to aim and acquire. However, in the configuration described in Patent Document 1, it is not possible to say that the diversity of the effects relating to the game including the notification of the internal winning combination is enhanced by devising the lottery timing of the winning combination. There is room for providing a gaming machine with unprecedented gaming characteristics by associating with the effects related to the game.

  This invention is made in view of such a problem, and the decision result of the privilege provision including the alert of an internal winning combination by linking the timing which determines whether a privilege is given and the presentation regarding a game The purpose is to provide a gaming machine with a more varied presentation of the game.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of symbol display sections capable of variably displaying and stopping displaying a plurality of symbols (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, reel display window 4),
Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by a player (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 79);
And standby means for waiting until the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time when the elapsed time elapsed from the start of the variable display of the plurality of symbols in the unit game before the one unit game has not reached the predetermined time (For example, main control circuit 91 capable of executing weight processing and lock processing at the game start time),
Symbol variation means for variably displaying the symbol when the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor);
Privilege giving determination means for determining whether to give a privilege (for example, main control circuit 91);
Production means capable of performing production (for example, information display 14);
Production control means for controlling the production of the production means (for example, the main control circuit 91 for controlling production on the information display 14);
With
The privilege grant determining means can determine whether to grant the privilege when the symbol change display by the symbol change means is started.
The production control means can execute notification of a result determined by the privilege grant determination means when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time and the symbol variation display starts.
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the bonus award determination means, unlike the case where the start operation is detected by the start operation detection means, the variable display of a plurality of symbols is performed in the unit game before one unit game. When waiting by the waiting means until the elapsed time elapsed from the start is reached reaches a predetermined time, and when the variable display of the symbol by the symbol changing means is started, it is possible to make a decision on giving a privilege.

  Then, when the start operation is detected, if the elapsed time has not reached the predetermined time, the effect control means does not yet have the result of the determination by the bonus provision determination means, so the result of the determination by the bonus provision determination means is It cannot be notified. On the other hand, if the elapsed time has reached a predetermined time when the start operation is detected, the elapsed time will reach a predetermined time, and the fluctuation display of the symbol by the symbol fluctuation means is performed, and the determination by the privilege provision determination means is made Since the result of is obtained, it is possible to execute notification of the result of the determination by the privilege giving determination means.

  In this manner, the waiting by the waiting means is executed prior to the determination of the presence or absence of the benefit grant by the benefit grant determining means, the standby by the waiting means is performed, and the variation display of the symbol by the symbol variation means is started. By determining the presence or absence of the privilege grant by the grant determination means, by waiting without performing the start operation until the predetermined time elapses, the privilege grant determined at substantially the same time as the timing of performing the start operation A pattern is received immediately upon notification of the result of determination by the determination means, and the start operation is performed during the predetermined time period, and after performing the start operation, waiting is performed until the predetermined time period elapses, and then the privilege provision determination means It is possible to provide two patterns of playability with a pattern to be notified of the result of the determination by the.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to decide at the judgment of the player whether or not to stand by without performing the start operation until the predetermined time has elapsed, thereby making it possible to determine the privilege giving means. It is possible to change it into a pattern that immediately receives notification of the result of the decision made by, and a pattern that receives notification of the result of the decision made by the privilege giving determination means after waiting for the predetermined time to elapse after the start operation is performed. . Therefore, by associating the determination timing of giving the benefit with the timing at which the effect on the game is executed, the effect on the game including the notification of the result of the determination by the benefit giving determining means is further diversified. Machine can be provided.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A predetermined time determining means for determining the predetermined time;
The waiting time waits until the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time determined by the predetermined time determining means,
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the waiting time can be made longer or shorter, and although it was thought that the user waited until a predetermined time elapses, it is not actually waiting and is abbreviated as the timing of starting operation. I couldn't immediately receive a notification of the internal winning combination decided at the same time, or I couldn't wait for the predetermined time to pass, but I actually thought that the predetermined time had not passed. There is a possibility that it is waiting until a predetermined time has passed, and it is possible to immediately receive notification of an internal winning combination determined substantially at the same time as the timing of performing the start operation. Therefore, more diversity can be added to the game.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, by linking the timing to determine the awarding of the benefit with the timing at which the effect relating to the game is executed, the effect relating to the game including the notification of the internal winning combination is further diversified. A gaming machine can be provided.

[Appendix 17]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 17 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  By the way, a gaming machine having a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like, that is, a function of assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) has been developed. Furthermore, conventionally, in addition to the AT function, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, a function in which a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is higher than normal is activated, that is, a function of replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”). A gaming machine is also being developed.

  There is also a gaming machine having a function (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) in which both AT and RT operate simultaneously. In such a gaming machine, it is proposed to provide a specific gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state, determine the number of additional games to extend the remaining number of games in the specific gaming state, and notify the number of the additional games on the liquid crystal display device It is done.

Various devices are made to the notification mode of the number of added games. For example, in the notification game state, it is possible to execute an addition game that can determine the number of addition unit games of the notification game over a period of a predetermined unit game number, and it is possible to determine the addition unit game number of the addition game in the addition game. There has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a certain additional game execution means. In this gaming machine, the additional game execution means is a plurality of types of addition modes in which the addition mode of the unit game number of the notification game and the unit game number of the additional game are different from each other in the additional game performed at the start of the game period in the notification game state. There is an addition mode determination means for determining a predetermined addition mode from among the above, and in the addition game, when a predetermined internal winning combination corresponding to the addition mode is determined, the number of addition unit games of the notification game can be increased. The addition of the additional game is determined (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-063989).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
The size of the additional game number is a major concern for the player because it directly affects the success or failure of the game. Therefore, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to determine the predetermined addition mode from among a plurality of types of addition modes in which the addition mode of the unit game number of the notification game and the unit game number of the top game is different from each other. This can lead to diversification of notification modes of the number of unit games played, and can enhance the player's interest in determining the period of the game state advantageous for the player such as ART and AT.

  However, even with the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is difficult to frequently notify the number of unit games far apart from the number actually determined as the number of additional games as the number of additional games for notification . Therefore, there is still room for improvement in the notification mode of the unit game number of the additional game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and enables notification of a unit game number larger than the actual top game number as the top game number for notification, and as the game progresses, the actual top game An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the difference between the number of games and the number of additional games for notification to a low level.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine that determines whether to grant a privilege and grants a privilege when it is determined,
A plurality of symbol display sections capable of variably displaying and stopping displaying a plurality of symbols (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, reel display window 4),
An internal winning combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations (for example, the main control circuit 91),
Symbol variation means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) for fluctuating display of the above symbols;
Stop operation means provided corresponding to the plurality of symbol display portions and receiving a stop operation for stopping the fluctuation display of the symbols (for example, main control circuit 91, stop switch board 80);
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation means, the symbol display unit corresponding to the stop operation means subjected to the stop operation is variably displayed Stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the design (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor),
Privilege giving determination means for determining whether to give a privilege (for example, main control circuit 91);
Addition determining means for determining an addition period indicating a degree of extension of the period to which the benefit is given according to a predetermined opportunity (for example, main control circuit 91);
An informing means for informing information relating to a game (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11);
Initial value determination means for determining an initial value of a notification addition period to be notified by the notification means based on the addition period determined by the addition determination means (for example, the sub control circuit 101);
With
The plurality of winning combinations can control the stop control means so that the combination of predetermined symbols is stopped on the effective line when the operation order of the stop operation means is a predetermined operation order Including various types of push
When the extra period is determined by the extra decision means,
The notification means is provided with a plurality of display areas (for example, left area 11L, middle area 11C, right area 11R) capable of displaying numbers corresponding to the plurality of symbol display portions,
In the display area, the initial value determined by the initial value determining means is displayed,
Subsequent to the determination of the additional period by the additional determination means, when any one of the pushing order is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, in the first stop operation of the plurality of display areas The numeral displayed in the display area corresponding to the symbol display portion provided corresponding to the stop operation means for stopping the combination of the predetermined symbols on the effective line is replaced with another number.
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the privilege grant determining means determines whether to grant a privilege. Then, the addition determining means determines an addition period indicating the degree of extension of the period during which the benefit is provided, based on a predetermined opportunity. Then, the initial value determination means determines the initial value of the notification addition period to be notified by the notification means based on the addition period determined by the addition determination means.

  When the extra period is determined, the initial value determined by the initial value determining means is displayed in a plurality of display areas capable of displaying numbers corresponding to the plurality of symbol display portions in the notification means.

  Then, when one of the push winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means following the determination of the additional period by the additional determining means, the effective line is displayed on the active line in the first stop operation among the plurality of display areas. The numeral displayed in the display area corresponding to the symbol display section provided corresponding to the stop operation means for stopping the combination of predetermined symbols in the symbol is replaced with another numeral.

  For example, the display area corresponding to the symbol display unit provided corresponding to the stop operation means for stopping a predetermined symbol combination on the active line in the first stop operation is the digit of the initial value of the extra period for notification. In the case of a display area that displays a number corresponding to a digit larger than a number, a number corresponding to a digit larger than the number of digits of the initial value of the notification superimposing period is replaced with a number larger than the digit originally displayed. obtain. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that the overtaking period may be greatly extended in response to the decision that the pressing bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, and in fact, the notification mode in the notification means is By changing, it is possible to receive an impression that the overlay period has greatly increased, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The initial value determination means determines a period equal to or less than the addition period determined by the addition determination means as an initial value of a notification addition period notified by the notification means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the number of additional games for notification from becoming significantly larger than the actual number of additional games.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
When the extra period is determined by the extra decision means,
The notification means is further provided with another display area (for example, another area 11D) capable of displaying numbers separately from the display area,
Of the plurality of display areas, the additional display area is larger than a number displayed in a display area for displaying a number corresponding to a digit larger than the number of digits of the initial value of the notification addition period; A number smaller than the number displayed in the display area that displays the number corresponding to the same number of digits as the initial value of the extra period is displayed.
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the display area corresponding to the symbol display unit provided corresponding to the stop operation means for stopping the combination of the predetermined symbols on the active line in the first stop operation is for notification. When the display area displays a number corresponding to a digit larger than the number of digits of the initial value of the additional period, a number corresponding to a digit larger than the number of digits of the initial value of the notification additional period is originally displayed. Replace with a number greater than a number. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that the overtaking period may be greatly extended in response to the decision that the pressing bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, and in fact, the notification mode in the notification means is By changing, it is possible to receive an impression that the overlay period has greatly increased, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

  On the other hand, the display area corresponding to the symbol display unit provided corresponding to the stop operation means for stopping the predetermined symbol combination on the active line in the first stop operation is the initial value of the extra period for notification. In the case of a display area that displays a number corresponding to the same digit as the number of digits, a number corresponding to the same digit as the initial digit number of the notification superimposing period is replaced with a number smaller than the originally displayed digit. Therefore, as the game progresses, the difference between the actual number of additional games and the number of additional games for notification can be reduced.

  In addition, since the effect of extending the overlay period in the notification means is performed by changing a number corresponding to a digit larger than the initial digit number of the notification overlay period, the player can greatly extend the overlay period. You can get the impression that On the other hand, since the effect of shortening the overlay period in the notification means is made by changing the number corresponding to the same digit number as the initial value of the notification overlay period, the player can extend the overlay period. The impression that it is smaller than the degree of decrease in the overlay period can be received.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the number of unit games larger than the actual number of added games can be reported as the number of additional games for notification, and the actual number of additional games and the number of additional games for notification are increased as the game progresses. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of keeping the difference between the two low.

[Appendix 18]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of appendix 18 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  By the way, when the gaming house is closed, if the game situation stored inside is not updated at all and is left undecided, the game situation at that stage is carried over on the next business day. For example, it is assumed that the game situation stored inside is a game situation advantageous to the player, such as during a so-called bonus flag, during a sign, during a chance zone rush, during a high probability of winning a specific internal winning combination internally. The player who plays immediately after the opening of the next business day will be given an advantageous situation. From the viewpoint of the game arcade, it is desirable to avoid the appearance of many players enjoying the above-mentioned advantageous situation in store operation.

  For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-049285 discloses that the pachislot machine 1 is turned off for a predetermined time or more in order to prevent the occurrence of the standing state of game information (the number of digested games etc.) It is disclosed that the same initialization processing as the initialization processing performed at the time of receiving the setting change command is automatically performed when returning from (for example, when the power is turned on at the time of opening the game arcade).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-049285, the burden on the staff for the initialization process can be alleviated, and even if the staff forgets the work of the initialization process before opening the store, the game is unfair It can be prevented from occurring.

  However, in consideration of the management aspect of the store, it is desirable to give the player the merit of playing immediately after the store opening and to operate the store at a high operation rate immediately after the store opening. In that sense, it is preferable not to initialize all the gaming machines uniformly, but to leave a manual element that allows the gaming shop side to select a gaming machine to be initialized and a gaming machine not to be initialized.

  However, the initialization process is a burdensome task for game arcade staff, and it is desirable to reduce the burden of the initialization process as much as possible.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and while holding the merit of playing immediately after opening a store, by playing immediately after opening a store, while suppressing the risk that a large number of players enjoying advantageous situations appear, It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the load on the staff of the game arcade involved in the process of initializing gaming information.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising: variable display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays; and game control means for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means,
First game information (for example, background image on the liquid crystal display 11, etc., information that becomes an initial value by initialization of the game information, power on / off, etc.) and second game information (eg, game state) A game that can store multiple game information including information related to type, information on front mode, information on back mode, etc., but it will become an initial value if game information is initialized, but will not be an initial value at power on / off Information storage means (for example, main RAM 95, sub RAM 103),
The initialization means capable of initializing the game information stored in the game information storage means and setting it to an initial value when a predetermined operation (for example, a setting value change operation) is performed (for example, at the time of setting change) Main control circuit 91) capable of executing the initialization process of
With
The initialization means is
When the initialization operation is performed, both the first game information and the second game information stored in the game information storage unit can be set to initial values,
When the power on / off operation is performed, the first game information stored in the game information storage unit can be set to the initial value, while the current value of the second game information can be set. It can be maintained as it is
An informing means capable of informing the game information stored in the game information storage means when a specific operation that cannot be performed by the player (for example, an operation of twisting a door key while pressing the MAX bet button 21) is performed ( For example, the liquid crystal display device 11, speakers 65L and 65R),
And the like.

  According to such a gaming machine, the notification means can notify the game information stored in the game information storage means when a specific operation that cannot be performed by the player is performed.

  The player performs the above-mentioned specific operation and can not receive notification by the notification means. Thereby, it can prevent that a specific player becomes advantageous.

  The store clerk at the game arcade basically performs the above specific operation, performs a predetermined operation on the gaming machine which has been notified by the notification means, and initializes the game information stored in the game information storage means It is not necessary to initialize the gaming information for all the gaming machines, and the burden on the initialization can be reduced.

  In addition, instead of uniformly initializing game information for all gaming machines notified by the notification means, a manual that allows the gaming shop side to select a gaming machine to be initialized and a gaming machine not to be initialized. The element is left. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the merit of playing immediately after the store opening, and it is possible to increase the operation rate of the store immediately after the store opening.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific operation includes an operation of a door key provided on a door that can be opened and closed.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the specific operation is an operation that the player can not reliably perform, it is possible to reliably prevent the specific player from becoming advantageous.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, a game related to a process of initializing game information while suppressing the risk that a large number of players who enjoy an advantageous situation appear by playing a game immediately after opening a store while retaining the merit of playing a game immediately after opening a store. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the burden on the store staff.

[Appendix 19]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 19 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  By the way, a gaming machine having a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like, that is, a function of assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) has been developed. Furthermore, conventionally, in addition to the AT function, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, a function in which a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is higher than normal is activated, that is, a function of replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”). A gaming machine is also being developed.

  There is also a gaming machine having a function (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) in which both AT and RT operate simultaneously. In such a gaming machine, it is proposed to provide a specific gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state, determine the number of additional games to extend the remaining number of games in the specific gaming state, and notify the number of the additional games on the liquid crystal display device It is done.

  Various devices are made to the notification mode of the number of added games. For example, instead of performing the notification method of notifying the additional game number every time the game number is added in the ART mode, and not notifying the additional game number every time the game number is added, collectively at the end time of the ART mode It has been proposed to provide an effect method for notification and to allow the player to arbitrarily select these effect methods.

  Also, for example, in a unit game in a special gaming state, whether or not to execute a privilege granting effect that grants a privilege when the timing of the stop operation for the variable display of symbols in the display sequence is within a corresponding predetermined time range. While deciding, as a bonus, the bonus giving effect determining means capable of deciding the predetermined adding unit game number of the notification game, and the predetermined adding unit number of games determined by the benefit giving effect determining means is equal to or less than the prescribed adding unit game number. In some cases, specific information suggesting a predetermined number of addition unit games is not broadcast, and if the predetermined number of addition unit games is greater than a specified number of addition unit games, the predetermined number of addition unit games is suggested. There has been proposed a gaming machine provided with addition number suggestion effect execution means for notifying specific information (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-063987).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
The size of the additional game number is a major concern for the player because it directly affects the success or failure of the game. Therefore, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the predetermined addition unit game number becomes larger than the predetermined addition unit game number, and the notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is performed, so that the player can enjoy the game Can be enhanced.

  However, when the "prescribed addition unit game number" which is the reference of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is large, the notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is hardly performed, and therefore the interest of the game can be enhanced I can't say that. On the other hand, in order to increase the frequency of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means, the notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is made by decreasing the “prescribed addition unit game number” as the reference of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means. The value of the game will be reduced, and this also cannot enhance the fun of gaming. Therefore, a game machine capable of performing notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means at a high frequency even after increasing the "prescribed addition unit game number" which is the reference of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means Is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and in a gaming machine for notifying when the number of added games is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the notification is frequently performed with high frequency after the predetermined number is increased. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by performing.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is possible to shift to a privilege state (for example, ART) in which a privilege can be granted when it is determined whether to grant a privilege, and the privilege state includes an additional period indicating the degree of extension of the period of the privilege state. A game machine provided with an additional period determination section (for example, an additional zone) that extends the period of the privilege state when determined.
In the additional period determination section, an additional determination means for determining an additional period indicating the degree of extension of the privilege state period (for example, the main control circuit 91 capable of executing the additional zone 3 process (FIG. 164) in the modified example 10). ),
Period storage means for storing the period of the benefit state (for example, ART game number counter);
Notification means for notifying information on the benefit state (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11);
Non-notification period storage means for storing the addition period not determined by the notification means and storing the non-notification addition period as an unreported addition period in a predetermined case (for example, the number of ART games is not yet determined). Notification counter),
With
For the first addition period determination section after the decision to grant the privilege and the transition to the privilege state,
While the extra period determined by the extra determination means is added as the period of the privilege state and stored in the period storage means,
The informing means informs a period shorter than the addition period determined by the addition determination means as the addition period,
In the non-notification period storage means, a difference obtained by subtracting a period notified as an addition period by the notification means from an addition period actually determined by the addition period determination means is stored as an unnotification addition period,
For the second and subsequent addition period determination sections after determining to grant the privilege and shifting to the privilege state,
While the extra period determined by the extra determination means is added as the period of the privilege state and stored in the period storage means,
In the predetermined case, the additional period determined by the additional determination unit is not notified by the notification unit, and is stored as the unreported additional period in the non-notification period storage unit,
The notification means notifies that the predetermined period has been added for the benefit state period, when the unannounced addition period stored in the unannounced period storage means becomes a predetermined period,
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to award a benefit, and when it is determined, it is possible to shift to a benefit state in which the benefit can be granted. In the privilege state, an extra period indicating the degree of extension of the period of the privilege state is determined, and when it is determined, an extra period determination section for extending the period of the privilege state is provided.

  Here, for the initial addition period determination section, the addition period determined by the addition determination means is added as a benefit state period and is stored in the period storage means, while the notification means is an addition determination means as an addition period. In the unannounced period storage means, the difference between the added period actually determined by the added period determining means minus the period notified as the added period by the notifying means is not It is stored as a broadcast additional period.

  In addition, for the second and subsequent addition period determination sections, while the addition period determined by the addition determination means is added as a period of the benefit state and stored in the period storage means, in a predetermined case, the addition determination means The notification means does not notify of the additional period determined by the above, and is stored in the unannounced period storage means as an unannounced additional period.

  Then, when the non-notification addition period stored in the non-notification period storage unit becomes a predetermined period, the notification unit notifies that the predetermined period has been added for the period of the privilege state.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to reliably store the unannounced additional period in the unannounced period storage means, at least for the first time when the additional period is determined. Therefore, even if the predetermined period as a reference of notification in the notification means is set to a relatively long period, the unannounced period storage means is surely stored in the unannounced period storage means at the first time when the additional period determination period is set. Compared to the conventional gaming machine which can not be said, the frequency at which the unannounced addition period becomes the above-mentioned predetermined period increases. Even if the predetermined period which is the reference of the notification in the notification means is set to a relatively long period, the notification that the period of the benefit state has been added can be performed at a high frequency, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Is possible.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
For the first additional period determination section,
The notification means notifies, as an additional period, a minimum period determined at least by the additional period determination means;
In the unannounced period storage means, a difference obtained by subtracting the minimum period from the additional period actually determined by the additional period determining means is stored as an unannounced additional period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the initial stage of the additional period determination section, the unannounced period storage means stores the unannounced additional period by the additional period determination means from the additional period actually determined by the additional period determination means. The difference minus at least the minimum period determined is stored. Therefore, the unannounced additional period stored in the unannounced period storage means can be further enlarged in the first stage of the additional period determination period, and as a result, the frequency at which the unannounced additional period becomes the predetermined period is further enhanced. Rise.

  On the other hand, since the notification means notifies the minimum period determined at least by the addition period determination means as the addition period, the player proceeds with the game while having a sense of security that the addition of the minimum period is surely performed. be able to.

  According to such a gaming machine, even if the predetermined period which is the reference of the notification in the notification means is set to a relatively long period, the notification that the period of the benefit state is added is frequently performed. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, in a gaming machine that notifies when the number of added games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the predetermined number is increased, and still the notification is performed at a high frequency, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Possible game machines can be provided.

[Appendix 20]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 20 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In such a gaming machine, a period called an assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") is generated which can reduce or increase the number of medals possessed by the player. A feature is provided. In the gaming machine having the AT function, the mode selection lottery means uses the mode selection lottery table composed of the same type of data when the setting is changed and when the AT game is ended by the limiter. It has been proposed to select a transition lottery mode (see Patent Document 1).

  According to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-086761, after a state advantageous to the player of AT game termination by the limiter occurs, the AT transition lottery mode is selected in the same process as at the time of setting change So, for example, the mode of AT transition lottery which is more advantageous than setting change time is selected at the end of AT game, and after AT game is over, the right of AT game is re-given by notification lottery means in a short period of time Can prevent the player from feeling a sense of expectation.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-086761, there is a possibility that the interest of the game after the AT game is diminished.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and prevents the player from giving up an excessive sense of expectation that the benefit will be re-given in a short period of time, and after the end of the game for which the benefit is given Also aims to provide a gaming machine capable of maintaining the interest of gaming.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine having a first state (for example, a normal gaming state) and a second state (for example, an ART gaming state) as a state for performing a game,
Game information storage means capable of storing game information (eg, main RAM 95);
When the benefit given in the second state reaches a predetermined amount (for example, payout of 3000 medals), or the section in the second state can be continuously executed at the upper limit (for example, ART game) Initializing means for initializing predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means when the number of states reaches 1500 games (for example, main control circuit 91 that can be initialized when the limiter is activated);
With
A plurality of modes (for example, a “low accuracy” mode, a “high accuracy short” mode, and a “high accuracy long” mode) having different degrees of expected transition from the first state to the second state are provided,
The predetermined game information includes mode information indicating which mode is the current mode among a plurality of modes having different degrees of expected transition from the first state to the second state,
Mode update lottery table storage means for storing a mode update lottery table with different update expectation degrees for updating the mode information to another mode for each of the plurality of modes (for example, a table mode transition lottery number determination table and a table) Main ROM 94 in which the mode transition lottery table is stored,
Mode update determining means for determining whether to update the mode information to another mode according to a mode update lottery table corresponding to the mode set in the mode setting means (for example, table mode transition processing (FIG. 173)) Main control circuit 91),
Mode updating means for updating the mode information when the mode update determining means determines that the mode is to be updated (for example, the main control circuit 91);
And further
The initialization unit is configured to select the mode when the privilege given in the second state reaches a predetermined amount, or when the section in the second state is an upper limit of continuously executable sections. Updating the information to the lowest mode with the lowest expectation of transition to the second state;
The mode update lottery table corresponding to the lowest mode is updated to an expected mode in which the expected transition from the first state to the second state is larger than a predetermined expectation compared to other mode update lottery tables. Expectation is set high,
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are provided a plurality of modes with different degrees of expected transition to the second state, and the initialization means is configured such that when the privilege granted in the second state reaches a predetermined amount, or When the section in the second state becomes the upper limit of the feasible section continuously, the mode information is updated to the lowest mode in which the degree of transition expectation to the second state is the lowest. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive expectation that the game is transferred to the second state again in a short period of time in a game after the privilege given in the second state reaches a predetermined amount.

  Subsequently, the mode update determining means determines whether to update from the current mode to another mode according to the mode update lottery table corresponding to the mode set in the mode setting means. At that time, in the mode update lottery table corresponding to the lowest mode, updating is performed such that the transition expectation from the first state to the second state is updated to an expectation mode larger than a predetermined expectation compared to other mode update lottery tables. High expectations are set. Therefore, the mode update determination means determines to update from the mode with low update expectation degree to the high mode (expected mode) with high frequency. If the mode is updated to the expectation mode, the transition expectation to shift the state of the game to the second state is increased, and as a result, the interest of the game may be maintained even after the end of the game to which the benefit is given. It becomes possible.

  Therefore, according to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of anticipation that the benefit will be re-improved in a short period of time, and at the same time after the end of the game for which the benefit is provided. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of maintaining the interest.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The initialization means updates the mode information to the lowest mode even when a predetermined operation (for example, a setting value changing operation) including an operation of a door key provided on a door that can be opened and closed is performed,
The mode update lottery table for the lowest mode corresponding to the lowest mode is:
When the privilege given in the second state reaches a predetermined amount, or when the section in the second state reaches the upper limit of a continuously executable section, the mode is updated to the lowest mode. A mode update lottery table for the first lowest mode referred to when
A second lowest mode mode update lottery table which is referred to when a mode is updated and the lowest mode is entered when the predetermined operation is performed;
Have
The first lowest mode mode update lottery table is set to have a higher update expectation level for updating from the lowest mode to the expected mode than the second lowest mode mode update lottery table.
It is characterized by that.

  Initialization of the game information including the mode update means updating the mode to the lowest mode is performed when a predetermined operation including a door key operation is performed in addition to the case where the privilege granted in the second state reaches a predetermined amount. Also executed when.

  In this case, when the privilege granted in the second state reaches a predetermined amount, the mode update lottery table corresponding to the lowest mode is set to have a relatively high update expectation level for updating from the lowest mode to the expected mode.

  On the other hand, if the game information is initialized by performing a predetermined operation including the operation of the door key when the gaming house is closed, etc., the benefit given in the second state becomes a predetermined amount. The mode update to the expected mode is not performed as frequently as possible.

  According to such a gaming machine, for a player who intends to proceed with the game after the privilege granted in the second state reaches a predetermined amount, the privilege is excessively re-granted in a short period of time. While preventing the player from feeling a sense of expectation, it is possible to keep maintaining the interest of the game even after the end of the game to which the benefit is given. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where an excessively great bonus is given to a player who plays immediately after the opening of the store on the next business day.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine having a first state (for example, a normal gaming state) and a second state (for example, an ART gaming state) as a state for performing a game,
Game information storage means capable of storing game information (eg, main RAM 95);
When the privilege given in the second state reaches a predetermined amount (for example, payout of 3000 medals), and a predetermined operation (for example, setting value) including an operation of a door key provided on an openable / closable door When at least one of the change operation has been performed, or when the section in the second state has reached the upper limit of the section which can be continuously executed (for example, the number of ART gaming states is 1,500 games) And initialization means for initializing predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means, at least when one of the predetermined operations is performed, and (for example, when the limiter is activated) Initializable main control circuit 91),
With
A plurality of modes (for example, a “low accuracy” mode, a “high accuracy short” mode, and a “high accuracy long” mode) having different degrees of expected transition from the first state to the second state are provided,
The predetermined game information includes mode information indicating which mode is the current mode among a plurality of modes having different degrees of expected transition from the first state to the second state,
Mode update lottery table storage means for storing a mode update lottery table with different update expectation degrees for updating the mode information to another mode for each of the plurality of modes (for example, a table mode transition lottery number determination table and a table) Main ROM 94 in which the mode transition lottery table is stored,
Mode update determining means for determining whether the mode information is to be updated to another mode according to a mode update lottery table corresponding to the mode set in the mode setting means (for example, table mode transition processing (FIG. 174) Main control circuit 91) capable of executing
Mode updating means for updating the mode information when the mode update determining means determines that the mode is to be updated (for example, the main control circuit 91);
And further
The initialization means is configured to perform a predetermined amount when the benefit given in the second state reaches a predetermined amount, and when at least one of the predetermined operation is performed, or a section in the second state The mode information is expected to be transferred to the second state in any one of the case where the upper limit of the section which can be continuously executed and the case where at least one of the predetermined operation is performed is performed. Update to the lowest mode,
The mode update lottery table for the lowest mode corresponding to the lowest mode is:
When the privilege given in the second state reaches a predetermined amount, or when the section in the second state reaches the upper limit of a continuously executable section, the mode is updated to the lowest mode. A mode update lottery table for the first lowest mode referred to when
A second lowest mode mode update lottery table which is referred to when a mode is updated and the lowest mode is entered when the predetermined operation is performed;
Have
The degree of update expectation to be updated from the lowest mode to the expected mode is different between the first lowest mode mode update lottery table and the second lowest mode mode update lottery table.
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are provided a plurality of modes in which the degree of expectation of transition to the second state is different, and the initialization means is configured to receive the predetermined amount of benefits given in the second state, When at least one of the cases where the predetermined operation including the operation of the door key provided on the openable door is performed is performed, or the section in the second state becomes the upper limit of the executable section continuously And / or when at least one of the predetermined operations has been performed, the mode information is updated to the lowest mode with the lowest transition expectation to the second state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive expectation that the game is transferred to the second state again in a short period of time in a game after the privilege given in the second state reaches a predetermined amount.

  Subsequently, the mode update determining means determines whether to update from the current mode to another mode according to the mode update lottery table corresponding to the mode set in the mode setting means. At that time, initialization of the game information is performed by performing a predetermined operation including the operation of the door key when the privilege granted in the second state has become a predetermined amount, etc., and when the game store is closed, etc. The update expectation in which the mode is updated to the expectation mode differs from when it is performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, for a player who intends to proceed with the game after the privilege granted in the second state reaches a predetermined amount, the privilege is excessively re-granted in a short period of time. While preventing the player from feeling a sense of expectation, it is possible to keep maintaining the interest of the game even after the end of the game to which the benefit is given. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where an excessively great bonus is given to a player who plays immediately after the opening of the store on the next business day.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, in the game after the end of the privilege grant, after the game to which the privilege is granted, while preventing an excessive expectation that the privilege is re-granted in a short period of time from being given to the player. Also, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of maintaining the interest of gaming.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachi-slot machine, 3L, 3C, 3R ... Reel, 4 ... Reel display window, 19L, 19C, 19R ... Stop button, 91 ... Main control circuit, 101 ... Sub control circuit

Claims (3)

A gaming machine capable of executing a game when a predetermined number of game values are bet,
Privilege grant determining means for determining whether to grant a privilege;
Production means capable of performing production,
Production control means for controlling the production of the production means;
A storage means capable of storing the gaming value in response to detecting the gaming value storing signal;
With
If the storage control means detects the storage signal while executing a predetermined performance, the performance control means controls the rendering of notification regarding the provision of the benefit in the performance means according to the storage signal detected.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The effect control means controls an effect of notification regarding provision of the benefit in the effect means according to the number of times the storage signal is detected during execution of the predetermined effect.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that. The predetermined effect is a continuous hitting effect which urges to continuously perform a predetermined operation within a predetermined time,
The production control unit controls the production of the notification related to the provision of the privilege in the production unit according to the number of times the storage signal is detected during execution of the continuous hit production.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that.

Images